Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Product and Software Release 9.4 July 2012

 

 

Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici

Téléchager le pdf : http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/optical/15000r9_4/dwdm/configuration/guide/454d94_config.pdf

 

 

Voir également :

[TXT]

 Cisco-Telephones-IP-..> 01-Jun-2013 10:28  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-UCS-C200-Serve..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ONS-15454-DWDM..> 01-Jun-2013 10:27  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ONS-15454-Refe..> 01-Jun-2013 10:26  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Unified-IP-Pho..> 01-Jun-2013 08:01  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Meraki-Cloud-C..> 01-Jun-2013 07:55  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IPSec-Negotiat..> 01-Jun-2013 07:52  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASA-5500.htm      01-Jun-2013 07:45  2.1M  

[TXT]

 CiscoSecurityApplian..> 01-Jun-2013 07:35  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-836-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-837-Router-and..> 03-Apr-2013 15:38  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Manuel-du-tele..> 03-Apr-2013 15:37  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 10:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:44  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:40  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:34  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 04-Sep-2012 09:24  3.7M  

[TXT]

 CiscoPrimeNetworkCon..> 04-Sep-2012 09:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 XML-Schema-Object-Do..> 03-Sep-2012 18:35  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IOS-XR-XML-API..> 03-Sep-2012 18:29  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:25  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:20  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:15  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-IOS-XR-Carrier..> 03-Sep-2012 17:10  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-ASR-9000-Serie..> 03-Sep-2012 17:07  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Introduction-t..> 03-Sep-2012 16:57  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Cisco-Security-Appli..> 03-Sep-2012 16:54  4.2M  

[TXT]

 liendocumentationcis..> 28-Jan-2012 10:29  5.2K  

[TXT]

 white_paper_c11-4621..> 28-Jan-2012 10:24   55K  

[TXT]

 cisco.htm               26-Jan-2012 17:35  1.5M  

[TXT]

 liendocumentationcis..> 26-Jan-2012 17:32  5.2K  

[TXT]

 liensdocumentationci..> 26-Jan-2012 17:31  5.0K  

[TXT]

 CiscoASA5500.htm        01-Jan-2012 22:26  3.3M  

[TXT]

 ciscoVPNClientAdmini..> 01-Jan-2012 12:56  223K  

[TXT]

 Cisco7600SeriesRoute..> 01-Jan-2012 12:51  2.7M 
Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 527-0883 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Product and Software Release 9.4 July 2012 Text Part Number: 78-20254-02 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental. Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 Copyright © 2004–2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. iii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 CONTENTS Preface xliii Revision History xliv Document Objectives xlv Audience xlv Document Organization xlv Related Documentation xlviii Document Conventions xlviii Obtaining Optical Networking Information liv Where to Find Safety and Warning Information liv Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM liv Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines lv Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 lvii CHAPTER 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf 1-1 CHAPTER 2 Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI 2-1 CHAPTER 3 Install the Control Cards 3-1 3.1 Card Overview 3-2 3.1.1 Common Control Cards 3-2 3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-2 3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) 3-3 3.2 Safety Labels 3-3 3.3 TCC2 Card 3-3 3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-4 3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions 3-5 3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card 3-6 3.4 TCC2P Card 3-6 3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-7 3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions 3-8 3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card 3-9 3.5 TCC3 Card 3-9 3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-10 Contents iv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions 3-11 3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card 3-12 3.6 TNC and TNCE Card 3-12 3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-13 3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions 3-15 3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards 3-16 3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards 3-16 3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-17 3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions 3-18 3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards 3-19 3.8 Digital Image Signing 3-20 3.8.1 DIS Identification 3-20 3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS 3-20 3.9 AIC-I Card 3-20 3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-21 3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators 3-22 3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls 3-23 3.9.4 Orderwire 3-23 3.9.5 Power Monitoring 3-25 3.9.6 User Data Channel 3-25 3.9.7 Data Communications Channel 3-25 3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card 3-26 3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card 3-26 3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram 3-27 3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators 3-28 3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card 3-28 3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections 3-29 3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC 3-29 3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-29 3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC 3-32 3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-32 3.12 Procedures for Control Cards 3-33 3.12.1 Before You Begin 3-33 NTP- G15 Install the Common Control Cards 3-34 DLP- G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card 3-35 DLP- G34 Install the AIC-I Card 3-38 DLP- G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card 3-39 NTP- G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-41 DLP- G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card 3-42 Contents v Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45 DLP- G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards 3-45 CHAPTER 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards 4-1 4.1 Card Overview 4-1 4.1.1 Card Summary 4-2 4.1.2 Card Compatibility 4-2 4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 4-3 4.3 OSCM Card 4-3 4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-4 4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions 4-5 4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring 4-5 4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card 4-5 4.4 OSC-CSM Card 4-6 4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-8 4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions 4-10 4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring 4-10 4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card 4-11 CHAPTER 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards 5-1 5.1 Card Overview 5-2 5.1.1 Applications 5-2 5.1.2 Card Summary 5-3 5.1.3 Card Compatibility 5-5 5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds 5-7 5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 5-7 5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card 5-7 5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-8 5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions 5-10 5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring 5-11 5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card 5-11 5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 5-11 5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram 5-12 5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions 5-14 5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring 5-14 5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards 5-15 5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card 5-15 5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram 5-16 Contents vi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions 5-18 5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring 5-19 5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card 5-19 5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card 5-20 5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-21 5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions 5-24 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring 5-24 5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card 5-24 5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-25 5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-26 5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions 5-28 5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring 5-29 5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5-29 5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card 5-30 5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-31 5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions 5-34 5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card 5-34 5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-34 5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-35 5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions 5-38 5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring 5-38 5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5-39 5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-39 5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-40 5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring 5-43 5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions 5-44 5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 5-44 5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-45 5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams 5-46 5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring 5-49 5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions 5-49 5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5-49 CHAPTER 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 6-1 6.1 Card Overview 6-1 6.1.1 Card Summary 6-2 6.1.2 Card Compatibility 6-2 6.1.3 Interface Classes 6-3 6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan 6-6 Contents vii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 6.2 Safety Labels 6-9 6.3 32MUX-O Card 6-9 6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions 6-9 6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-9 6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards 6-11 6.3.3 Channel Plan 6-12 6.3.4 Power Monitoring 6-13 6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card 6-13 6.4 32DMX-O Card 6-14 6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions 6-14 6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-15 6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards 6-17 6.4.3 Power Monitoring 6-17 6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card 6-18 6.5 4MD-xx.x Card 6-19 6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions 6-19 6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 6-19 6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards 6-22 6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs 6-22 6.5.4 Power Monitoring 6-22 6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card 6-23 CHAPTER 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units 7-1 7.1 Card Overview 7-1 7.1.1 Card Summary 7-2 7.2 Safety Labels 7-2 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-2 7.3.1 Key Features 7-3 7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram 7-3 7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports 7-4 7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram 7-5 7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions 7-5 7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance 7-5 7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7-6 CHAPTER 8 Provision Protection Switching Module 8-1 8.1 PSM Card Overview 8-1 8.1.1 Key Features 8-2 8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram 8-2 Contents viii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports 8-3 8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators 8-4 8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching 8-4 8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card 8-5 CHAPTER 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards 9-1 9.1 Card Overview 9-1 9.1.1 Card Summary 9-2 9.1.2 Card Compatibility 9-3 9.1.3 Interface Classes 9-4 9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan 9-7 9.2 Safety Labels 9-9 9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-9 9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-9 9.3.2 Power Monitoring 9-11 9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions 9-12 9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card 9-12 9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-12 9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-13 9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs 9-14 9.4.3 Power Monitoring 9-15 9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions 9-15 9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card 9-16 9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-16 9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-16 9.5.2 Wavelength Sets 9-18 9.5.3 Power Monitoring 9-19 9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions 9-19 9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card 9-19 9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-20 9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-20 9.6.2 Power Monitoring 9-22 9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions 9-23 9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card 9-23 9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-23 9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 9-24 9.7.2 Power Monitoring 9-25 9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions 9-26 9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card 9-26 Contents ix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 CHAPTER 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 10-1 10.1 Card Overview 10-2 10.1.1 Card Summary 10-2 10.1.2 Card Compatibility 10-4 10.1.3 Interface Classes 10-6 10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans 10-12 10.2 Safety Labels 10-15 10.3 32WSS Card 10-16 10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-16 10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality 10-20 10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring 10-20 10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan 10-21 10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions 10-22 10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card 10-22 10.4 32WSS-L Card 10-22 10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-23 10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality 10-27 10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring 10-27 10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan 10-27 10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions 10-29 10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card 10-29 10.5 32DMX Card 10-29 10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-29 10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality 10-31 10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring 10-32 10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan 10-32 10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions 10-33 10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card 10-33 10.6 32DMX-L Card 10-34 10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-34 10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality 10-36 10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring 10-37 10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan 10-37 10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions 10-38 10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card 10-38 10.7 40-DMX-C Card 10-39 10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-39 10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality 10-41 10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring 10-42 Contents x Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan 10-42 10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions 10-43 10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card 10-43 10.8 40-DMX-CE Card 10-44 10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-44 10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-46 10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-47 10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan 10-47 10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions 10-48 10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card 10-48 10.9 40-MUX-C Card 10-49 10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-49 10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring 10-51 10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan 10-52 10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions 10-53 10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card 10-53 10.10 40-WSS-C Card 10-54 10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-54 10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality 10-57 10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring 10-57 10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan 10-58 10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions 10-59 10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card 10-60 10.11 40-WSS-CE Card 10-60 10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams 10-60 10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality 10-64 10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring 10-64 10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan 10-65 10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions 10-66 10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card 10-67 10.12 40-WXC-C Card 10-67 10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-68 10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-70 10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-71 10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions 10-73 10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card 10-73 10.13 80-WXC-C Card 10-73 10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-74 10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring 10-76 Contents xi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan 10-77 10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions 10-79 10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card 10-80 10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10-80 10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features 10-80 10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card 10-81 10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-81 10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring 10-84 10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan 10-84 10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card 10-85 10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-86 10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring 10-88 10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan 10-88 10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions 10-90 10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card 10-90 10.15 MMU Card 10-90 10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 10-90 10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring 10-93 10.15.3 MMU Card Functions 10-93 10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card 10-93 CHAPTER 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-1 11.1 Card Overview 11-3 11.1.1 Card Summary 11-3 11.1.2 Card Compatibility 11-6 11.2 Safety Labels 11-10 11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card 11-10 11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-12 11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions 11-13 11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card 11-14 11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card 11-14 11.4.1 Key Features 11-14 11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-15 11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions 11-15 11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card 11-16 11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-16 11.5.1 Key Features 11-16 11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-17 11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions 11-18 Contents xii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards 11-18 11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-18 11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-20 11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-22 11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-23 11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-23 11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-24 11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions 11-24 11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11-25 11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-25 11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-26 11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions 11-28 11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11-28 11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-28 11.9.1 Key Features 11-29 11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-30 11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions 11-31 11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-32 11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card 11-32 11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-32 11.10.1 Key Features 11-33 11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-34 11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions 11-35 11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-36 11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11-38 11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-39 11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-41 11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions 11-43 11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11-44 11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-44 11.12.1 Key Features 11-46 11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram 11-48 11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions 11-49 11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-49 11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11-51 11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-52 11.13.1 Key Features 11-53 11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-56 11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions 11-56 Contents xiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-57 11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11-58 11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-58 11.14.1 Key Features 11-60 11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list 11-62 11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-62 11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions 11-65 11.14.4.1 Client Interface 11-65 11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-66 11.14.4.3 Configuration Management 11-66 11.14.4.4 Security 11-67 11.14.4.5 Card Protection 11-67 11.14.5 IGMP Snooping 11-67 11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions 11-68 11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing 11-68 11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration 11-69 11.14.5.4 Report Suppression 11-69 11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters 11-69 11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping 11-69 11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration 11-70 11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR 11-70 11.14.7 MAC Address Learning 11-70 11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning 11-71 11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval 11-71 11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving 11-71 11.14.9 Link Integrity 11-71 11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity 11-72 11.14.10 Ingress CoS 11-72 11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS 11-72 11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting 11-72 11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate 11-73 11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping 11-73 11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP 11-73 11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol 11-73 11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP 11-74 11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP 11-74 11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP 11-74 11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP 11-74 11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes 11-75 11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions 11-75 Contents xiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP 11-75 11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management 11-75 11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain 11-76 11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association 11-76 11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points 11-76 11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points 11-76 11.14.14.5 CFM Messages 11-77 11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions 11-77 11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM 11-77 11.14.15 Ethernet OAM 11-77 11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM 11-78 11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM 11-78 11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM 11-78 11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions 11-79 11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM 11-79 11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol 11-79 11.14.16.1 REP Segments 11-79 11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments 11-80 11.14.16.3 REP Port States 11-80 11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency 11-80 11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence 11-80 11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing 11-81 11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence 11-81 11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces 11-81 11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions 11-81 11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings 11-82 11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11-82 11.15 ADM-10G Card 11-83 11.15.1 Key Features 11-83 11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC 11-84 11.15.2.1 POS Overview 11-84 11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes 11-85 11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability 11-85 11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability 11-85 11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-85 11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules 11-86 11.15.5 Client Interfaces 11-87 11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces 11-88 11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface 11-88 11.15.8 Configuration Management 11-88 Contents xv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11.15.9 Security 11-90 11.15.10 Protection 11-90 11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes 11-90 11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes 11-90 11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning 11-90 11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics 11-91 Available Circuit Sizes 11-92 11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit 11-93 11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 11-93 11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM 11-93 11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring 11-93 11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions 11-94 11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions 11-96 11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card 11-96 11.16 OTU2_XP Card 11-97 11.16.1 Key Features 11-97 11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-99 11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface 11-101 11.16.3.1 Client Interface 11-101 11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface 11-101 11.16.4 Configuration Management 11-102 11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules 11-103 11.16.6 Security 11-104 11.16.7 ODU Transparency 11-104 11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions 11-105 11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card 11-105 11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-105 11.17.1 Key Features 11-106 11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-106 11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions 11-107 11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card 11-108 11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card 11-108 11.18.1 Key Features 11-108 11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-109 11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions 11-110 11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-111 11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card 11-112 11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-112 11.19.1 Key Features 11-114 Contents xvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-115 11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions 11-116 11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification 11-117 11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11-118 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-119 11.20.1 Key Features 11-121 11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 11-123 11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes 11-126 TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder) 11-126 TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder) 11-128 MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder) 11-129 MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder) 11-130 MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder) 11-131 MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder) 11-133 MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder) 11-134 MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder) 11-135 REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator) 11-135 MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder) 11-137 11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card 11-137 Scenario 1 11-137 Scenario 2 11-138 Scenario 3 11-139 Scenario 4 11-139 Scenario 5 11-140 Scenario 6 11-141 11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features 11-141 11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11-141 11.21 MLSE UT 11-142 11.21.1 Error Decorrelator 11-142 11.22 SFP and XFP Modules 11-142 11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 11-142 11.23.1 Before You Begin 11-142 NTP- G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules 11-144 DLP- G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode 11-146 DLP- G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode 11-147 DLP- G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode 11-149 DLP- G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port 11-150 DLP- G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode 11-151 Contents xvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G277 Provision a Multirate PPM 11-152 DLP- G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services 11-153 DLP- G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate 11-155 DLP- G280 Delete a PPM 11-161 NTP- G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group 11-162 NTP- G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card 11-166 NTP- G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-168 NTP- G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-169 NTP- G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-171 DLP- G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-172 DLP- G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-173 DLP- G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-176 DLP- G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-177 DLP- G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings 11-178 DLP- G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-181 DLP- G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-182 DLP- G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-184 DLP- G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-188 NTP- G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-191 DLP- G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate 11-192 DLP- G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate 11-193 DLP- G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-193 DLP- G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-195 DLP- G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-200 DLP- G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-201 DLP- G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-202 DLP- G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads 11-205 DLP- G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-209 DLP- G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-210 DLP- G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-212 NTP- G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-217 DLP- G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate 11-218 DLP- G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings 11-218 DLP- G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings 11-219 Contents xviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings 11-221 DLP- G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings 11-225 DLP- G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings 11-226 DLP- G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy 11-228 DLP- G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-230 DLP- G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-231 DLP- G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings 11-232 NTP- G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-237 DLP- G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group 11-238 DLP- G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings 11-239 DLP- G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings 11-240 DLP- G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings 11-245 DLP- G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads 11-247 DLP- G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload 11-251 DLP- G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-254 DLP- G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-255 DLP- G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings 11-256 NTP- G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-261 DLP- G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings 11-262 DLP- G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings 11-264 DLP- G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-266 DLP- G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings 11-268 DLP- G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-269 DLP- G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings 11-271 DLP- G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-273 DLP- G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-275 DLP- G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings 11-277 NTP- G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-282 DLP- G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-283 DLP- G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-285 DLP- G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings 11-287 DLP- G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-289 DLP- G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-291 DLP- G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-292 DLP- G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads 11-294 DLP- G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-296 DLP- G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-297 Contents xix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 NTP- G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-300 DLP- G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings 11-301 DLP- G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings 11-303 DLP- G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings 11-305 DLP- G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-306 DLP- G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-308 DLP- G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-309 DLP- G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads 11-311 DLP- G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-314 DLP- G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-315 DLP- G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings 11-319 NTP- G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-322 DLP- G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings 11-323 DLP- G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings 11-324 DLP- G667 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings 11-326 DLP- G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings 11-328 DLP- G691 Change the 40G Muxponder OTU Settings 11-329 DLP- G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds 11-331 DLP- G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads 11-333 DLP- G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-337 DLP- G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-338 DLP- G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings 11-342 NTP- G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings 11-345 DLP- G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC 11-346 DLP- G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC 11-347 DLP- G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC 11-351 Before You Begin 11-352 DLP- G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC 11-352 DLP- G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC 11-353 DLP- G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-354 DLP- G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355 DLP- G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-355 NTP- G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings 11-356 DLP- G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC 11-357 DLP- G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-358 Contents xx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-359 Before You Begin 11-359 DLP- G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-360 DLP- G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-361 DLP- G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362 DLP- G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC 11-362 DLP- G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC 11-363 DLP- G629 Create a MEP Using CTC 11-364 DLP- G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC 11-365 DLP- G631 Create a MIP Using CTC 11-365 DLP- G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC 11-366 DLP- G633 Ping MEP Using CTC 11-367 DLP- G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC 11-367 NTP- G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings 11-368 DLP- G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC 11-369 Before You Begin 11-369 DLP- G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC 11-370 DLP- G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC 11-371 DLP- G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC 11-373 NTP- G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings 11-373 DLP- G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC 11-374 DLP- G645 Create a Segment Using CTC 11-375 Before You Begin 11-375 DLP- G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC 11-377 DLP- G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-378 DLP- G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC 11-379 NTP- G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds 11-379 DLP- G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings 11-381 DLP- G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings 11-389 DLP- G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings 11-391 DLP- G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings 11-393 DLP- G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card 11-395 DLP- G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports 11-396 DLP- G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings 11-397 Contents xxi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings 11-398 DLP- G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings 11-399 DLP- G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-401 DLP- G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-401 DLP- G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-402 NTP- G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-403 DLP- G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-404 NTP- G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-405 NTP- G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-406 DLP- G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-407 NTP- G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-408 NTP- G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-409 DLP- G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-409 DLP- G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile 11-410 NTP- G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards 11-411 DLP- G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC 11-412 NTP- G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card 11-413 DLP- G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC 11-413 DLP- G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-414 DLP- G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-416 DLP- G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds 11-417 DLP- G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings 11-420 NTP- G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring 11-423 DLP- G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring 11-424 DLP- G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring 11-425 NTP- G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds 11-426 DLP- G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings 11-427 DLP- G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings 11-428 DLP- G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings 11-432 DLP- G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads 11-433 DLP- G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-435 Contents xxii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads 11-437 DLP- G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings 11-440 DLP- G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings 11-446 DLP- G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration 11-447 NTP- G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings 11-448 NTP- G192 Force FPGA Update 11-450 NTP- G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group 11-451 NTP- G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator 11-452 NTP- G315 Enable or Disable the Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown Feature 11-452 NTP- G316 Enable REP and FAPS on the same port 11-453 NTP- G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-454 NTP- G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds 11-454 DLP- G695 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings 11-456 DLP- G696 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Ethernet Settings 11-458 DLP- G697 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Settings 11-459 DLP- G698 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Section Trace Settings 11-462 DLP- G699 Enable Auto Sensing for AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards 11-464 DLP- G700 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card SONET/SDH Line Thresholds 11-464 DLP- G701 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line RMON Thresholds 11-467 DLP- G702 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card with Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-471 DLP- G703 Provision the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds 11-472 DLP- G704 Change the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card OTN Settings 11-476 CHAPTER 12 Node Reference 12-1 12.1 DWDM Node Configurations 12-2 12.1.1 Terminal Node 12-2 12.1.2 OADM Node 12-9 12.1.3 ROADM Node 12-11 12.1.4 Hub Node 12-31 12.1.5 Anti-ASE Node 12-35 12.1.6 Line Amplifier Node 12-36 12.1.7 OSC Regeneration Node 12-40 12.2 Supported Node Configurations for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 12-41 12.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in an Add/Drop Node 12-43 12.2.2 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node with Booster Amplification 12-43 12.2.3 OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Card in a Line Site Node Without Post - Amplification 12-45 12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card 12-46 Contents xxiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 12.3.1 Channel Protection 12-47 12.3.2 Multiplex Section Protection 12-48 12.3.3 Line Protection 12-49 12.3.4 Standalone 12-49 12.4 Multishelf Node 12-50 12.4.1 Multishelf Node Layout 12-51 12.4.2 DCC/GCC/OSC Terminations 12-51 12.5 Connecting Passive Modules to a ONS 15454 M2 or ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-52 12.6 Optical Sides 12-52 12.6.1 Optical Side Stages 12-52 12.6.1.1 Fiber Stage 12-53 12.6.1.2 A/D Stage 12-55 12.6.2 Side Line Ports 12-56 12.6.3 Optical Side Configurations 12-56 12.7 Configuring Mesh DWDM Networks 12-61 12.7.1 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-WXC-C Cards 12-61 12.7.1.1 40-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-66 12.7.1.2 40-Channel Colorless n-Degree ROADM Node 12-66 12.7.1.3 40-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-67 12.7.2 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 80-WXC-C Cards 12-69 12.7.2.1 80-Channel Omni-directional n-degree ROADM Node 12-71 12.7.2.2 80-Channel Colorless n-degree ROADM Node 12-72 12.7.2.3 80-Channel Colorless and Omni-directional n-Degree ROADM Node 12-73 12.7.3 Line Termination Mesh Node Using 40-SMR2-C Cards 12-75 12.7.4 XC Termination Mesh Node 12-77 12.7.5 Mesh Patch Panels and Shelf Layouts 12-78 12.7.6 Using a Mesh Node With Omni-Directional Add/Drop Section 12-81 12.8 DWDM Node Cabling 12-82 12.8.1 OSC Link Termination Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-82 12.8.2 Hub Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-85 12.8.3 Terminal Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87 12.8.4 Line Amplifier Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-87 12.8.5 OSC Regeneration Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-89 12.8.6 Amplified or Passive OADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-91 12.8.7 ROADM Node Fiber-Optic Cabling 12-96 12.9 Automatic Node Setup 12-98 12.9.1 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node With Post-Amplifiers 12-102 12.9.2 ANS Parameters in a Raman Node Without Post-Amplifiers 12-103 12.9.3 Raman Setup and Tuning 12-103 Contents xxiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 12.9.4 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Start Up and Fiber Link Turn Up 12-106 12.10 DWDM Network Functional View 12-108 12.10.1 GMPLS Control Plane 12-108 12.10.1.1 Card Support 12-110 12.10.1.2 Acceptance Thresholds 12-110 12.10.1.3 Validation Modes 12-110 12.10.2 DWDM Network Functional View (NFV) 12-110 12.10.2.1 Graphical View Pane 12-111 12.10.2.2 Overview Pane 12-113 12.10.2.3 Network Data Pane 12-113 12.10.3 DWDM Network Functional View (GMPLS) 12-114 12.10.3.1 GMPLS View Toolbar Options 12-114 12.10.3.2 GMPLS Path Constraints 12-114 12.10.3.3 Source and Destination Port Configuration 12-115 12.10.3.4 Wavelength Rerouting 12-117 12.10.3.5 Fiber Attributes and Alien Wavelength Provisioning 12-118 12.10.4 Related Procedures 12-119 NTP- G231 View Optical Power Values and Alarms Using Network Functional View 12-119 DLP- G529 Export Network Functional View Reports 12-120 NTP- G319 Connect a Passive Module to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 Node 12-122 12.11 Not-DWDM Networks (Enhancements) 12-123 CHAPTER 13 Network Reference 13-1 13.1 Network Applications 13-2 13.2 Network Topologies 13-2 13.2.1 Ring Networks 13-2 13.2.1.1 Hubbed Traffic Topology 13-2 13.2.1.2 Multihubbed Traffic Topology 13-3 13.2.1.3 Any-to-Any Traffic Topology 13-4 13.2.1.4 Meshed Traffic Topology 13-5 13.2.2 Linear Networks 13-6 13.2.3 Mesh Networks 13-7 13.3 Interconnected Rings 13-9 13.3.1 Interconnected Ring Scenarios 13-11 13.3.1.1 Scenario A: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring without Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-11 13.3.1.2 Scenario B: Interconnect Traffic from Tributary Ring to Main Ring with Local Add/Drop in the Tributary Ring 13-13 13.3.1.3 Scenario C: Interconnect Traffic Between Tributary Rings Using the Main Ring 13-14 Contents xxv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 13.4 Spur Configuration 13-16 13.4.1 Spur Configuration Scenarios 13-16 13.4.1.1 Scenario A: Spur Configuration without 15454 Chassis in Remote Terminal T 13-16 13.4.1.2 Scenario B: Spur Configuration with Passive MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-17 13.4.1.3 Scenario C: Spur Configuration with Active MUX and DMX Units in Remote Terminal T 13-18 13.5 Network Topologies for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-18 13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card 13-19 13.7 Optical Performance 13-19 13.8 Automatic Power Control 13-20 13.8.1 APC at the Amplifier Card Level 13-20 13.8.2 APC at the Shelf Controller Layer 13-21 13.8.3 APC in a Raman Node with Post-Amplifiers 13-23 13.8.4 APC in a Raman Node without Post-Amplifiers 13-24 13.8.5 Managing APC 13-24 13.9 Power Side Monitoring 13-26 13.10 Span Loss Verification 13-28 13.10.1 Span Loss Measurements on Raman Links 13-29 13.11 Network Optical Safety 13-30 13.11.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown 13-30 13.11.2 Automatic Power Reduction 13-31 13.11.3 Network Optical Safety on OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-32 13.11.3.1 RAMAN-TX Settings on Raman Pump 13-32 13.11.3.2 COM-TX Safety Setting on EDFA 13-32 13.11.4 Fiber Cut Scenarios 13-33 13.11.4.1 Scenario 1: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST/OPT-BST-E Cards 13-33 13.11.4.2 Scenario 2: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OSC-CSM Cards 13-35 13.11.4.3 Scenario 3: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-BST-L Cards 13-37 13.11.4.4 Scenario 4: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-AMP-17-C (OPT-LINE Mode), 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards 13-38 13.11.4.5 Scenario 5: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using DCN Extension 13-40 13.11.4.6 Scenario 6: Fiber Cut in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-42 13.11.4.7 Scenario 7: Fiber Cut in Optical Line Amplifier Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-44 13.11.4.8 Fiber Cut Recovery in Nodes Using OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 13-49 13.11.5 Network Optical Safety on RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards 13-49 13.12 Network-Level Gain—Tilt Management of Optical Amplifiers 13-50 13.12.1 Gain Tilt Control at the Card Level 13-51 13.12.2 System Level Gain Tilt Control 13-52 Contents xxvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 13.12.2.1 System Gain Tilt Compensation Without ROADM Nodes 13-53 13.12.2.2 System Gain Tilt Compensation With ROADM Nodes 13-54 13.13 Optical Data Rate Derivations 13-55 13.13.1 OC-192/STM-64 Data Rate (9.95328 Gbps) 13-55 13.13.2 10GE Data Rate (10.3125 Gbps) 13-55 13.13.3 10G FC Data Rate (10.51875 Gbps) 13-55 13.13.4 ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Rates 13-56 13.13.4.1 OC-192 Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (10.70923 Gbps) 13-57 13.13.4.2 10GE Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps) 13-57 13.13.4.3 10G FC Packaged Into OTU2 G.709 Frame Data Rate (Nonstandard 11.31764 Gbps) 13-57 13.14 Even Band Management 13-57 13.15 Wavelength Drifted Channel Automatic Shutdown 13-61 CHAPTER 14 Turn Up a Node 14-1 Before You Begin 14-1 NTP- G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files 14-3 NTP- G22 Verify Common Card Installation 14-4 NTP- G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information 14-6 NTP- G144 Provision a Multishelf Node 14-8 NTP- G23 Create Users and Assign Security 14-10 DLP- G54 Create a New User on a Single Node 14-11 DLP- G55 Create a New User on Multiple Nodes 14-12 NTP- G24 Set Up Name, Date, Time, and Contact Information 14-13 NTP- G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds 14-15 NTP- G26 Set Up CTC Network Access 14-16 DLP- G56 Provision IP Settings 14-17 DLP- G439 Provision the Designated SOCKS Servers 14-21 DLP- G57 Set the IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD 14-22 DLP- G264 Enable Node Security Mode 14-24 DLP- G58 Create a Static Route 14-26 DLP- G59 Set Up or Change Open Shortest Path First Protocol 14-27 DLP- G60 Set Up or Change Routing Information Protocol 14-30 NTP- G194 Set Up EMS Secure Access to the ONS 15454 14-31 NTP- G27 Set Up the ONS 15454 for Firewall Access 14-31 NTP- G28 Create FTP Host 14-32 DLP- G61 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 14-33 Contents xxvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G62 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 14-34 NTP- G132 Provision OSI 14-35 DLP- G283 Provision OSI Routing Mode 14-36 DLP- G284 Provision the TARP Operating Parameters 14-37 DLP- G285 Add a Static TID-to-NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache 14-39 DLP- G287 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry 14-40 DLP- G288 Provision OSI Routers 14-41 DLP- G289 Provision Additional Manual Area Addresses 14-42 DLP- G290 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface 14-42 DLP- G291 Create an IP-Over-CLNS Tunnel 14-43 NTP- G29 Set Up SNMP 14-45 NTP- G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File 14-47 DLP- G351 Delete a Card in CTC 14-51 DLP- G353 Preprovision a Slot 14-53 NTP- G320 Configure the Node as a Non-DWDM Network 14-57 DLP- G693 Configure the Amplifier 14-57 DLP- G694 Configure the PSM 14-58 NTP- G328 Add, Modify, or Delete ANS Parameters 14-59 DLP- G541 Add an ANS Parameter 14-60 DLP- G681 Modify an ANS Parameter 14-61 DLP- G542 Delete an ANS Parameter 14-63 NTP- G30 Install the DWDM Cards 14-64 DLP- G348 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Shelf Layout Report 14-67 NTP- G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units 14-68 NTP- G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards 14-69 DLP- G63 Install an SFP or XFP 14-72 DLP- G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot 14-73 DLP- G64 Remove an SFP or XFP 14-74 NTP- G123 Install the Filler Cards 14-75 NTP- G239 Add and Delete Passive Units 14-76 DLP- G543 Add Passive Units Manually 14-76 DLP- G544 Delete a Passive Unit 14-77 NTP- G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs 14-78 DLP- G349 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Internal Connections Report 14-80 NTP- G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes 14-82 DLP- G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-85 Contents xxviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G316 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray 14-89 DLP- G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray 14-90 DLP- G427 Reroute Fiber-Optic Cables in the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-93 DLP- G428 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE Cards in an Expanded ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-95 DLP- G357 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray or 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-97 DLP- G530 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-SMR1-C, 40-SMR2-C, or 80-WXC-C Cards in a ROADM, Terminal, or Hub Node to the 15216-MD-40 or 15216-MD-48 Patch Panel Tray 14-99 NTP- G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes 14-101 DLP- G430 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards in a Mesh Node to the 40-Channel Patch Panel Tray 14-102 DLP- G431 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 40-WXC-C, or 40-SMR2-C Cards in a Mesh Node to a Mesh Patch Panel Tray 14-104 NTP- G191 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on Passthrough ROADM Nodes 14-105 NTP- G141 Install Fiber-Optic Cables for Y-Cable Protection Modules 14-108 DLP- G375 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the FlexLayer Shelf 14-109 DLP- G376 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on the Y-Cable Modules in the Y-Cable Module Tray 14-110 NTP- G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords 14-113 NTP- G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually 14-114 DLP- G354 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Trunk to Trunk (L2) Option 14-115 DLP- G547 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Trunk to OCH-Filter Option 14-116 DLP- G548 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OCH-Filter to OCH-Filter Option 14-118 DLP- G549 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the OTS to OTS Option 14-120 DLP- G531 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually Using the Optical Path Option 14-122 DLP- G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord 14-123 NTP- G209 Create, Edit, and Delete Optical Sides 14-123 DLP- G491 Create an Optical Side 14-124 DLP- G492 Edit an Optical Side 14-125 DLP- G480 Delete an Optical Side 14-125 NTP- G38 Provision OSC Terminations 14-126 NTP- G37 Run Automatic Node Setup 14-127 NTP- G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-129 DLP- G314 Verify OSCM Transmit Power 14-130 NTP- G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode 14-131 NTP- G210 Provision Node for SNMPv3 14-133 NTP- G211 Provision Node to Send SNMPv3 Traps 14-134 Contents xxix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 NTP- G212 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-135 NTP- G213 Automatically Provision a GNE to Manage an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136 NTP- G214 Manually Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE using SNMPv3 14-136 NTP- G215 Automatically Provision a GNE/ENE to Send SNMPv3 Traps from an ENE Using SNMPv3 14-137 DLP- G496 Create an SNMPv3 User 14-138 DLP- G497 Create MIB Views 14-139 DLP- G498 Create Group Access 14-139 DLP- G499 Configure SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-140 DLP- G500 Delete SNMPv3 Trap Destination 14-141 DLP- G501 Create Notification Filters 14-142 DLP- G502 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-142 DLP- G503 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Forwarder Table 14-143 DLP- G504 Manually Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-144 DLP- G505 Automatically Configure the SNMPv3 Proxy Trap Forwarder Table 14-145 CHAPTER 15 Turn Up a Network 15-1 Before You Begin 15-1 NTP- G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up 15-2 NTP- G52 Verify Node-to-Node Connections 15-3 NTP- G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link 15-4 DLP- G468 Configure the Raman Pump Using the Installation Wizard 15-5 DLP- G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation 15-19 DLP- G474 Configure the Raman Pump by Importing the CTP XML File 15-25 DLP- G489 Configure the Raman Pump by Setting the ANS Parameters Manually 15-25 DLP- 490 Restore Raman Link After a Fiber Cut Occurs 15-26 NTP- G53 Set Up Timing 15-27 DLP- G95 Set Up External or Line Timing 15-27 DLP- G96 Set Up Internal Timing 15-30 DLP- G350 Use the Cisco Transport Planner Traffic Matrix Report 15-31 NTP- G54 Provision and Verify a DWDM Network 15-33 NTP- G56 Verify the OSNR 15-37 NTP- G142 Perform a Protection Switch Test 15-38 NTP- G164 Configure Link Management Protocol 15-40 DLP- G372 Enable LMP 15-41 DLP- G373 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Control Channels 15-42 DLP- G374 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP TE Links 15-45 DLP- G378 Create, Edit, and Delete LMP Data Links 15-46 Contents xxx Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 NTP- G233 Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-47 NTP- G234 Automatically Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-48 NTP- G207 Manually Configure Link Management Protocol on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router and the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-49 DLP- G508 Configure the Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Parameters 15-50 DLP- G481 Establish Telnet Session with the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router and Verify Configuration 15-51 DLP- G510 Create a Task Group, User Group, and User Account on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Series Router 15-52 DLP- G482 Configure a Static Route 15-55 DLP- G483 Configure Local and Remote TE Links 15-56 DLP- G484 Enable the LMP Message Exchange 15-58 DLP- G511 Configure the Wavelength on the Cisco CRS-1 or Cisco ASR 9000 Router 15-59 DLP- G494 Configure the RADIUS Server 15-61 DLP- G485 Enable Index Persistency on an SNMP Interface 15-62 DLP- G486 Configure the LMP Router ID 15-63 DLP- G487 Configure the 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or POS Interface 15-64 DLP- G488 Display Summary of Link Management Information 15-65 NTP- G303 Configure Virtual links on the Cisco 7600 and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Node 15-66 DLP- G711 Configure SSH Server on Cisco 7600 Series Nodes 15-67 NTP- G57 Create a Logical Network Map 15-69 NTP- G325 View the Power Levels of Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Nodes 15-69 NTP- G326 Provision SRLG on the Cisco ONS 15454 MSTP Network 15-70 DLP- G540 View SRLG Reports 15-71 CHAPTER 16 Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords 16-1 16.1 Optical Channel Circuits 16-1 16.1.1 OCHNC Circuits 16-2 16.1.2 OCHCC Circuits 16-3 16.1.3 OCH Trail Circuits 16-3 16.1.4 Administrative and Service States 16-5 16.1.5 Creating and Deleting OCHCCs 16-7 16.1.6 OCHCCs and Service and Communications Channels 16-7 16.1.7 Related Procedures 16-7 16.2 Virtual Patchcords 16-7 16.2.1 PPC Provisioning Rules 16-12 16.3 End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-13 Contents xxxi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 16.3.1 End-to-End SVLAN Provisioning Rules 16-14 16.3.2 Before You Begin 16-14 NTP- G151 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Client Connections 16-15 DLP- G104 Assign a Name to a Port 16-16 DLP- G345 Verify OCHCC Client Ports 16-17 DLP- G346 Provision Optical Channel Client Connections 16-17 DLP- G705 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Client Connections 16-24 DLP- G347 Delete Optical Channel Client Connections 16-26 DLP- G424 Edit an OCHCC Circuit Name 16-27 DLP- G394 Change an OCHCC Administrative State 16-28 DLP- G437 Set OCH Circuit Attributes 16-28 DLP- G438 Set OCH Routing Preferences 16-30 DLP- G706 Perform Optical Validation of GMPLS Circuits 16-31 DLP- G707 Upgrade a Non-GMPLS Circuit to a GMPLS Circuit 16-32 NTP- G178 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Trails 16-33 DLP- G395 Create an Optical Channel Trail 16-34 DLP- G708 Create a GMPLS Optical Channel Trail 16-36 DLP- G418 Delete an Optical Channel Trail 16-37 DLP- G425 Edit an OCH Trail Circuit Name 16-38 DLP- G419 Change an OCH Trail Administrative State 16-39 NTP- G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections 16-40 DLP- G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections 16-41 DLP- G709 Provision GMPLS Optical Channel Network Connections 16-43 DLP- G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections 16-44 DLP- G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections 16-46 DLP- G426 Edit an OCHNC Circuit Name 16-47 DLP- G420 Change an OCHNC Administrative State 16-48 DLP- G710 Reroute Wavelength of GMPLS Circuits 16-48 NTP- G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card 16-49 DLP- G463 Create an Automatically Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-50 DLP- G464 Create a Manually Routed STS or VC Circuit 16-53 DLP- G465 Provision Path Protection Selectors 16-56 DLP- G466 Delete an STS or VC Circuit 16-57 DLP- G467 Edit an STS or VC Circuit Name 16-58 NTP- G150 Upgrade Optical Channel Network Connections to Optical Channel Client Connections 16-59 DLP- G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords 16-61 NTP- G183 Diagnose and Fix OCHNC and OCH Trail Circuits 16-63 NTP- G58 Locate and View Optical Channel Circuits 16-65 DLP- G100 Search for Optical Channel Circuits 16-65 Contents xxxii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G101 View Optical Channel Circuit Information 16-66 DLP- G102 Filter the Display of Optical Channel Circuits 16-69 DLP- G103 View Optical Channel Circuits on a Span 16-71 NTP- G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord 16-72 NTP- G181 Manage GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card SVLAN Databases 16-78 DLP- G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database 16-79 DLP- G422 Load or Merge an SVLAN Database 16-80 NTP- G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits 16-81 DLP- G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations 16-81 DLP- G97 Provision a Proxy Tunnel 16-84 DLP- G98 Provision a Firewall Tunnel 16-85 DLP- G108 Change the Service State for a Port 16-85 DLP- G109 Provision Orderwire 16-86 DLP- G110 Create a User Data Channel Circuit 16-88 DLP- G112 Delete Overhead Circuits 16-89 NTP- G62 Create a J0 Section Trace 16-89 NTP- G203 Create End-to-End SVLAN Circuits 16-90 DLP- G472 Edit the End-to-End SVLAN Circuit 16-92 NTP- G229 Provision DCN Extension for a Network Using GCC/DCC 16-93 DLP- G472 Merge two OCHNC DCN Circuits 16-94 NTP- G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit 16-94 NTP- G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit 16-98 NTP- G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes 16-100 DLP- G551 Provision ADM-10G Ethernet Ports 16-101 DLP- G553 Create a Server Trail 16-102 DLP- G554 Repair Server Trails 16-103 DLP- G555 Provision a VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105 DLP- G556 Provision an Open VCAT Circuit Source and Destination 16-105 DLP- G557 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 16-106 CHAPTER 17 Monitor Performance 17-1 CHAPTER 18 Manage the Node 18-1 CHAPTER 19 Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management 19-1 CHAPTER 20 Change DWDM Card Settings 20-1 Before You Begin 20-1 Contents xxxiii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 NTP- G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-2 DLP- G199 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line Settings 20-3 DLP- G200 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM OC-3/STM-1 Line SONET/SDH Thresholds 20-5 DLP- G201 Change Optical Line Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards 20-7 DLP- G202 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM Optical Line Threshold Settings 20-8 DLP- G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-12 NTP- G91 Modify OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-13 DLP- G204 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-14 DLP- G205 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-15 DLP- G206 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-19 DLP- G207 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-PRE and OPT-BST Amplifiers 20-21 DLP- G322 Change the OPT-BST ALS Maintenance Settings 20-25 NTP- G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-27 DLP- G323 Change Optical Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-28 DLP- G324 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-30 DLP- G325 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-34 DLP- G326 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifiers 20-36 DLP- G538 Change Optical Raman Line Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-41 DLP- G539 Change Optical Raman Line Threshold Settings for OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Amplifiers 20-42 DLP- G327 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings of OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 20-44 NTP- G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-47 DLP- G514 Change the PSM Card Mode 20-47 DLP- G476 Change Optical Line Settings for the PSM Card 20-48 DLP- G477 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for the PSM Card 20-49 DLP- G478 Change the PSM ALS Maintenance Settings 20-52 NTP- G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds 20-54 DLP- G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-55 Contents xxxiv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-57 DLP- G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-59 DLP- G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards 20-62 NTP- G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-65 DLP- G212 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-66 DLP- G213 Change the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Channel Thresholds 20-69 DLP- G214 Change 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Parameters 20-73 DLP- G215 Change the 32WSS, 32-WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Line Thresholds 20-74 NTP- G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-76 DLP- G545 Modify the Chromatic Dispersion Value for the TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 20-77 DLP- G528 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for TDC-CC or TDC-FC Card 20-78 NTP- G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-79 DLP- G603 Change the 80-WXC-C Card Mode 20-80 DLP- G406 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-81 DLP- G407 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-84 DLP- G408 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Parameters 20-87 DLP- G409 Change the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Optical Line Thresholds 20-89 DLP- G413 Change 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Card WXC Line Parameters 20-91 DLP- G429 Multiplex a Single Wavelength on 40-WXC-C Card 20-93 NTP- G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-94 DLP- G532 Change Optical Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-95 DLP- G533 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-97 DLP- G534 Change Optical Amplifier Line Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-101 DLP- G535 Change Optical Amplifier Threshold Settings for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Cards 20-103 DLP- G536 Change 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Optical Channel Parameters 20-108 DLP- G537 Change the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Optical Channel Thresholds 20-110 NTP- G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds 20-114 DLP- G342 Change MMU Optical Line Parameters 20-114 DLP- G343 Change the MMU Optical Line Thresholds 20-116 NTP- G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings 20-117 DLP- G245 Change External Alarms Using the AIC-I Card 20-118 DLP- G246 Change External Controls Using the AIC-I Card 20-119 Contents xxxv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G247 Change AIC-I Card Orderwire Settings 20-119 NTP- G102 Change Card Service State 20-120 NTP- G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121 DLP- G609 Modify Optical Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards 20-121 DLP- G610 Modify Line Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE cards 20-123 CHAPTER 21 Perform Node Acceptance Tests 21-1 Before You Begin 21-1 NTP- G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test 21-3 DLP- G79 Verify the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L Amplifier Laser and Power 21-5 DLP- G80 Verify the OPT-PRE Amplifier Laser and Power 21-6 DLP- G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power 21-7 DLP- G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power 21-7 NTP- G168 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-8 NTP- G42 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-10 DLP- G270 Verify the 32DMX or 40-DMX-C Power 21-14 NTP- G167 Perform the Terminal Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-15 NTP- G153 Perform the Terminal Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-20 DLP- G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing 21-24 DLP- G359 Verify the OPT-BST-L or OPT-AMP-L (OPT-Line Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25 DLP- G360 Verify the OPT-AMP-L (OPT-PRE Mode) Amplifier Laser and Power 21-25 DLP- G361 Verify the 32DMX-L Power 21-26 NTP- G43 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS and 32DMX Cards Acceptance Test 21-27 DLP- G310 Verify ROADM Node C-Band Pass-Through Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-29 DLP- G311 Verify the Side A or Side B ROADM C-Band Add/Drop Channels with 32WSS and 40-WSS-C Cards 21-34 NTP- G154 Perform the ROADM Node with 32WSS-L and 32DMX-L Cards Acceptance Test 21-39 DLP- G362 Verify ROADM Node L-Band Pass-Through Channels 21-44 DLP- G363 Verify the Side B ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-52 DLP- G364 Verify the Side A ROADM L-Band Add/Drop Channels 21-57 NTP- G180 Perform the ROADM Node with 40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-62 NTP- G276 Perform the 80-Channel n-degree ROADM Node Acceptance Tests 21-67 NTP- G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test 21-71 NTP- G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test 21-74 NTP- G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-78 NTP- G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-82 Contents xxxvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 NTP- G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-86 NTP- G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test 21-90 NTP- G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards 21-94 DLP- G85 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-96 DLP- G87 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97 DLP- G88 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Express Power 21-97 DLP- G271 Verify the AD-xC-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98 DLP- G272 Verify the AD-xB-xx.x Output Common Power 21-98 DLP- G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections 21-99 DLP- G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-100 DLP- G90 Verify an AD-xB-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power 21-101 DLP- G91 Verify an AD-xC-xx.x Pass-Through Connection 21-102 DLP- G84 Verify the OSC-CSM Incoming Power 21-103 DLP- G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards 21-104 NTP- G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-106 DLP- G86 Verify Express Channel Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-108 DLP- G83 Verify the OSC-CSM Power on OADM Nodes 21-109 DLP- G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-110 NTP- G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards 21-112 NTP- G186 Perform the Four-Degree and Eight-Degree Mesh Patch Panel Acceptance Test 21-114 DLP- G432 Set the Transponder Wavelength 21-124 DLP- G433 Record Transponder Optical Power 21-125 NTP- G187 Perform the Multiring Site Acceptance Test 21-126 DLP- 434 Record the OPT-AMP-17-C Power Value 21-131 DLP- 435 Set the 40-WXC-C OCHNC Parameters 21-132 DLP- 436 Record the 40-WXC-C Power Value 21-133 NTP- G188 Perform the Native Mesh Node Acceptance Test 21-134 NTP- G189 Perform the Node Upgrade Acceptance Test 21-139 NTP- G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-147 NTP- G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test 21-151 CHAPTER 22 Management Network Connectivity 22-1 22.1 IP Networking Overview 22-2 22.2 IP Addressing Scenarios 22-2 Contents xxxvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 22.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 22-3 22.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to a Router 22-3 22.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway 22-4 22.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer 22-7 22.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs 22-8 22.2.6 Scenario 6: Using OSPF 22-10 22.2.7 Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 Proxy Server 22-12 22.2.8 Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet 22-17 22.2.9 Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 22-19 22.2.9.1 Secure Mode Behavior 22-19 22.2.9.2 Secure Node Locked and Unlocked Behavior 22-22 22.3 DCN Case Studies 22-23 22.3.1 SOCKS Proxy Settings 22-23 22.3.2 OSPF 22-23 22.3.3 Management of Non-LAN Connected Multishelf Node 22-24 22.3.4 DCN Case Study 1: Ring Topology with Two Subnets and Two DCN Connections 22-24 22.3.4.1 DCN Case Study 1 IP Configuration 22-25 22.3.4.2 DCN Case Study 1 Limitations 22-27 22.3.5 DCN Case Study 2: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends 22-28 22.3.5.1 DCN Case Study 2 IP Configurations 22-28 22.3.5.2 DCN Case Study 2 Limitations 22-30 22.3.6 DCN Case Study 3: Linear Topology with DCN Connections on Both Ends Using OSPF Routing 22-30 22.3.6.1 DCN Case Study 3 IP Configurations 22-31 22.3.6.2 DCN Case Study 3 Limitations 22-34 22.3.7 DCN Case Study 4: Two Linear Cascaded Topologies With Two DCN Connections 22-34 22.3.7.1 DCN Case Study 4 IP Configurations 22-35 22.3.7.2 DCN Case Study 4 Limitations 22-37 22.4 DCN Extension 22-37 22.4.1 Network Using OSC 22-38 22.4.2 Network Using External DCN 22-38 22.4.3 Network Using GCC/DCC 22-39 22.5 Routing Table 22-39 22.6 External Firewalls 22-41 22.7 Open GNE 22-42 22.8 TCP/IP and OSI Networking 22-45 22.9 Link Management Protocol 22-49 22.9.1 Overview 22-49 22.9.1.1 MPLS 22-50 Contents xxxviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 22.9.1.2 GMPLS 22-50 22.9.2 Configuring LMP 22-51 22.9.2.1 Control Channel Management 22-51 22.9.2.2 TE Link Management 22-52 22.9.2.3 Link Connectivity Verification 22-52 22.9.2.4 Fault Management 22-52 22.9.3 LMP WDM 22-53 22.9.4 LMP Network Implementation 22-53 22.10 IPv6 Network Compatibility 22-54 22.11 IPv6 Native Support 22-54 22.11.1 IPv6 Enabled Mode 22-56 22.11.2 IPv6 Disabled Mode 22-56 22.11.3 IPv6 in Non-secure Mode 22-56 22.11.4 IPv6 in Secure Mode 22-56 22.11.5 IPv6 Limitations 22-56 22.12 Integration with Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Routers 22-57 22.12.1 Card Compatibility 22-58 22.12.2 Node Management 22-59 22.12.2.1 Physical Connections 22-60 22.12.2.2 CTC Display 22-60 22.12.3 Circuit Management 22-61 22.12.3.1 LMP Provisioning 22-61 22.12.3.2 Virtual Link Provisioning 22-62 22.12.3.3 OCH Trail Circuit Provisioning 22-62 22.12.4 Cisco CRS-1, Cisco ASR 9000 Series, or Cisco 7600 Series Router Management from CTC 22-63 22.13 Photonic Path Trace 22-64 22.14 Shared Risk Link Group 22-65 22.15 Proactive Protection Regen 22-65 CHAPTER 23 Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes 23-1 CHAPTER 24 Maintain the Node 24-1 Before You Begin 24-1 NTP- G103 Back Up the Database 24-2 NTP- G104 Restore the Database 24-3 NTP- G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 24-4 DLP- G248 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (Windows) 24-6 Contents xxxix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 DLP- G249 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software (UNIX) 24-8 NTP- G133 View and Manage OSI Information 24-10 DLP- G298 View IS-IS Routing Information Base 24-10 DLP- G299 View ES-IS Routing Information Base 24-11 DLP- G300 Manage the TARP Data Cache 24-12 NTP- G106 Reset Cards Using CTC 24-13 DLP- G250 Reset the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE Card 24-13 DLP- G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC 24-14 NTP- G108 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 24-15 NTP- G109 Off-Load the Audit Trail Record 24-16 NTP- G110 Off-Load the Diagnostics File 24-17 NTP- G112 Change the Node Timing Reference 24-18 DLP- G259 Manual or Force Switch the Node Timing Reference 24-18 DLP- G260 Clear a Manual or Force Switch on a Node Timing Reference 24-19 NTP- G113 View the ONS 15454 Timing Report 24-20 NTP- G135 Edit Network Element Defaults 24-23 NTP- G136 Import Network Element Defaults 24-24 NTP- G137 Export Network Element Defaults 24-25 NTP- G166 View the Facilities 24-26 NTP- G119 Power Down the Node 24-27 Contents xl Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 CHAPTER 25 Security Reference 25-1 CHAPTER 26 Timing Reference 26-1 CHAPTER 27 SNMP 27-1 APPENDIX A CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts A-1 APPENDIX B Hardware Specifications B-1 APPENDIX C Administrative and Service States C-1 APPENDIX D Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI D-1 APPENDIX E Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference E-1 APPENDIX F Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration F-1 APPENDIX G Card Features G-1 G.1 Safety Labels G-1 G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards G-1 G.1.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Label G-2 G.1.1.2 Hazard Level 1 Label G-2 G.1.1.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-2 G.1.1.4 FDA Statement Labels G-3 G.1.1.5 Shock Hazard Label G-3 G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards G-4 G.1.2.1 Class 1M Laser Product Statement G-4 G.1.2.2 Hazard Level 1M Label G-4 G.1.2.3 Laser Source Connector Label G-5 G.1.2.4 FDA Statement Labels G-5 G.1.2.5 Shock Hazard Label G-5 G.1.2.6 Burn Hazard Label G-6 G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown G-6 G.3 Card-Level Indicators G-7 G.4 Port-Level Indicators G-9 G.5 Client Interface G-14 G.6 DWDM Interface G-15 Contents xli Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface G-15 G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature G-16 G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes G-16 G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping G-17 G.11 Timing Synchronization G-17 G.12 Multiplexing Function G-18 G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing G-19 G.14 Client Interface Monitoring G-19 G.15 Jitter G-19 G.16 Lamp Test G-19 G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation G-19 G.18 Performance Monitoring G-20 G.19 Distance Extension G-20 G.20 Slot Compatibility G-20 G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches G-20 G.22 Client and Trunk Ports G-20 G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards G-20 G.23.1 TCC2 Card G-21 G.23.2 TCC2P/TCC3 Card G-21 G.23.3 TNC and TNCE Cards G-21 G.23.4 TSC and TSCE Cards G-22 G.24 Interface Ports G-22 G.25 External Alarms and Controls G-23 G.26 Digital Image Signing (DIS) G-24 G.27 Database Storage G-24 G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation G-24 G.29 Optical Service Channel G-25 G.30 MultiShelf Management G-25 G.31 Protection Schemes G-25 G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE G-26 G.33 Automatic Power Control G-26 G.34 Alarms and Thresholds G-26 G.35 Card Protection G-27 G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection G-27 G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection G-27 G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection G-30 Contents xlii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 G.35.2 1+1 Protection G-30 G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection G-31 G.36 Far-End Laser Control G-32 G.37 Jitter Considerations G-32 G.38 Termination Modes G-33 APPENDIX H Network Element Defaults H-1 INDEX xliii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information. This section provides the following information: • Revision History • Document Objectives • Audience • Document Organization • Related Documentation • Document Conventions • Obtaining Optical Networking Information • Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines xliv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Revision History Date Notes December 2011 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations” in the chapter “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”. • Updated the section “Termination Modes” in the chapter “Card Features”. • Added a caution to the section, “Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”. January 2012 • Added a note to step 3 in NTP-G144 in the chapter, “Turn Up a Node”. • Updated the card description for the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards in the chapter, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”. • Updated the section “GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” with pluggable limitations in the chapter Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the section “Create a Segment Using CTC” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. February 2012 • Updated the procedure “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Removed the autonegotiation support statement for ADM-10G card from the “Key Features” section and updated the Mode parameter in the table “ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the procedure “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. March 2012 • Updated the bandwidth parameter in the procedure, “DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings”. • Updated the section, “Multishelf Node” in the chapter, “ Node Reference”. • Added a note in the procedure “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”. April 2012 • Updated the table “DWDM NFV Toolbar Options” in the chapter, “Node Reference”. • Updated the "Faceplate and Block Diagram" section of "GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards" in the chapter,“Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Added a new procedure "DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC" and updated "DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings" in the chapter, "Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards". xlv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Document Objectives The Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide includes content previously found in two separate guides—Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual and Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide. The new Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.3 and later releases will now include background and reference material, installation, turn up, provisioning, and maintenance procedures for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS M2, and Cisco ONS M6 dense wavelength division (DWDM) systems. Use this document in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in the Related Documentation section. Audience To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent optical transmission hardware and cabling, telecommunications hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and preferably have experience as a telecommunications technician Document Organization May 2012 • Updated the section “RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” in the chapter “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards”. • Added a note in the procedure “DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. • Updated the section “Optical Channel Circuits” in the chapter “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords”. • Updated the “Set Up SNMP” procedure in the chapter “Turn Up a Node”. June 2012 Updated the section “OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. July 2012 • Document Part Number revisioned to 78-19694-02 and a full length book-PDF was generated. • Updated the table “Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables” in the chapter “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards”. August 2012 Updated the table “Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards” in the chapter “Install the Control Cards”. Date Notes Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters Title Summary "Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4" Provides a link to quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4. Chapter 1, “Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf” Explains how to install the Cisco ONS 15454 ETSI, Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. xlvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Chapter 2, “Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI” Explains how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software. Chapter 3, “Install the Control Cards” Explains how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. Chapter 4, “Setup Optical Service Channel Cards” Includes descriptions of OSCM and OSC-CSM cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 5, “Provision Optical Amplifier Cards” Includes descriptions of the optical amplifier cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 6, “Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards” Includes descriptions of the 32-MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 7, “Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units” Explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 8, “Provision Protection Switching Module” Includes descriptions of the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM networks. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 9, “Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards” Includes descriptions of the AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards” Includes descriptions of the ROADM cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 11, “Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards” Includes descriptions of transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. Also provides references to related procedures. Chapter 12, “Node Reference” Explains the DWDM node types available for the ONS 15454. The DWDM node type is determined by the type of amplifier and filter cards that are installed in an ONS 15454. Also explains the DWDM automatic power control (APC), reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM) power equalization, span loss verification, and automatic node setup (ANS) functions. Chapter 13, “Network Reference” Explains the DWDM network applications and topologies. Also provides network-level optical performance references. Chapter 14, “Turn Up a Node” Explains how to provision a single Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node and turn it up for service. Chapter 21, “Perform Node Acceptance Tests” Provides test procedures to verify that installed cards are operating correctly in a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM node. Chapter 15, “Turn Up a Network” Explains how to turn up and test a Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM network. Chapter 16, “Create Optical Channel Circuits and Provisionable Patchcords” Explains how to create Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM optical channel client connections (OCHCCs), optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and optical trail circuits. Chapter 17, “Monitor Performance” Explains how to enable and view performance monitoring (PM) statistics for the Cisco ONS 15454. Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued) Title Summary xlvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Chapter 18, “Manage the Node” Explains how to modify node provisioning for the Cisco ONS 15454 and perform common management tasks such as monitoring the DWDM automatic power control (APC) and span loss values. Chapter 19, “Alarm and TCA Monitoring and Management” Contains the procedures for viewing and managing the alarms and conditions on a Cisco ONS 15454. Chapter 20, “Change DWDM Card Settings” Explains how to change line, performance monitoring (PM), and threshold settings on Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards. Chapter 22, “Management Network Connectivity” Provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN) connectivity. Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes. The chapter shows common Cisco ONS 15454 IP network configurations and includes detailed data communications network (DCN) case studies. Chapter 23, “Upgrade, Add, and Remove Cards and Nodes” Provides procedures for adding and removing DWDM cards and nodes Chapter 24, “Maintain the Node” Provides procedures for maintaining the Cisco ONS 15454, including database backup and restoration, removing and replacing cards, viewing the ONS 15454 audit trail, and hardware maintenance procedures. Chapter 25, “Security Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security. Chapter 26, “Timing Reference” Provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and node timing. Chapter 27, “SNMP” Explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by the Cisco ONS 15454. Appendix A, “CTC Operation, Information, and Shortcuts” Describes the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) views, menus options, tool options, shortcuts, and table display options. Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications” Contains hardware specifications for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies and cards. Appendix C, “Administrative and Service States” Describes the administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM cards, optical payload ports, out-of-band optical service channel (OSC) ports, optical channel network connections (OCHNCs), and transponder/muxponder cards and ports. Appendix D, “Configuring GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI” Describes how to provision GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards using Pseudo Command Line Interface (PCLI). Appendix E, “Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference” Describes Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. Appendix F, “Fiber and Connector Losses in Raman Link Configuration” Describes guidelines to be followed when configuring a Raman link. Appendix G, “Card Features” Describes the card features. Appendix H, “Network Element Defaults” Describes the defaults for the network element settings for Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Configuration Guide Chapters (continued) Title Summary xlviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Related Documentation Use the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide in conjunction with the following referenced Release 9.4 publications: • Release Notes for Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 DWDM, Release 9.4 • Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide • Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Quick Reference Guide • Cisco ONS SONET TL1 for Beginners • Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Command Guide • Cisco ONS SDH TL1 Reference Guide • Cisco ONS SDH TL1Command Quick Reference Guide • Cisco ONS SDH TL1 for Beginners • Cisco Transport Planner – DWDM Operations Guide • Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms • Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms For an update on End-of-Life and End-of-Sale notices, refer to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.html. Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions: Convention Application boldface Commands and keywords in body text. italic Command input that is supplied by the user. [ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional. { x | x | x } A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. The user must select one. Ctrl The control key. For example, where Ctrl + D is written, hold down the Control key while pressing the D key. screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen. xlix Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document. Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, the user might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. boldface screen font Examples of information that the user must enter. < > Command parameters that must be replaced by module-specific codes. Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device. Statement 1071 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt raadplegen. BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla. SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET Convention Application l Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil, référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement. CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden. BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF. Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento. CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne enheten. TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você está em uma situação que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes. Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES li Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface ¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Al final de cada advertencia encontrará el número que le ayudará a encontrar el texto traducido en el apartado de traducciones que acompaña a este dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna anordning. SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR lii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo. GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed. GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER liii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface liv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Obtaining Optical Networking Information This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines section. Where to Find Safety and Warning Information For safety and warning information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document that accompanied the product. This publication describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Cisco ONS 15454 system. It also includes translations of the safety warnings that appear in the ONS 15454 system documentation. Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM Optical networking-related documentation, including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation, is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation. lv Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation. Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0. lvi Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Preface lvii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 To quickly access publications of Cisco ONS Release 9.4, see the Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 lviii Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-18908-01 Cisco ONS Documentation Roadmap for Release 9.4 CH A P T E R 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf For information on installing the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 shelf, refer: Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 1-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 1 Install the Cisco ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 Shelf CH A P T E R 2-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 2 Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI The information in this chapter is in a new location. See Connect the PC and Log into the GUI document for information on how to connect Windows PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454 and how to log into Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software, the ONS 15454 Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) user interface. 2-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 2 Connecting the PC and Logging into the GUI CH A P T E R 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 3 Install the Control Cards Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN”, refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This chapter describes the common-control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms and provides installation and card turn up procedures. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Chapter topics include: • 3.1 Card Overview, page 3-2 • 3.3 TCC2 Card, page 3-3 • “3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card” section on page 3-6 • 3.4 TCC2P Card, page 3-6 • “3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card” section on page 3-9 • 3.5 TCC3 Card, page 3-9 • 3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card, page 3-12 • 3.6 TNC and TNCE Card, page 3-12 • 3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards, page 3-16 • 3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-16 • 3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards, page 3-19 3-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Card Overview • 3.8 Digital Image Signing, page 3-20 • 3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS, page 3-20 • 3.9 AIC-I Card, page 3-20 • 3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card, page 3-26 • 3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-26 • 3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card, page 3-28 • 3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections, page 3-29 • 3.12 Procedures for Control Cards, page 3-33 3.1 Card Overview The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter. Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 3.1.1 Common Control Cards The following common control cards are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards on ONS 15454 shelf: • TCC2 or TCC2P or TCC3 • AIC-I (optional) • MS-ISC-100T (multishelf configurations only) The TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are used to support the functions of DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelves. 3.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 3-1 lists the platform and software release compatibility for the control cards. Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE R4.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R4.6 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R4.7 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R5.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R6.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R7.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R7.2 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R8.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No 3-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Safety Labels 3.1.3 Front Mount Electrical Connections (ETSI only) The following Front Mount Electrical Connections (FMECs) are needed to support the functions of the DWDM, transponder, and muxponder cards: • MIC-A/P • MIC-C/T/P 3.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1. 3.3 TCC2 Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For TCC2 card specifications, see the “TCC2 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. R8.5 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R9.0 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R9.1 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM No No No No No R9.2 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 No No R9.2.1 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 No No R9.3 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454 -M2 and 15454 -M6 R9.4 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454- M2 and 15454- M6 15454 -M2 and 15454 -M6 1. The TCC3 card is backward compatible with software Release 9.1 and earlier releases. In the Release 9.1 and earlier releases, the TCC3 card boots up as the TCC2P card in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM systems. Table 3-1 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Control Cards (continued) TCC2 TCC2P AIC-I MS-ISC-100T TCC31 TNC TSC TNCE TSCE 3-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC2 Card The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control (TCC2) card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET section overhead (SOH) data communications channel/generic communications channel (DCC/GCC) termination, optical service channel (OSC) DWDM data communications network (DCN) termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. Note The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). Install TCC2 cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2 fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2. 3.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-1 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2 card. 3-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC2 Card Figure 3-1 TCC2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3.3.2 TCC2 Card Functions The functions of the TCC2 card are: • G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC2 LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Repeater Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface RS-232 Craft Interface Backplane RS-232 Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) Faceplate RS-232 Port Note: Only 1 RS-232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC2 HDLC Link Modem Interface 400MHz (Not Used) Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SCC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks -48V PWR (all I/O Slots) Monitors Real Time Clock 137639 3-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC2P Card • G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22 • G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13 3.3.3 Related Procedures for TCC2 Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2 card: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34 • NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15 • NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16 • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4 3.4 TCC2P Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For TCC2P card specifications, see the”TCC2P Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control Plus (TCC2P) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2 card. The primary enhancements are Ethernet security features and 64K composite clock BITS timing. The TCC2P card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. 3-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC2P Card The TCC2P card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC2P card acts as a shelf controller and node controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC2P card supports up to 12 subtended shelves through the MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC2P card allows the ONS 15454 node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. The TCC2P card is compliant to the following standards: • The LAN interface of the TCC2P card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft. (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft. (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius). • The TCC2P card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) complaint. The RoHS regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants in a new electronic and electric equipment. Install TCC2P cards in Slots 7 and 11 for redundancy. If the active TCC2P card fails, traffic switches to the protect TCC2P card. All TCC2P card protection switches conform to protection switching standards when the bit error rate (BER) counts are not in excess of 1 * 10 exp – 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms. 3.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card. 3-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC2P Card Figure 3-2 TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram 3.4.2 TCC2P Card Functions The functions of the TCC2P card are: • G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20 FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC2P LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Switch Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC2) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface EIA/TIA 232 Craft Interface Backplane EIA/TIA 232 Por (Shared with Mate TCC2) Faceplate EIA/TIA 232 Port Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC2 HDLC Link Modem Interface 400MHz (Not Used) Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SMC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks -48V PWR (all I/O Slots) Monitors Real Time Clock Ethernet Phy SCC1 3-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC3 Card • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22 • G.27 Database Storage, page G-24 • G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 l • Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13 • Power level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12 3.4.3 Related Procedures for TCC2P Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC2P card: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34 • NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC • DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) • DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) • DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups • DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15 • NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16 • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4 3.5 TCC3 Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) 3-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC3 Card Note For TCC3 card specifications, see the “TCC3 Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The Timing Communications Control Three (TCC3) card is an enhanced version of the TCC2P card. The primary enhancements include the increase in memory size and compact flash space. The TCC3 card boots up as TCC2P card in older releases and as TCC3 card from Release 9.2 onwards. The TCC3 card performs system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, diagnostics, IP address detection/resolution, SONET SOH DCC/GCC termination, and system fault detection for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 also ensures that the system maintains Stratum 3 (Telcordia GR-253-CORE) timing requirements. It monitors the supply voltage of the system. The TCC3 card supports multi-shelf management. The TCC3 card acts as a shelf controller and node controller for the ONS 15454. The TCC3 card supports up to 30 subtended shelves through the MSM-ISC card or external switch. In a multi-shelf configuration, the TCC3 card allows the ONS 15454 node to be a node controller if an M6 shelf is subtended to it. We recommend the use of TCC3 card as a node controller when the number of subtended shelves exceeds four. The TCC3 card is compliant with the following standards: • The LAN interface of the TCC3 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures ranging from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from –40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to 0 degrees Celsius). • The TCC3 card is Restriction of Use of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant. The RoHS regulations limit or ban the specific substances such as lead, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), mercury, hexavalent chromium, and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants in a new electronic and electric equipment. 3.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-3 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC3 card. 3-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TCC3 Card Figure 3-3 TCC3 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3.5.2 TCC3 Card Functions The functions of the TCC3 card are: • G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22 • G.27 Database Storage, page G-24 • G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 FAIL A PWR B ACT/STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS-232 TCP/IP MAJ ACO TCC3 LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Switch Mate TCC Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port (Shared with Mate TCC) SDRAM Memory & Compact Flash FPGA TCCA FPGA SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface EIA/TIA 232 Craft Interface Backplane EIA/TIA 232 Port (Shared with Mate TCC) Faceplate EIA/TIA 232 Port Note: Only 1 EIA/TIA 232 Port Can Be Active - Backplane Port Will Supercede Faceplate Port Faceplate Ethernet Port SCL Links to All Cards HDLC Message Bus Mate TCC HDLC Link Modem Interface (Not Used) 400MHz Processor Communications Processor SCC3 MCC1 FCC1 MCC2 SCC4 FCC2 SMC1 SCC2 DCC Processor System Timing BITS Input/ Output Ref Clocks -48V PWR (all I/O Slots) Monitors Real Time Clock Ethernet Phy SCC1 248663 3-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TNC and TNCE Card • Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13 • Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13 3.5.3 Related Procedures for TCC3 Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TCC3 card: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34 • NTP-G18 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC • DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) • DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) • DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups • DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15 • NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16 • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4 3.6 TNC and TNCE Card (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The TNC and TNCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, OSCM, ISC, and AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. Note For TNC and TNCE card specifications, see the “TNC and TNCE Card Specifications (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document. 3-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TNC and TNCE Card The TNC and TNCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the 15454-M6 shelf, and as a stand-alone card in the 15454-M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards serve as the processor card for the node. On the 15454-M6 shelf, install redundant TNC and TNCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TNC or TNCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TNC or TNCE card. The card supports line cards from slots 2 to 7. On the 15454-M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC and TNCE cards in slot 1. The TNC and TNCE cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3. The TNC and TNCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply. You can insert and remove the TNC and TNCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting the system traffic. You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you can still provision the SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC/TNCE and TSC/TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm. Note The LAN interface of the TNC and TNCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from -40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius). 3.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The faceplate design of the TNC and TNCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while accessing the Ethernet and SFP ports. The TNC and TNCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the shelf. The TNC and TNCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface. The TNC cards have two FPGA: TCCA, SYNTIDE and FRAMPOS The TNCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA and FRAMPOS Figure 3-4 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNC card. 3-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TNC and TNCE Card Figure 3-4 TNC Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-5 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TNCE card. HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 TNC FAIL ACT/STBY ACO SFP2 PWR A B LAMP TEST SFP1 LINK EIA/TIA-232 ACT LINK TCP/IP ACT LINK ACT TX RX TX RX CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO 1GB DDR2 Mini-DIMM CPU MPC8568E GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy SFP1 SFP2 BusMux CPLD Ethernet Switch Local Ethernet Switch External Glue Logic CPLD SYNTIDE FPGA Boot Flash USB Controller FRAMPOS FPGA TCCA FPGA T1/E1 Framers LOG NVRAM FE Phy 4GB Compact Flash 277855 3-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TNC and TNCE Card Figure 3-5 TNCE Faceplate and Block Diagram 3.6.2 TNC and TNCE Card Functions The functions of the TNC and TNCE cards are: • G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20 • G.29 Optical Service Channel, page G-25 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25 • G.27 Database Storage, page G-24 • G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22 • G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13 • Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13 • Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14 • TNC and TNCE SFP indicators—Table G-15 on page G-14 HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 TNCE FAIL ACT/STBY ACO SFP2 PWR A B LAMP TEST SFP1 LINK EIA/TIA-232 ACT LINK TCP/IP ACT LINK ACT TX RX TX RX CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO 1GB DDR2 Mini-DIMM CPU MPC8568E GE Phy GE Phy GE Phy SFP1 SFP2 BusMux CPLD Ethernet Switch Local Ethernet Switch External Glue Logic CPLD Boot Flash USB Controller FRAMPOS FPGA FPGA FPGA T1/E1 Framers LOG NVRAM FE Phy CPU 8378 1588 FE PHY 4GB Compact Flash 236696 3-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TSC and TSCE Cards • G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25 • G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26 3.6.3 Related Procedures for TNC and TNCE Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TNC and TNCE cards: • NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41 • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC • DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) • DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) • DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups • DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group • DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host Detection • NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6 • NTP-G279 Monitor TNC and TNCE Card Performance • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15 • NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16 • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card • NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4 3.7 TSC and TSCE Cards (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The TSC and TSCE cards combine the functions of multiple cards such as TCC2P, ISC, and AIC-I cards. The card has a similar look and feel to TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. 3-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TSC and TSCE Cards Note For TSC and TSCE cards specification, see the “TSC and TSCE Card Specifications (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6)” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The TSC and TSCE cards are provisioned as master and slave in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, and as a stand-alone card in the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards serve as the processor card for the node. On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install redundant TSC and TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8. If the active TSC or TSCE card fails, system traffic switches to the redundant TSC or TSCE card. The TSC and TSCE cards support line cards from slots 2 to 7. On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TSC and TSCE cards in slot 1. The TSC and TSCE cards support line cards in slots 2 and 3. The TSC and TSCE cards monitor both the supply voltage inputs on the 15454-M6 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards raise an alarm if one of the supply voltage inputs has a voltage out of the specified range. The 15454-M2 shelf has dual power supply. You can insert and remove the TSC and TSCE cards even when the system is online, without impacting the system traffic. The TSC and TSCE cards do not support optical service channel (OSC) and SFP ports. You can upgrade the TSC or TSCE card to a TNC or TNCE card. During the upgrade, the TNC and TNCE cards do not support OSC functions such as UDC, VoIP, DCC, and timing function. However, you can still provision SFP ports on the TNC and TNCE cards during the upgrade. The TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards cannot be inserted in the same shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards support all the alarms supported by the TCC2P and AIC-I cards. The card adjusts the fan speed according to the temperature and reports a fan failure alarm. Note The LAN interface of the TSC and TSCE cards meet the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft (100 m) at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (0 to 65 degrees Celsius). The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32.8 ft (10 m) maximum at temperatures from -40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 0 degrees Celsius). 3.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The faceplate design of the TSC and TSCE cards allow sufficient space to insert or remove cables while accessing the Ethernet ports. The TSC and TSCE cards can be installed only in slots 1 or 8 of the 15454-M6 shelf and in slot 1 of the 15454-M2 shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards have an identifier on the faceplate that matches with an identifier in the shelf. A key is also provided on the backplane interface connectors as identifier in the shelf. The TSC and TSCE cards support field-programmable gate array (FPGA) for the backplane interface. The TSC cards have two FPGA: TCCA and SYNTIDE The TSCE cards have one FPGA: VEGA Figure 3-6 illustrates the faceplate and block diagram for the TSC card. 3-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TSC and TSCE Cards Figure 3-6 TSC Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-7 illustrates the faceplate for the TSCE card. Figure 3-7 TSCE Faceplate 3.7.2 TSC and TSCE Card Functions The functions of the TSC and TSCE cards are: • G.23 Communication and Control for Controller Cards, page G-20 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.30 MultiShelf Management, page G-25 • G.27 Database Storage, page G-24 • G.24 Interface Ports, page G-22 • G.25 External Alarms and Controls, page G-23 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • G.28 Redundant Controller Card Installation, page G-24 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 TSC FAIL ACT/STBY CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO ACO PWR A B LAMP TEST EIA/TIA-232 TCP/IP ACT LINK 256MB DDR2 Mini-DIMM CPU MPC8568E GE Phy GE Phy BusMux CPLD Ethernet Switch Local Ethernet Switch External Glue Logic CPLD SYNTIDE FPGA Boot Flash USB Controller TCCA FPGA T1/E1 Framers LOG NVRAM 256MB Compact Flash 277856 TSCE FAIL ACT/STBY CRIT REM MAJ SYNC MIN ACO ACO PWR A B LAMP TEST EIA/TIA-232 TCP/IP ACT LINK 246795 3-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards TSC and TSCE Cards • Network level indicators—Table G-13 on page G-13 • Power level indicators—Table G-12 on page G-13 • Port level indicators—Table G-14 on page G-14 • G.31 Protection Schemes, page G-25 • G.32 Cards Supported by TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, page G-26 3.7.3 Related Procedures for TSC and TSCE Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TSC and TSCE cards: • NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41 • NTP-G17 Set Up Computer for CTC • DLP-G43 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows) • DLP-G44 Disable or Bypass Proxy Service Using Mozilla (Solaris) • DLP-G48 Create Login Node Groups • DLP-G49 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group • DLP-G41 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 Using Automatic Host Detection • NTP-G19 Set Up a CTC Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6 • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G25 Set Battery Power Monitor Thresholds, page 14-15 • NTP-G26 Set Up CTC Network Access, page 14-16 • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G81 Change CTC Network Access • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G103 Back Up the Database, page 24-2 • NTP-G104 Restore the Database, page 24-3 • NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC, page 24-13 • NTP-G277 Provision Alarms and Controls on the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card • NTP-G280 Modify Threshold Settings for the TNC and TNCE Cards, page 20-121 • NTP-G278 Upgrade the TSC or TSCE Card to the TNC or TNCE Card 3-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Digital Image Signing • NTP-G105 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration, page 24-4 3.8 Digital Image Signing (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) The DIS feature complies with the new U.S. Government Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-3 to provide security for all software provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 and ONS 15454 M2 platforms. This standard requires software to be digitally signed and verified for authenticity and integrity prior to load and execution. DIS feature automatically provides increased protection. DIS focuses on software security and provides increased protection from attacks and threats to Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 products. DIS verifies software integrity and provides assurance that the software has not been tampered with or modified. Digitally signed Cisco software provides counterfeit protection. New controller cards, such as TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE, provide services that authenticate the origin of the software running on the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The signage and verification process is transparent until verification fails. 3.8.1 DIS Identification Digitally signed software can be identified by the last three characters appended to the working version and protected version field in CTC. The DIS conventions can be viewed under the working version displayed in the Maintenance > Software tab in CTC. For example, 9.2.0 (09.20-X10C-29.09-SDA) and 9.2.0 (09.20-010C-18.18-SPA). The significance of the three characters appended to the software version is explained in Table: 3.8.2 Related Procedures for DIS To verify DIS, see NTP-G250 Verify Digital Image Signing (DIS) Information, page 14-6. 3.9 AIC-I Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Table 3-2 DIS Conventions in the Software Version Character Meaning S (first character) Indicates that the package is signed. P or D (second character) Production (P) or Development (D) image. Production image—Software approved for general release. Development image—development software provided under special conditions for limited use. A (third character) This third character indicates the version of the key used for signature generation. The version changes when a key is revoked and a new key is used. The values of the version key varies from A to Z. 3-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards AIC-I Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “AIC-I Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The optional Alarm Interface Controller–International (AIC-I) card provides customer-defined (environmental) alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire. It provides 12 customer-defined input and 4 customer-defined input/output contacts. The physical connections are via the backplane wire-wrap pin terminals. If you use the additional alarm expansion panel (AEP), the AIC-I card can support up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs, which are connected on the AEP connectors. The AEP is compatible with ANSI shelves only. A power monitoring function monitors the supply voltage (–48 VDC). 3.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-8 shows the AIC-I faceplate and a block diagram of the card. 3-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards AIC-I Card Figure 3-8 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram 3.9.2 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators Table G-2 lists the card-level LEDs on the card. AIC-I Fail Express orderwire Local orderwire EEPROM LED x2 AIC-I FPGA SCL links 4 x IN/OUT Power Monitoring 12/16 x IN Ringer Act Ring Ring Input Output 78828 FAIL ACT ACC INPUT/OUTPUT EOW LOW RING AIC-1 (DTMF) (DTMF) UDC-A UDC-B DCC-A DCC-B ACC PWR A B RING DCC-B DCC-A UDC-B UDC-A 3-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards AIC-I Card 3.9.3 External Alarms and Controls The AIC-I card provides input/output alarm contact closures. You can define up to 12 external alarm inputs and 4 external alarm inputs/outputs (user configurable). The physical connections are made using the backplane wire-wrap pins or FMEC connections. For information about increasing the number of input/output contacts, see the “ONS 15454 ANSI Alarm Expansion Panel” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. LEDs on the front panel of the AIC-I indicate the status of the alarm lines, one LED representing all of the inputs and one LED representing all of the outputs. External alarms (input contacts) are typically used for external sensors such as open doors, temperature sensors, flood sensors, and other environmental conditions. External controls (output contacts) are typically used to drive visual or audible devices such as bells and lights, but they can control other devices such as generators, heaters, and fans. You can program each of the twelve input alarm contacts separately. You can program each of the sixteen input alarm contacts separately. Choices include: • Alarm on Closure or Alarm on Open • Alarm severity of any level (Critical, Major, Minor, Not Alarmed, Not Reported) • Service Affecting or Non-Service Affecting alarm-service level • 63-character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log You cannot assign the fan-tray abbreviation for the alarm; the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts. The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you provision the alarm input. The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire: • Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a Minor alarm or above is the trigger. • Remote NE alarm severity: Same as the local NE alarm severity but applies to remote alarms only. • Virtual wire entities: You can provision any environmental alarm input to raise a signal on any virtual wire on external outputs 1 through 4 when the alarm input is an event. You can provision a signal on any virtual wire as a trigger for an external control output. You can also program the output alarm contacts (external controls) separately. In addition to provisionable triggers, you can manually force each external output contact to open or close. Manual operation takes precedence over any provisioned triggers that might be present. Note For ANSI shelves, the number of inputs and outputs can be increased using the AEP. The AEP is connected to the shelf backplane and requires an external wire-wrap panel. 3.9.4 Orderwire Orderwire allows a crafts person to plug a phone set into an ONS 15454 and communicate with crafts people working at other ONS 15454s or other facility equipment. The orderwire is a pulse code modulation (PCM) encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section/line overhead. 3-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards AIC-I Card The AIC-I allows simultaneous use of both local (section overhead signal) and express (line overhead channel) orderwire channels on a SONET/SDH ring or particular optics facility. Express orderwire also allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device. You can provision orderwire functions with CTC similar to the current provisioning model for DCC/GCC channels. In CTC, you provision the orderwire communications network during ring turn-up so that all NEs on the ring can reach one another. Orderwire terminations (that is, the optics facilities that receive and process the orderwire channels) are provisionable. Both express and local orderwire can be configured as on or off on a particular SONET/SDH facility. The ONS 15454 supports up to four orderwire channel terminations per shelf. This allows linear, single ring, dual ring, and small hub-and-spoke configurations. Orderwire is not protected in ring topologies such as bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR), multiplex section-shared protection ring (MS-SPRing), path protection, or subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) ring. Caution Do not configure orderwire loops. Orderwire loops cause feedback that disables the orderwire channel. The ONS 15454 implementation of both local and express orderwire is broadcast in nature. The line acts as a party line. Anyone who picks up the orderwire channel can communicate with all other participants on the connected orderwire subnetwork. The local orderwire party line is separate from the express orderwire party line. Up to four OC-N/STM-N facilities for each local and express orderwire are provisionable as orderwire paths. The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity, which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on the DTMF pad. Individual dialing is initiated by pressing * and the individual four-digit number on the DTMF pad. Table 3-3 shows the pins on the orderwire connector that correspond to the tip and ring orderwire assignments. When provisioning the orderwire subnetwork, make sure that an orderwire loop does not exist. Loops cause oscillation and an unusable orderwire channel. Figure 3-9 shows the standard RJ-11 connectors used for orderwire ports. Table 3-3 Orderwire Pin Assignments RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 Four-wire receive ring 2 Four-wire transmit tip 3 Two-wire ring 4 Two-wire tip 5 Four-wire transmit ring 6 Four-wire receive tip 3-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards AIC-I Card Figure 3-9 RJ-11 Connector 3.9.5 Power Monitoring The AIC-I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of –48 VDC for presence, under voltage, and over voltage. 3.9.6 User Data Channel The user data channel (UDC) features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps (F1 byte) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two user data channels, UDC-A and UDC-B, through separate RJ-11 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each UDC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454. The UDC ports are standard RJ-11 receptacles. Table 3-4 lists the UDC pin assignments. 3.9.7 Data Communications Channel The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two data communications channels, DCC-A and DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Each DCC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454. The DCC ports are synchronous serial interfaces. The DCC ports are standard RJ-45 receptacles. Table 3-5 lists the DCC pin assignments. 61077 Pin 1 Pin 6 RJ-11 Table 3-4 UDC Pin Assignments RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 For future use 2 TXN 3 RXN 4 RXP 5 TXP 6 For future use 3-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card 3.9.8 Related Procedures for AIC-I Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AIC-I card: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34 • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G60 Create and Delete Overhead Circuits, page 16-81 • NTP-G72 Provision External Alarms and Controls on the Alarm Interface Controller-International Card • NTP-G101 Modify Alarm Interface Controller–International Settings, page 20-117 3.10 MS-ISC-100T Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the “MS-ISC-100T Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The Multishelf Internal Switch Card (MS-ISC-100T) is an Ethernet switch used to implement the multishelf LAN. It connects the node controller shelf to the network and to subtending shelves. The MS-ISC-100T must always be equipped on the node controller shelf; it cannot be provisioned on a subtending controller shelf. The recommended configuration is to implement LAN redundancy using two MS-ISC-100T cards: one switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 7, and the other switch is connected to the Ethernet front panel port of the TCC2/TCC2P card in Slot 11. The Ethernet configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card is part of the software package and is automatically loaded. The MS-ISC-100T card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 on the node controller shelf; the recommended slots are Slot 6 and Slot 12. Table 3-6 lists the MS-ISC-100T port assignments. Table 3-5 DCC Pin Assignments RJ-45 Pin Number Description 1 TCLKP 2 TCLKN 3 TXP 4 TXN 5 RCLKP 6 RCLKN 7 RXP 8 RXN 3-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card Caution Shielded twisted-pair cabling should be used for inter-building applications. 3.10.1 Faceplate Diagram Figure 3-10 shows the card faceplate. Table 3-6 MS-ISC-100T Card Port Assignments Port Description DCN 1and DCN 2 Connection to the network SSC1 to SSC7 Connection to subtending shelves NC Connection to TCC2/TCC2P using a cross-over cable PRT Connection to the PRT port of the redundant MS-ISC-100T 3-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards MS-ISC-100T Card Figure 3-10 MS-ISC-100T Faceplate 3.10.2 MS-ISC-100T Card-Level Indicators Table G-3 lists the card-level LEDs on the card. 3.10.3 Related Procedures for MS-ISC-100T Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MS-ISC-100T card: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34 FAIL ACT MS ISC 100T CONSOLE 145274 DC2 SSC1 SSC2 SSC3 SSC4 SSC5 SSC6 SSC7 NC PRT DCN1 3-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections • NTP-G22 Verify Common Card Installation, page 14-4 • NTP-G144 Provision a Multishelf Node, page 14-8 • NTP-G163 Upgrade Nodes in Single-Shelf Mode to Multishelf Mode, page 14-131 • NTP-G146 Add a Rack, Passive Unit, or Shelf to a Multishelf Node • NTP-G147 Delete a Passive Unit, Shelf, or Rack from a Multishelf Node 3.11 Front Mount Electrical Connections This section describes the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs, which provide power, external alarm, and timing connections for the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf. 3.11.1 MIC-A/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-A/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The MIC-A/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY B input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card), sixteen alarm inputs, and four configurable alarm inputs/outputs. Its position is in Slot 23 in the center of the subrack Electrical Facility Connection Assembly (EFCA) area. The MIC-A/P FMEC has the following features: • Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs • Connection for eight alarm outputs (coming from the TCC2/TCC2P card) • Connection for four configurable alarm inputs/outputs • Connection for sixteen alarm inputs • Storage of manufacturing and inventory data For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf. 3.11.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-11 shows the MIC-A/P faceplate. Figure 3-11 MIC-A/P Faceplate Figure 3-12 shows a block diagram of the MIC-A/P. MIC-A/P ALARM IN/OUT CLEI CODE BARCODE POWER RATING GND BATTERY B CAUTION TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE 271305 3-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections Figure 3-12 MIC-A/P Block Diagram Table 3-7 shows the alarm interface pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 connector. Inventory Data (EEPROM) 61332 Backplane 3W3 Connector Alarms DB62 Connector Power 16 Alarm inputs 4 Alarm in/outputs Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description 1 ALMCUTOFF N Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair 2 ALMCUTOFF P Alarm cutoff, normally open ACO pair 3 ALMINP0 N Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires 4 ALMINP0 P Alarm input pair 1, reports closure on connected wires 5 ALMINP1 N Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires 6 ALMINP1 P Alarm input pair 2, reports closure on connected wires 7 ALMINP2 N Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires 8 ALMINP2 P Alarm input pair 3, reports closure on connected wires 9 ALMINP3 N Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires 10 ALMINP3 P Alarm input pair 4, reports closure on connected wires 11 EXALM0 N External customer alarm 1 12 EXALM0 P External customer alarm 1 13 GND Ground 14 EXALM1 N External customer alarm 2 15 EXALM1 P External customer alarm 2 16 EXALM2 N External customer alarm 3 17 EXALM2 P External customer alarm 3 18 EXALM3 N External customer alarm 4 19 EXALM3 P External customer alarm 4 20 EXALM4 N External customer alarm 5 21 EXALM4 P External customer alarm 5 22 EXALM5 N External customer alarm 6 23 EXALM5 P External customer alarm 6 24 EXALM6 N External customer alarm 7 25 EXALM6 P External customer alarm 7 3-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections 26 GND Ground 27 EXALM7 N External customer alarm 8 28 EXALM7 P External customer alarm 8 29 EXALM8 N External customer alarm 9 30 EXALM8 P External customer alarm 9 31 EXALM9 N External customer alarm 10 32 EXALM9 P External customer alarm 10 33 EXALM10 N External customer alarm 11 34 EXALM10 P External customer alarm 11 35 EXALM11 N External customer alarm 12 36 EXALM11 P External customer alarm 12 37 ALMOUP0 N Normally open output pair 1 38 ALMOUP0 P Normally open output pair 1 39 GND Ground 40 ALMOUP1 N Normally open output pair 2 41 ALMOUP1 P Normally open output pair 2 42 ALMOUP2 N Normally open output pair 3 43 ALMOUP2 P Normally open output pair 3 44 ALMOUP3 N Normally open output pair 4 45 ALMOUP3 P Normally open output pair 4 46 AUDALM0 N Normally open Minor audible alarm 47 AUDALM0 P Normally open Minor audible alarm 48 AUDALM1 N Normally open Major audible alarm 49 AUDALM1 P Normally open Major audible alarm 50 AUDALM2 N Normally open Critical audible alarm 51 AUDALM2 P Normally open Critical audible alarm 52 GND Ground 53 AUDALM3 N Normally open Remote audible alarm 54 AUDALM3 P Normally open Remote audible alarm 55 VISALM0 N Normally open Minor visual alarm 56 VISALM0 P Normally open Minor visual alarm 57 VISALM1 N Normally open Major visual alarm 58 VISALM1 P Normally open Major visual alarm 59 VISALM2 N Normally open Critical visual alarm 60 VISALM2 P Normally open Critical visual alarm Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued) Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description 3-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Front Mount Electrical Connections 3.11.3 MIC-C/T/P FMEC Note For hardware specifications, see the “MIC-C/T/P FMEC Specifications (ETSI only)” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The MIC-C/T/P FMEC provides connection for the BATTERY A input, one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs. It also provides connection for system management serial port, system management LAN port, modem port (for future use), and system timing inputs and outputs. Install the MIC-C/T/P in Slot 24. The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has the following features: • Connection for one of the two possible redundant power supply inputs • Connection for two serial ports for local craft/modem (for future use) • Connection for one LAN port • Connection for two system timing inputs • Connection for two system timing outputs • Storage of manufacturing and inventory data For proper system operation, both the MIC-A/P and MIC-C/T/P FMECs must be installed in the shelf. 3.11.4 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-13 shows the MIC-C/T/P FMEC faceplate. Figure 3-13 MIC-C/T/P Faceplate Figure 3-14 shows a block diagram of the MIC-C/T/P. 61 VISALM3 N Normally open Remote visual alarm 62 VISALM3 P Normally open Remote visual alarm Table 3-7 Alarm Interface Pinouts on the MIC-A/P DB-62 Connector (continued) Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description MIC-C/T/P CLEI CODE BARCODE POWER RATING GND BATTERY A TIMING A IN TIMING B OUT CAUTION TIGHTEN THE FACEPLATE SCREWS WITH 1.0 NM TORQUE 271306 LAN AUX TERM ACT LINK 3-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Figure 3-14 MIC-C/T/P Block Diagram The MIC-C/T/P FMEC has one pair of LEDs located on the RJ45 LAN connector. The green LED is on when a link is present, and the amber LED is on when data is being transferred. 3.12 Procedures for Control Cards The procedures described below explain how to install the control cards needed for the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2, and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms. 3.12.1 Before You Begin Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary. This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs). • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 3-34—Complete this procedure to install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform. • NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card, page 3-41—Complete this procedure to install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms. Inventory Data (EEPROM) 61334 Backplane 3W3 connector Power RJ-45 connectors System management serial ports RJ-45 connectors System management LAN 4 coaxial connectors Timing 2 x in / 2 x out 3-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94 Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms. Note If protective clips are installed on the backplane connectors of the cards, remove the clips before installing the cards. Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously. Step 1 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card” task on page 3-35. Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards”. Step 2 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card” task on page 3-38, if necessary. Step 3 (ONS 15454 only) Complete the “DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card” task on page 3-39, if necessary. Stop. You have completed this procedure. Purpose This procedure describes how to install the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 platform. Tools/Equipment Redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards on ONS 15454 shelf (required) AIC-I card (optional) MS-ISC-100T (optional; for multishelf node configurations) Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide: • “NTP-G7 Install the Power and Ground” • “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level Provisioning or higher 3-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card Caution Do not remove a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card during the software transfer process, which is indicated by alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 during the software transfer process will corrupt the system memory. Note Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card. Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that you will install. Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot (Slot 7 or 11). Note In Step 4, you will be instructed to watch the LED activity (sequence) on the front of the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. This activity begins immediately after you close the latches in Step 3. Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card. Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the back panel of the shelf. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any farther. If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off. Step 4 As needed, go to Step a to verify the LED activity on the TCC2 card. For the TCC2P go to Step b. For the TCC3 card go to Step c. a. For the TCC2 card: • All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds. (For TCC3 card it takes around 20 to 25 seconds) • The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds. • The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before turning off for about 3 seconds. • Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes before going to steady green. Purpose This task installs redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The first card you install in the ONS 15454 must be a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, and it must initialize before you install any cross-connect or traffic cards. Cross-connect cards are only required in hybrid nodes. Tools/Equipment Two TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards Prerequisite Procedures None Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level None 3-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards • While the PWR LEDs are red for two to three minutes, the ACT/STBY turn on. • The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the ACT/STBY remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2 card installed, and amber if this is the second TCC2 card installed.) Note It might take up to four minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear. Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the Alarms tab. Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while the TCC2 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots. Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2 card automatic upload. b. For the TCC2P card: • All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 15 seconds. • The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds. • The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid. • All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn off for about 5 seconds. • Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly. • The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC2P card installed, and yellow if this is the second TCC2P card installed.) Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear. Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the Alarms tab. Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while the TCC2P card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots. 3-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC2P card automatic upload. c. For the TCC3 card: • All LEDs turn on briefly. The red FAIL LED, the yellow ACT/STBY LED, the green SYNC LED, and the green ACO LED turn on for about 25 seconds. • The red FAIL LED and the green ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 3 seconds. • The red FAIL LED turns on for about 60 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds and then becomes solid (the LED is turned on for about 20 seconds). • All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs) blink once and turn off for about 5 seconds. • Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds. The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes before going to steady green. During this time, the ACT/STBY, MJ, and MN LEDs might turn on, followed by the SNYC LED briefly. • The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the yellow ACT/STBY remains on. (The ACT/STBY LED will be green if this is the first TCC3 card installed, and yellow if this is the second TCC3 card installed.) Note It might take up to three minutes for the A and B power alarms to clear. Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the Alarms tab. Note If you are logged into CTC, the SFTWDOWN alarm might appear as many as two times while the TCC3 card initializes. The alarm should clear after the card completely boots. Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TCC3 card automatic upload. Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card installed, or yellow for standby if this is the second powered-up TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3. The IP address, temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970. Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version. Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.) Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card and install a replacement card. 3-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. To replace the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide. Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If both TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards are already installed, proceed to Step 9. Tip If you install a standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card that has a different software version than the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card, the newly installed standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card automatically copies the software version from the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. You do not need to do anything in this situation. However, the loading TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card does not boot up in the normal manner. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow most of the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes while the new software loads onto the active TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. After loading the new software, the upgraded TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card’s LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber ACT/STBY LED turns on. Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off. Note Alarm LEDs might be on; disregard alarm LEDs until you are logged into CTC and can view the Alarms tab. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G34 Install the AIC-I Card Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card. Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card. Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails in Slot 9 until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card. Purpose This task installs the AIC-I card. The AIC-I card provides connections for external alarms and controls (environmental alarms). Tools/Equipment AIC-I card Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level None 3-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further. Step 4 Verify the following: • The red FAIL LED blinks for up to 10 seconds. Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power. • The PWR A and PWR B LEDs become red, the two INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs become amber, and the ACT LED turns green for approximately 5 seconds. • The PWR A and PWR B LEDs turn green, the INPUT/OUTPUT LEDs turn off, and the green ACT LED remains on. Note It might take up to 3 minutes for the PWR A and PWR B LEDs to update. Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, no LEDs turn on. Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically, the card is not installed properly. Remove the card and repeat Steps 1 to 4. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G309 Install the MS-ISC-100T Card Note When installing cards, allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card. Purpose This task installs redundant MS-ISC-100T cards. The MS-ISC-100T card is required for a multishelf node configuration. It provides LAN redundancy on the node controller shelf. An alternative to using the MS-ISC-100T card is the Cisco Catalyst 2950, although Cisco recommends using the MS-ISC-100T. For more information on the Catalyst 2950 installation, refer to the Catalyst 2950 product documentation. Tools/Equipment MS-ISC-100T card (2) Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G33 Install the TCC2, TCC2P, or TCC3 Card, page 3-35 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level None 3-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Note The MS-ISC-100T is not supported in a subtended shelf. Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors on the card. Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails into the appropriate slot in the node controller shelf until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot. The card can be installed in any slot from Slot 1 to 6 or 12 to 17. Cisco recommends that you install the MS-ISC-100T cards in Slot 6 and Slot 12. Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches/ejectors on the card. Note It is possible to close the latches/ejectors when the card is not completely plugged into the backplane. Ensure that you cannot insert the card any further. Step 4 Verify the LED activity: • The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds. • The red FAIL LED turns on for 15 to 20 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for approximately 3 minutes. • The red FAIL LED turns on for approximately 6 minutes. • The green ACT or ACT/STBY LED turns on. The SF LED can persist until all card ports connect to their far end counterparts and a signal is present. Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on, check the power. Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card, all LEDs turn off. Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the redundant MS-ISC-100T card. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 3-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards NTP-G313 Install and Configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card Warning During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not directly touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself. Statement 94 Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. For detailed instructions on how to wear the ESD wristband, refer to the Electrostatic Discharge and Grounding Guide for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms. Note If you install a card incorrectly, the FAIL LED flashes continuously. Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card” task on page 3-42. Note If you install the wrong card in a slot, see the “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards”. Step 2 Complete the “DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45. Step 3 Complete the “DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards” task on page 3-45. Stop. You have completed this procedure. Purpose This procedure describes how to install and configure the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE card. TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards are the control cards needed for the ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 platforms. Tools/Equipment Redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf (required) Stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on ONS 15454 M2 shelf (required) Prerequisite Procedures Following procedures in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide: • “NTP-G271 Install the Power and Ground to the ONS 15454 M2 Shelf” • “NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level Provisioning or higher 3-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards DLP-G604 Install the TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE Card Caution Do not remove the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards during the software installation process, which is indicated by alternate flashing FAIL and ACT/STBY LEDs. Removing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards during the software installation process will corrupt the system memory. Note Allow each TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card to boot completely before installing the redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. Note On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy. On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1. For more information, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. Note You cannot insert the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in other slots due to mechanical constraints. To identify the card slot, match the symbol placed on the lower side of the card front panel with the symbol in the shelf. Caution To achieve redundancy, two TNC and TNCE cards or two TSC and TSCE cards must be installed in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf. Do not install one TNC or TNCE card and a redundant TSC or TSCE card in the same shelf. Step 1 Open the latches/ejectors of the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that you will install. Step 2 Use the latches/ejectors to firmly slide the card horizontally along the guide rails until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot (slot 1 or 8 in the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and slot 1 in the ONS 15454 M2 shelf). Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly, and close the latches/ejectors on the card. Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task installs redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards on the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and a stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card on the ONS 15454 M2 shelf. Install and initialize the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card before installing any other line cards into the shelf assemblies. On the ONS 15454 M6 shelf, install the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards in slots 1 and 8 for redundancy. On the ONS 15454 M2 shelf, install the stand-alone TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card in slot 1. Tools/Equipment Two TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards for the ONS 15454 M6 shelf and one TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card for the ONS 15454 M2 shelf Prerequisite Procedures None Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite Security Level None 3-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards If you insert a card into a slot assigned for a different card, all LEDs turn off. Step 4 As needed, verify the LED activity on the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. • The red FAIL LED, PWR LED turn on briefly. • The red FAIL LED turns on for about 10 seconds. • The red FAIL LED and the amber ACT/STBY LED turn on for about 30 seconds. • The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds. • The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds. • All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs blink once and turn off for about 10 seconds. • ACT/STBY LED blinks for about 1 second. • All the LEDs including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs turn off for about 10 seconds. • The ACT/STBY, ACO, and PWR LEDs turn on. • The boot-up process is complete when the PWR LEDs turn green and the amber ACT/STBY remains on. The ACT/STBY LED turns green if this is the first TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installed, and amber if this is the second TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installed. Note It might take up to four minutes for the power alarms to clear. Note Alarm LEDs might be on. After completing the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installation, log in to CTC and click the Alarms tab to display the alarms raised on the card. For procedure to clear the alarm, see the Cisco ONS DWDM Troubleshooting Guide. Note During the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card initialization, the SFTWDOWN alarm appears twice. The alarm clears after the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card boots completely. Note If the FAIL LED is on continuously, see the tip in Step 8 about the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card automatic upload. Figure 3-15 illustrates the installation of TNC and TNCE cards on ONS 15454 M6 shelf. 3-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Figure 3-15 Installing TNC and TNCE Cards on ONS 15454 M6 Shelf Step 5 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is green if this is the first powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card installed or amber if this is the second powered-up TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE. The IP address, temperature of the node, and time of day appear on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970. Step 6 The LCD cycles through the IP address (the default is 192.1.0.2), node name, and software version. Verify that the correct software version is shown on the LCD. The software text string indicates the node type (SDH or SONET) and software release. (For example: SDH 09.20-05L-20.10 indicates it is an SDH software load, Release 9.2. The numbers following the release number do not have any significance.) Step 7 If the LCD shows the correct software version, continue with Step 8. If the LCD does not show the correct software version, refer to your next level of technical support, upgrade the software, or remove the TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and install a replacement card. Refer to the release-specific software upgrade document to replace the software. Step 8 (ONS 15454 M6 shelf only) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. Tip If you install a standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card that has a different software version than the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card, the standby TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card copies the software version from the active TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. When the standby card is first inserted, the LEDs follow the normal boot-up sequence. However, after the red FAIL LED turns on for about 5 seconds, the FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED begin to flash alternately for up to 30 minutes. After loading the new software, the upgraded TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards LEDs repeat the appropriate bootup sequence, and the amber ACT/STBY LED turns on. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 279119 1 2 TNC card Guide rail 3-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards where you want to provision PPM and port settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears. Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following: • PPM—Choose 1 or 2 from the PPM drop-down list. • PPM Type—Displays the PPM associated with the chosen PPM in the above step. Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area becomes white when the PPM is inserted and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the name of PPM. Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears. Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following: • Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the Port drop-down list. • Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, FE, or ONE-GE from the Port Type drop-down list. Note OC-3 can be configured only on PPM port 1. FE and ONE-GE can be configured on both the ports. Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is listed in the Rate column. Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision another PPM and port on the TNC and TNCE cards. Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G606 Configure UDC and VoIP for the TNC and TNCE Cards Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task provisions a PPM and port on TNC and TNCE cards. PPMs are created to support the OSC function. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level None Purpose (ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) This task configures UDC and VoIP traffic for the TNC and TNCE cards. Tools/Equipment None 3-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 3 Install the Control Cards Procedures for Control Cards Note Each TNC and TNCE cards support UDC/VoIP configuration. You can configure UDC or VoIP on the two SFP ports present on the TNC and TNCE cards. The TNC and TNCE cards support the UDC/VoIP configuration only when OSC is provisioned on the SFP ports. Note If two nodes are connected through the fiber and if the TNC and TNCE cards in one node has UDC configuration, the TNC and TNCE cards in the other node must also have UDC configuration. The same rule applies to VoIP configuration. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TNC and TNCE cards where you want to configure UDC and VoIP. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > UDC / VOIP tabs. Step 3 From the Service Type drop-drop list, choose UDC or VOIP. Note You can configure UDC or VoIP on only one SFP port at a time per TNC or TNCE card. If you want to configure UDC or VoIP on the second SFP port, choose NONE from the Service Type drop-down list for the first port and then choose UDC or VoIP for the second port. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 DLP-G605 Provision PPM and Port for the TNC and TNCE Cards, page 3-45 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level None CH A P T E R 4-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards This chapter describes the optical service channel (OSC) cards for Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note Unless noted otherwise, the cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 4.1 Card Overview, page 4-1 • 4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels, page 4-3 • 4.3 OSCM Card, page 4-3 • 4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card, page 4-5 • 4.4 OSC-CSM Card, page 4-6 • 4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card, page 4-11 4.1 Card Overview This section provides card summary and compatibility information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. An optical service channel (OSC) is a bidirectional channel connecting two adjacent nodes in a DWDM ring. For every DWDM node (except terminal nodes), two different OSC terminations are present, one for the west side and another for the east side. The channel transports OSC overhead that is used to manage ONS 15454 DWDM networks. An OSC signal uses the 1510-nm wavelength and does not affect 4-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards Card Overview client traffic. The primary purpose of this channel is to carry clock synchronization and orderwire channel communications for the DWDM network. It also provides transparent links between each node in the network. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. There are two versions of the OSC modules: the OSCM, and the OSC-CSM, which contains the OSC wavelength combiner and separator component in addition to the OSC module. The Mesh/Multiring Upgrade (MMU) card is used to optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration. Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM card. OSC can be created on the OC3 port (SFP-0) of the TNC and TNCE cards. The TNC and TNCE cards support two optical service channels (OSC): primary OSC and secondary OSC. The primary optical service channel (SFP-0) supports the following interfaces: • OC-3/STM-1 • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE). The secondary optical service channel (SFP-1) supports the following interfaces: • Fast Ethernet (FE) • Gigabit Ethernet (GE). 4.1.1 Card Summary Table 4-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each card. 4.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 4-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the OSC and OSCM cards. Table 4-1 OSCM, and OSC-CSM Card Summary Card Port Description For Additional Information OSCM The OSCM has one set of optical ports and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 8 and 10. See the “4.3 OSCM Card” section on page 4-3. OSC-CSM The OSC-CSM has three sets of optical ports and one Ethernet port located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.4 OSC-CSM Card” section on page 4-6. Table 4-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Service Channel Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 OSCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OSC-CSM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards Class 1 Laser Safety Labels 4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1. 4.3 OSCM Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For OSCM card specifications, see the OSCM Card Specifications document. Note On 15454-M2 and 15454-M6 shelves, the TNC and TNCE cards include the functions of the OSCM card. The OSCM card is used in amplified nodes that include the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, or OPT-BST-L booster amplifier. The OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, and OPT-BST-L cards include the required OSC wavelength combiner and separator component. The OSCM cannot be used in nodes where you use OC-N/STM-N cards, electrical cards, or cross-connect cards. The OSCM uses Slots 8 and 10, which are also cross-connect card slots. The OSCM supports the following features: • OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC • Supervisory data channel (SDC) forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing • Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring • 100BaseT far-end (FE) User Channel (UC) • Monitoring functions such as orderwire support and optical safety The OC-3/STM-1 section data communications channel (SDCC or RS-DCC) overhead bytes are used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, then it is regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing through the system communication link (SCL) bus on the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card. The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a packet-over-SONET/SDH (POS) processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 connector. The OSCM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the DWDM cards. The DWDM cards then forward the clock information to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. 4-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card 4.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4-1 shows the OSCM card faceplate and block diagram. Figure 4-1 OSCM Card Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-3. Figure 4-2 shows the block diagram of the variable optical attenuator (VOA) within the OSCM. The OSCM has one OC-3/STM-1 optical port located on the faceplate. One long-reach OSC transmits and receives the OSC to and from another DWDM node. Both DCN data and FE payload are carried on this link. OSCM FAIL ACT SF UC RX TX 96464 ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC Line OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII 145944 Processor VOA Physical Interface DC/DC 19.44 MHz Line Ref clock Power supply Input filters MT CLKt BAT A&B 0 Slot 1-6 MT CLKt 0 Slot 12-17 6 M P SCL Bus to TCCs FE FE User Channel 6 TOH & Cell Bus 4-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSCM Card Figure 4-2 OSCM VOA Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.3.2 OSCM Card Functions The functions of the OSCM card are: • 4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 4.3.2.1 OSCM Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiode P1 monitors the power for the OSCM card. The returned power level value is calibrated to the OSC TX port (Table 4-3). For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 4.3.3 Related Procedures for the OSCM Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSCM card: • NTP-G39 Verify OSCM Transmit Power, page 14-129 • NTP-G45 Perform the C-Band and L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-74 • NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-86 P1 P1 OSC TX Physical photodiode OSC Variable optical attenuator Control Module OSC RX Control Interface 124968 Table 4-3 OSCM VOA Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 Output OSC OSC TX 4-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card • NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-90 • NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards, page 21-94 • DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards, page 21-104 • DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards • NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2 4.4 OSC-CSM Card Note For OSC-CSM card specifications, see the OSC-CSM Card Specifications document. The OSC-CSM card is used in unamplified nodes. This means that the booster amplifier with the OSC wavelength combiner and separator is not required for OSC-CSM operation. The OSC-CSM can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. To operate in hybrid mode, the OSC-CSM cards must be accompanied by cross-connect cards. The cross-connect cards enable functionality on the OC-N/STM-N cards and electrical cards. The OSC-CSM supports the following features: • Optical combiner and separator module for multiplexing and demultiplexing the optical service channel to or from the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) signal • OC-3/STM-1 formatted OSC • SDC forwarded to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing • Distribution of the synchronous clock to all nodes in the ring • 100BaseT FE UC • Monitoring functions such as orderwire support • Optical safety: Signal loss detection and alarming, fast transmitted power shut down by means of an optical 1x1 switch • Optical safety remote interlock (OSRI), a feature capable of shutting down the optical output power • Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details on ALS provisioning for the card, see the DLP-G203 Change the OSCM and OSC-CSM ALS Maintenance Settings, page 20-12. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 13-30. The WDM signal coming from the line is passed through the OSC combiner and separator, where the OSC signal is extracted from the WDM signal. The WDM signal is sent along with the remaining channels to the COM port (label on the front panel) for routing to the OADM or amplifier units, while the OSC signal is sent to an optical transceiver. The OSC is an OC-3/STM-1 formatted signal. The OC-3/STM-1 SDCC or RS-DCC overhead bytes are used for network communications. An optical transceiver terminates the OC-3/STM-1, and then it is regenerated and converted into an electrical signal. The SDCC or RS-DCC bytes are forwarded to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards for processing via the SCL bus on the backplane. Orderwire bytes (E1, E2, F1) are also forwarded via the SCL bus to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 for forwarding to the AIC-I card. 4-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card The payload portion of the OC-3/STM-1 is used to carry the fast Ethernet UC. The frame is sent to a POS processing block that extracts the Ethernet packets and makes them available at the RJ-45 front panel connector. The OSC-CSM distributes the reference clock information by removing it from the incoming OC-3/STM-1 signal and then sending it to the active and standby TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 cards. The clock distribution is different from the OSCM card because the OSC-CSM does not use Slot 8 or 10 (cross-connect card slots). Note S1 and S2 (Figure 4-5 on page 4-10) are optical splitters with a splitter ratio of 2:98. The result is that the power at the MON TX port is about 17 dB lower than the relevant power at the COM RX port, and the power at the MON RX port is about 20 dB lower than the power at the COM TX port. The difference is due to the presence of a tap coupler for the P1 photodiode. 4-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card 4.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4-3 shows the OSC-CSM faceplate. Figure 4-3 OSC-CSM Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “4.2 Class 1 Laser Safety Labels” section on page 4-3. The OSC-CSM has a OC3 port and three other sets of ports located on the faceplate. Figure 4-4 shows a block diagram of the OSC-CSM card. 96465 OSC CSM FAIL ACT SF UC RX MON TX RX COM TX RX LINE TX ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC combiner separator OSC Line COM OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII TOH & Cell Bus 145943 Processor Physical Interface DC/DC Power supply Input filters MPMP BAT A&B SCL Bus to TCCs RxClkRef FE User Channel 4-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card Figure 4-4 OSC-CSM Block Diagram ASIC OC3-ULR Optical transceiver OSC combiner separator OSC Line COM OC-3 FPGA OC-12 POS OC-3 MII TOH & Cell Bus 96477 Processor Physical Interface DC/DC Power supply Input filters MPMP BAT A&B SCL Bus to TCCs RxClkRef FE User Data Channel 4-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card Figure 4-5 shows the OSC-CSM optical module functional block diagram. Figure 4-5 OSC-CSM Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 4.4.2 OSC-CSM Card Functions The functions of the OSC-CSM card are: • 4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring • G.34 Alarms and Thresholds, page G-26 • Card level indicators—Table G-5 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 4.4.2.1 OSC-CSM Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P5 monitor the power for the OSC-CSM card. Their function is as follows: P P P P P V V 124897 MON RX MON TX COM TX OSC RX LINE TX COM RX LINE RX DROP section ADD section OSC TX Control Interface Filter Filter S1 P1 P2 P5 P4 PV1 PV2 P3 HW Switch Control Opt. Switch S2 Virtual photodiode Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P V Optical splitter Control 4-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card • P1: The returned power value is calibrated to the LINE RX port, including the insertion loss of the previous filter (the reading of this power dynamic range has been brought backward towards the LINE RX output). • P2: The returned value is calibrated to the LINE RX port. • P3: The returned value is calibrated to the COM RX port. • P5: The returned value is calibrated to the OSC TX port, including the insertion loss of the subsequent filter. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 4-4. The OSC power on the LINE TX is the same as the power reported from P5. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 4.4.3 Related Procedures for the OSC-CSM Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OSC-CSM card: • NTP-G46 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-78 • NTP-G156 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-82 • NTP-G47 Perform the C-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-86 • NTP-G157 Perform the L-Band Line Amplifier Node with OSCM and OSC-CSM Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-90 • NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards, page 21-106 • NTP-G50 Perform the Passive OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards, page 21-112 • DLP-G139 View PM Parameters for OSCM and OSC-CSM cards • NTP-G90 Modify OSCM and OSC-CSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-2 Table 4-4 OSC-CSM Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameters P1 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported OSC Power P2 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P3 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported P5 Output OSC OSC TX OSC Power Supported 4-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 4 Setup Optical Service Channel Cards OSC-CSM Card CH A P T E R 5-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards This chapter describes the optical amplifier cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note In this chapter, “RAMAN-CTP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP card. “RAMAN-COP” refers to the 15454-M-RAMAN-COP card. Chapter topics include the nine types of ONS 15454 DWDM amplifiers: • 5.1 Card Overview, page 5-2 • 5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels, page 5-7 • 5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card, page 5-7 • 5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card, page 5-11 • 5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card, page 5-11 • 5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards, page 5-15 • 5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card, page 5-15 • 5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card, page 5-19 • 5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-20 • 5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card, page 5-24 • 5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-25 • 5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card, page 5-29 • 5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-30 • 5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card, page 5-34 5-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview • 5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-34 • 5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards, page 5-39 • 5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-39 • 5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards, page 5-44 • 5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-45 • 5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards, page 5-49 5.1 Card Overview This section provides summary and compatibility information for the optical amplifier cards. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide for a list of slots and symbols. Optical amplifier card architecture includes an optical plug-in module with a controller that manages optical power, laser current, and temperature control loops. An amplifier also manages communication with the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card and operation, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) functions such as provisioning, controls, and alarms. 5.1.1 Applications The following amplifiers can be configured as booster or preamplifiers: • OPT-AMP-C • OPT-AMP-17C • OPT-AMP-L • OPT-BST-E • OPT-BST • OPT-EDFA-17 • OPT-EDFA-24 The amplifier functions as a booster amplifier by default. The amplifier role is automatically configured when the CTP NE update configuration file is loaded in CTC. The amplifier role can also be manually modified. Note The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifiers are supported as preamplifiers in sites that are equipped with the OPT-RAMP-C card. In any other configuration, the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards must be configured as a booster amplifier. For more information about the supported configurations and network topologies, see Chapter 12, “Node Reference” and Chapter 13, “Network Reference.” 5-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview 5.1.2 Card Summary Table 5-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each optical amplifier card. Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 Card Port Description For Additional Information OPT-PRE The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports (three sets) located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card” section on page 5-7. OPT-BST The OPT-BST amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on page 5-11. OPT-BST-E The OPT-BST-E amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card” section on page 5-11. OPT-BST-L The OPT-BST-L L-band amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card” section on page 5-15. OPT-AMP-L The OPT-AMP-L L-band preamplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It is a two-slot card that operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card” section on page 5-20. OPT-AMP-17-C The OPT-AMP-17-C C-band low-gain preamplifier/booster amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card” section on page 5-25. OPT-AMP-C The OPT-AMP-C C-band high-gain, high-power preamplifier/booster amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates as a preamplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slots 2 to 6 and 11 to 16 or as a booster amplifier when equipped and provisioned in Slot 1 and 17. See the “5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card” section on page 5-30. OPT-RAMP-C The OPT-RAMP-C C-band amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 5-34. OPT-RAMP-CE The OPT-RAMP-CE C-band amplifier has five sets of optical ports located on the faceplate and operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards” section on page 5-34. RAMAN-CTP The RAMAN-CTP amplifier is a single-slot card and has six optical ports located on the faceplate. The RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP units must be installed in adjacent slots (Slots 2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis and Slots 2 and 3 in the ONS 15454 M2 chassis. See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” section on page 5-39. RAMAN-COP The RAMAN-COP amplifier has one optical port located on the faceplate. It is a single-slot card and works in conjunction with the RAMAN-CTP amplifier. See the “5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards” section on page 5-39. 5-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview OPT-EDFA-17 The OPT-EDFA-17 amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on page 5-45 OPT-EDFA-24 The OPT-EDFA-24 amplifier has four sets of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards” section on page 5-45 Table 5-1 Optical Amplifier Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information 5-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview 5.1.3 Card Compatibility Table 5-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each optical amplifier card. Table 5-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards up to Release 5.0 Card Type R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 OPT-PRE 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM OPT-BST 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM OPT-BST-E No No 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM OPT-BST-L No No No No OPT-AMP-L No No No No OPT-AMP-17-C No No No No OPT-AMP-C No No No No OPT-RAMP-C No No No No OPT-RAMP-CE No No No No RAMAN-CTP No No No No RAMAN-COP No No No No OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No 5-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Card Overview Table 5-3 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Amplifier Cards Release 6.0 and Later Card Type R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R 9.2 R 9.2.1 R 9.3 R 9.4 OPT-PRE 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-BST 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-BST-E 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-BST-L No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM OPT-AMP-L No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM 15454-DWDM OPT-AMP-17-C No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-AMP-C No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-RAMP-C No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 OPT-RAMP-CENo No No No No No 15454- DWDM ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M6 RAMAN-CTP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2, 15454-M6 15454-M2, 15454-M6 RAMAN-COP No No No No No No No No No 15454-M2, 15454-M6 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-EDFA-17 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 OPT-EDFA-24 No No No No No No No No No ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 ONS 15454, 15454-M2, 15454-M6 5-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards Class 1M Laser Safety Labels 5.1.4 Optical Power Alarms and Thresholds Table 5-4 lists the alarms and related thresholds for the OPT-BST, OPT-BST-E, OPT-BST-L, OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, and OPT-AMP-C cards. 5.2 Class 1M Laser Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1. 5.3 OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Note For OPT-PRE card specifications, see the OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-PRE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-PRE is a C-band, DWDM, two-stage erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with midamplifier loss (MAL) that can be connected to a dispersion compensating unit (DCU). The OPT-PRE is equipped with a built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) that controls the gain tilt and can also be used to pad the DCU to a reference value. You can install the OPT-PRE in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card is designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-PRE features include: • Fixed gain mode with programmable tilt • True variable gain • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) Table 5-4 Alarms and Thresholds Port Alarms Thresholds LINE RX LOS None LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low LOS-O LOS-O Fail Low LINE TX OPWR-FAIL OPWR Fail Low OSC TX None None OSC RX None None COM TX None None COM RX LOS-P LOS-P Fail Low 5-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card • MAL for fiber-based DCU • Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • Four signal photodiodes to monitor the input and output optical power of the two amplifier stages through CTC • An optical output port for external monitoring Note The optical splitter has a ratio of 1:99, resulting in about 20 dB-lower power at the MON port than at the COM TX port. 5.3.1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram The OPT-PRE amplifier has five optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON is the output monitor port • COM RX (receive) is the input signal port • COM TX (transmit) is the output signal port • DC RX is the MAL input signal port • DC TX is the MAL output signal port 5-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Figure 5-1 shows the OPT-PRE amplifier card faceplate. Figure 5-1 OPT-PRE Faceplate Figure 5-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-PRE card’s features. OPT PRE FAIL ACT SF MON RX COM TX RX DC TX 96466 5-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-PRE Amplifier Card Figure 5-2 OPT-PRE Block Diagram Figure 5-3 shows the a block diagram of how the OPT-PRE optical module functions. Figure 5-3 OPT-PRE Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.3.2 OPT-PRE Card Functions The functions of the OPT-PRE card are: • 5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 Optical module COM RX DC RX 96478 Processor DC TX COM TX MON FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98298 DCU COM RX COM TX DC TX DC RX MON P1 P2 P3 P4 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator 5-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card 5.3.2.1 OPT-PRE card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-PRE card. Table 5-5 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.3.3 Related Procedures for OPT-PRE Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-PRE card: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.4 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E hardware specifications, see the OPT-BST Amplifier Card Specifications and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Table 5-5 OPT-PRE Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 Input Com COM RX P2 Output DC DC TX P3 Input DC DC RX P4 Output COM (Total Output) COM TX Output COM (Signal Output) 5-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card The OPT-BST is designed to ultimately support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. The OPT-BST-E amplifier card is a gain-enhanced version of the OPT-BST card. It is designed to support up to 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing. Both the cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA with optical service channel (OSC) add-and-drop capability. When an OPT-BST or an OPT-BST-E is installed in the an ONS 15454, an OSCM card is also needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt) • Gain range of 5 to 20 dB in constant gain mode and output power mode for an OPT-BST card • Gain range of 8 to 23 dBm with the tilt managed at 0 dBm in constant gain mode and output power mode for an OPT-BST-E card • Enhanced gain range of 23 to 26 dBm with unmanaged tilt with OPT-BST-E card • True variable gain • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI), a CTC software feature capable of shutting down optical output power or reducing the power to a safe level (automatic power reduction) • Automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 13-30. Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power. 5.4.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Faceplate Ports and Block diagram The OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. 5-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Figure 5-4 shows the OPT-BST amplifier card faceplate. Figure 5-4 OPT-BST Faceplate The OPT-BST-E card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-BST card. Figure 5-5 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E card’s features. OPT BST FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 96467 5-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Amplifier Card Figure 5-5 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Block Diagram Figure 5-6 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E optical module functions. Figure 5-6 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.4.2 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Card Functions The functions of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards are: • 5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.4.2.1 OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, and P4 monitor the power for the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards. Table 5-6 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 96479 Processor Line TX COM TX Com RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98300 MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P3 P4 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode 5-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P3 and P4. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.4.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST and OPT-BST-E cards: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.5 OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Table 5-6 Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input Com COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported 5-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Note For OPT-BST-L card specifications, see the OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-BST-L safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-BST-L is an L-band, DWDM EDFA with OSC add-and-drop capability. The card is well suited for use in networks that employ dispersion shifted (DS) fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The OPT-BST-L is designed to ultimately support 64 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing, but in Software R9.0 and earlier it is limited to 32 channels at 100-GHz spacing.When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-BST-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-BST-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (with programmable tilt) • Standard gain range of 8 to 20 dB in the programmable gain tilt mode • True variable gain • 20 to 27 dB gain range in the uncontrolled gain tilt mode • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS Note The optical splitters each have a ratio of 1:99. The result is that MON TX and MON RX port power is about 20 dB lower than COM TX and COM RX port power. 5.5.1 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagram The OPT-BST-L amplifier has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. 5-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. Figure 5-7 shows the OPT-BST-L card faceplate. Figure 5-7 OPT-BST-L Faceplate Figure 5-8 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-BST-L card’s features. OPT BST-L FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 180929 5-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card Figure 5-8 OPT-BST-L Block Diagram Figure 5-9 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-BST-L optical module functions. Figure 5-9 OPT-BST-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.5.2 OPT-BST-L Card Functions The functions of the OPT-BST-L card are: • 5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 180930 Processor Line TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 134976 MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P4 P5 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode P3 5-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-BST-L Amplifier Card 5.5.2.1 OPT-BST-L Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor the power for the OPT-BST-L card. Table 5-7 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power values reported from P4 and P5. The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P3. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.5.3 Related Procedures for OPT-BST-L Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-BST-L card: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards Table 5-7 OPT-BST-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P5 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported 5-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 5.6 OPT-AMP-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For OPT-AMP-L card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-L Preamplifier Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-AMP-L card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-AMP-L is an L-band, DWDM optical amplifier card consisting of a two-stage EDFA with midstage access loss (MSL) for an external DCU and OSC add-and-drop capability. Using CTC, the card is provisionable as a preamplifier (OPT-PRE) or booster amplifier (OPT-BST), and is well suited for use in networks that employ DS or SMF-28 fiber. The amplifier can operate up to 64 optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the 1570 nm to 1605 nm wavelength range. When an OPT-AMP-L installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the two-slot OPT-AMP-L in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card has the following features: • Maximum power output of 20 dBm • True variable gain amplifier with settable range from 12 to 24 dBm in the standard gain range and 24 dBm to 35 dbM with uncontrolled gain tilt • Built-in VOA to control gain tilt • Up to 12 dBm MSL for an external DCU • Fast transient suppression; able to adjust power levels in hundreds of microseconds to avoid bit errors in failure or capacity growth situations • Nondistorting low frequency transfer function • Midstage access loss for dispersion compensation unit • Constant pump current mode (test mode) • Constant output power mode (used during optical node setup) • Constant gain mode • Internal ASE compensation in constant gain mode and in constant output power mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down control (less than one second), and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. For information on using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the “13.11 Network Optical Safety” section on page 13-30. Note Before disconnecting any OPT AMP-L fiber for troubleshooting, first make sure the OPT AMP-L card is unplugged. 5-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 5.6.1 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The OPT-AMP-L amplifier card has ten optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • DC TX is the output signal to the DCU. • DC RX is the input signal from the DCU. 5-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card Figure 5-10 shows the OPT-AMP-L card faceplate. Figure 5-10 OPT-AMP-L Faceplate Figure 5-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-L card’s features. OPT-AMP-L FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX RX DC TX 180931 5-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card Figure 5-11 OPT-AMP-L Block Diagram Figure 5-12 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-AMP-L optical module functions. Figure 5-12 OPT-AMP-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram Optical module Monitor Line RX Line RX DC RX Processor Line TX DC TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 180932 MON TX OSC RX OSC TX COM RX COM TX MON RX LINE TX LINE RX P1 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P2 P3 P6 P4 DC TX DC RX External Mid-Stage Loss OSC Add OSC Drop P7 P5 Transmit Section Receive Section 145256 5-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-L Card 5.6.2 OPT-AMP-L Card Functions The functions of the OPT-AMP-L card are: • 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P7 monitor the power for the OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards. Table 5-8 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. The power values on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power values reported from P5 and P6. The power values on the LINE TX port is calculated by adding the IL to the power value reported from P7. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.6.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-L Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-L card: • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 Table 5-8 Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output DC (total power) DC TX Channel Power Supported Output DC (signal power) P3 Input DC (input power) DC RX Channel Power Supported P4 Output Line (total power) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (signal power) P5 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P6 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P7 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported 5-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.7 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Note For OPT-AMP-17-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-17-C Amplifier Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-AMP-17-C safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-AMP-17-C is a 17-dB gain, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier with OSC add-and-drop capability. It supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-17-C installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-17-C in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card’s features include: • Fixed gain mode (no programmable tilt) • Standard gain range of 14 to 20 dB at startup when configured as a preamplifier • Standard gain range of 20 to 23 dB in the transient mode when configured as a preamplifier • Gain range of 14 to 23 dB (with no transient gain range) when configured as a booster amplifier • True variable gain • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Settable maximum output power • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • ASE compensation in fixed gain mode • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS 5-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card 5.7.1 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card has eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • LINE TX is the output signal port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. 5-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card Figure 5-13 shows the OPT-AMP-17-C amplifier card faceplate. Figure 5-13 OPT-AMP-17-C Faceplate Figure 5-14 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-17C card’s features. OPT -AMP 17-C FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX LINE TX 159520 5-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card Figure 5-14 OPT-AMP17-C Block Diagram Figure 5-15 shows how the OPT-AMP-17-C optical module functions. Figure 5-15 OPT-AMP-17-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 5.7.2 OPT-AMP-17-C Card Functions The functions of the OPT-AMP-17-C card are: • G.33 Automatic Power Control, page G-26 • 5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 180928 Processor Line TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX Monitor Line TX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B MON TX OSC RX MON RX OSC TX OSC COM RX P1 P2 P4 P5 COM TX LINE TX APR signal LINE RX in RX P Physical photodiode P3 OSC add OSC drop 159519 5-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-17-C Card • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.7.2.1 OPT-AMP-17-C card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 monitor power for the OPT-AMP-17-C card. Table 5-9 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. The power on the OSC-TX and COM-TX ports are calculated by adding the insertion loss (IL) to the power reported from P3 and P4. The OSC power on the LINE TX is calculated by adding the IL to the power reported from P5. The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.7.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-17-C Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-17-C card: • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control Table 5-9 OPT-AMP-17-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Power PM Parameter P1 Input COM COM RX Channel Power Supported P2 Output Line (Total Output) LINE TX Channel Power Supported Output Line (Signal Output) P3 Input Line LINE RX Channel Power Supported P4 Input Line LINE RX OSC Power Supported P5 Input OSC OSC RX OSC Power Supported 5-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.8 OPT-AMP-C Card Note For OPT-AMP-C card specifications, see the OPT-AMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-AMP-C card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-AMP-C card is a 20-dB output power, C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifier/preamplifier. It contains mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). To control gain tilt, a VOA is used. The VOA can also be used to attenuate the signal to the DCU to a reference value. The amplifier module also includes the OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters. The OPT-AMP-C card supports 80 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-AMP-C card installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-AMP-C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Slots 2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a preamplifier, and slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-AMP-C card as a booster amplifier. The card’s features include: • Fast transient suppression • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Mid-stage access for DCU • Constant pump current mode (test mode) • Fixed output power mode (mode used during provisioning) • Constant gain mode • ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes • Programmable tilt • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Gain range with gain tilt control of 12 to 24 dB • Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 24 to 35 dB • Full monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds • OSRI • ALS 5-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card 5.8.1 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The OPT-AMP-C amplifier card has 10 optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • DC RX is the input DCU port. • DC TX is the output DCU port. • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • LINE TX is the output signal port. 5-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card Figure 5-16 shows the OPT-AMP-C amplifier card faceplate. Figure 5-16 OPT-AMP-C Card Faceplate Figure 5-17 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-AMP-C card features. OPT -AMP -C FAIL ACT SF RX MON TX RX COM TX RX OSC TX RX DC TX RX LINE TX 274510 5-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-AMP-C Card Figure 5-17 OPT-AMP-C Block Diagram Figure 5-18 shows how the OPT-AMP-C optical module functions. Figure 5-18 OPT-AMP-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 240356 Processor COM TX COM RX Line TX OSC TX Monitor Line TX DCU TX DCU RX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B MON TX OSC RX OSC TX COM RX COM TX MON RX LINE TX LINE RX P1 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator P2 P3 P6 P4 DC TX DC RX External Mid-Stage Loss OSC Add OSC Drop P7 P5 Transmit Section Receive Section 145256 5-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards 5.8.2 OPT-AMP-C Card Functions The functions of the OPT-AMP-C card are: • 5.6.2.1 OPT-AMP-L and OPT-AMP-C cards Power Monitoring • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.8.3 Related Procedures for OPT-AMP-C Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-AMP-C card: • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.9 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE specifications, see the OPT-RAMP-C Amplifier Card Specifications and OPT-RAMP-CE Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-RAMP-C card is a double-slot card that improves unregenerated sections in long spans using the span fiber to amplify the optical signal. Different wavelengths in C-band receive different gain values. To achieve Raman amplification, two Raman signals (that do not carry any payload or overhead) 5-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards are required to be transmitted on the optical fiber because the gain generated by one signal is not flat. The energy of these Raman signals transfer to the higher region of the spectrum thereby amplifying the signals transmitted at higher wavelengths. The Raman effect reduces span loss but does not compensate it completely. When the Raman optical powers are set correctly, a gain profile with limited ripple is achieved. The wavelengths of the Raman signals are not in the C-band of the spectrum (used by MSTP for payload signals). The two Raman wavelengths are fixed and always the same. Due to a limited Raman gain, an EDFA amplifier is embedded into the card to generate a higher total gain. An embedded EDFA gain block provides a first amplification stage, while the mid stage access (MSA) is used for DCU loss compensation. The OPT-RAMP-CE card is a 20 dBm output power, gain-enhanced version of the OPT-RAMP-C card and is optimized for short spans. The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards can support up to 80 optical transmission channels at 50-GHz channel spacing over the C-band of the optical spectrum (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm). To provide a counter-propagating Raman pump into the transmission fiber, the Raman amplifier provides up to 500 mW at the LINE-RX connector. The OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16, and supports all network configurations. However, the OPT-RAMP-C or OPT-RAMP-CE card must be equipped on both endpoints of a span. The Raman total power and Raman ratio can be configured using CTC. The Raman configuration can be viewed on the Maintenance > Installation tab. The features of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card include: • Raman pump with embedded EDFA gain block • Raman section: 500 mW total pump power for two pump wavelengths • EDFA section: – OPT-RAMP-C: 16 dB gain and 17 dB output power – OPT-RAMP-CE: 11 dB gain and 20 dB output power • Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) for Raman plus EDFA ripple compensation • MSA for DC units • VOA for DC input power control • Full monitoring of pump, OSC, and signal power • Fast gain control for transient suppression • Low-FIT (hardware-managed) optical laser safety • Hardware output signals for LOS monitoring at input photodiodes • Optical service channel add and drop filters • Raman pump back-reflection detector 5.9.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards have ten optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the output monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port (receive section). • COM TX is the output signal port. 5-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards • DC RX is the input DCU port. • DC TX is the output DCU port. • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • LINE TX is the output signal port. Figure 5-19 shows the OPT-RAMP-C card faceplate. Figure 5-19 OPT-RAMP-C Faceplate The OPT-RAMP-CE card faceplate is the same as that of the OPT-RAMP-C card. Figure 5-20 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card features. 270710 LINE OSC DC COM MOM RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX FAIL ACT DF OPT-RAMP-C 5-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Figure 5-20 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Block Diagram Figure 5-21 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card functions. Figure 5-21 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functional Block Diagram Optical module Line RX Monitor Line RX 240356 Processor COM TX COM RX Line TX OSC TX Monitor Line TX DCU TX DCU RX OSC RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 270709 OSC-TX W to E section E to W section Line-TX Line-RX COM-RX COM-TX OSC Drop OSC Add Pump 1 Pump 2 PD 8 PD 9 PD 11 PD 10 PD 12 PD 7 PD 5 PD 6 PD 1 PD 2 PD 3 PD 4 Pump Drop Pump Add PD Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator 5-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Two Raman pump lasers are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-RX port, thereby counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. An EDFA gain block provides further amplification of the DWDM signal, which allows regulated output power entry in the mid stage access and acts upon the VOA attenuation. While the optical filters are present for the OSC add and drop functions, the OSC signal counter-propagates with the DWDM signal. Two monitor ports, MON-RX and MON-TX, are provided at the EDFA input and output stages and are used to evaluate the total gain ripple. A total of 12 photodiodes (PDs) are provided, allowing full monitoring of RP power, DWDM power, and OSC power in each section of the device. In particular, PD12 allows the detection of the remnant Raman pump power at the end of the counter-pumped span, while PD11 detects the amount of Raman pump power back scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. The EDFA section calculates the signal power, considering the expected ASE power contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop. The ASE power is derived according to the working EDFA gain. PD2, PD3, and PD4 provide the total power measured by the photodiode and the signal power is derived by calculating the total power value. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical attenuation of the two monitor ports are stored into the card’s not-volatile memory. 5.9.2 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Card Functions The functions of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE card are: • 5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring, page 5-38 • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.9.2.1 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD12 monitor the power for the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards (see Table 5-10). Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port PD1 EDFA DWDM Input Power LINE-RX PD2 EDFA Output Power (pre-VOA attenuation) DC-TX (port with 0 dB VOA attenuation) PD3 DCU Input Power DC-TX PD4 DCU Output Power DC-RX PD5 DWDM Input Power COM-RX PD6 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX PD7 OSC DROP Output Power OSC-TX PD8 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX PD9 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX PD10 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX 5-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 5.9.3 Related Procedures for OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE cards: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.10 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards (Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For hardware specifications, see the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Specifications section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. PD11 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX PD12 Remnant Pump Power LINE-TX Table 5-10 OPT-RAMP-C and OPT-RAMP-CE Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port 5-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards The 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards are supported on Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Release 9.4.01 and later releases only. These cards do not operate on systems running earlier versions. After installing Release 9.4.01 software, reinstall the 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP and 15454-M-RAMAN-COP cards. The single-slot RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards support counter and co-propagating Raman amplification on very long unregenerated spans. The cards manage up to 96 ITU-T 50-GHz spaced channels over the C-band of the optical spectrum (wavelengths from 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm). The counter-propagating RAMAN-CTP card is the master unit. The co-propagating RAMAN-COP card is the slave unit and can be used only when the counter-propagating unit is present. The RAMAN-CTP card and the RAMAN-COP card must be installed in adjacent slots (Slots 2 and 3, 4 and 5, or 6 and 7) in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis and Slots 2 and 3 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. However, these adjacent slots must not be used to install two RAMAN-CTP or two RAMAN-COP cards. The RAMAN-CTP card is provided with three E-2000 PS PC connectors for the LINE-TX, LINE-RX, and RAMAN-COP-RX ports and three LC-UPC-II connectors for the COM-TX, COM-RX, and MON-TX ports. The RAMAN-COP card is provided with one E-2000 PS PC connector. The E2000 PS PC patchcord is used to connect the RAMAN-COP card to the RAMAN-COP-RX port on the RAMAN-CTP card. Note The RAMAN-CTP card is shipped with two E-2000 PS PC to F-3000s SM PC patchcords and the RAMAN-COP card is shipped with one E-2000 PS PC to E-2000 PS PC patchcord. The F-3000s SM PC connector is mechanically and optically compatible with the LC PC connectors and the LC PC mating adapters. The standard connectors and the F-3000s SM PC connectors can be used for optical power of 250 mW and higher, if the connectors are absolutely clean. The features of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards include: • Raman section: 1000 mW total pump power for four pumps and two wavelengths • Embedded distributed feedback (DFB) laser at 1568.77 nm to be used for optical safety and link continuity (in RAMAN-CTP card only) • Photodiodes to enable monitoring of Raman pump power • Photodiodes to enable monitoring of the DFB laser and signal power (in RAMAN-CTP card only) • Hardware managed automatic laser shutdown (ALS) for optical laser safety • Hardware output signals for loss of signal (LOS) monitoring at input photodiodes • Raman pump back reflection detector to check for excessive back reflection 5.10.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The RAMAN-CTP card has six optical ports located on the faceplate: – MON TX is the output monitor port – COM RX is the input signal port (receive section) – COM TX is the output signal port – RAMAN-COP RX is the Raman co-propagating input port – LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section) 5-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards – LINE TX is the output signal port Figure 5-22 shows the RAMAN-CTP card faceplate. Figure 5-22 RAMAN-CTP Faceplate The RAMAN-COP card has only one optical port located on the faceplate. RAMAN-TX is the Raman co-propagating output port. Figure 5-23 shows the RAMAN-COP card faceplate. Figure 5-23 RAMAN-COP Faceplate Figure 5-24 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-CTP card functions. 246593 HAZARD LEVEL 1M SKIN EXPOSURE NEAR APERTURE MAY CAUSE BURNS RX MON COM RAMAN COP RX LINE TX LINE RX TX TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 FAIL ACT SF RAMAN-CTP 246594 HAZARD LEVEL 1M RAMAN TX SKIN EXPOSURE NEAR APERTURE MAY CAUSE BURNS COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 FAIL ACT SF RAMAN-COP 5-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Figure 5-24 RAMAN-CTP Functional Block Diagram Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-RX port, thereby counter-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two pump lasers at the same nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally polarized by the polarization beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled, resulting in a depolarized beam. A DFB laser at 1568.77 nm is used for optical safety. Optical filters for DFB add and drop are present. The DFB signal generated by the DFB laser is transmitted in-fiber, co-propagating with the DWDM signal. A MON-TX port monitors the DWDM signal at the COM-TX port. A total of ten photodiodes are provided, allowing monitoring of Raman pump (RP) power, DWDM signal power, and DFB signal power in each section of the card. In particular, P8 measures the co-propagating Raman pump power in-fiber (when the RAMAN-COP unit is present), while P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power back scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. P1 measures the DFB signal power transmitted in-fiber while P9 and P10 measure the DFB signal and ASE power respectively, which is received from the other line site. The insertion loss of the main optical path and the relative optical attenuation of the monitor port is stored in non-volatile memory of the card. Figure 5-25 shows a block diagram of how the RAMAN-COP card functions. 246596 MON-TX LINE-RX COM-TX P8 P7 P1 P5 P6 P3 P4 P2 P1+ P2 P1 P2 PBC PBC PUMP COUNTER ADD LINE-TX COM-RX RAMAN-COP-RX DFB P9 P10 VOA_DFB DFB and ASE DROP PUMP CO ADD DFB ADD PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4 P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator 5-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Figure 5-25 15454-M-RAMAN-COP Functional Block Diagram Four Raman pump lasers (two for each wavelength) are combined internally and launched in-fiber at the LINE-TX port of the counter-propagating unit, thereby co-propagating with the DWDM signal. The two pump lasers at the same nominal central wavelength, power, and polarization are made orthogonally polarized by the polarization beam combiner (that rotates one of the laser beams) and then coupled, resulting in a depolarized beam. A total of four photodiodes are provided, allowing the monitoring of RP power. In particular, P6 detects the amount of Raman pump power back scattered by the LINE-RX connector and transmission fiber. 5.10.2 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 monitor the power for the RAMAN-CTP card (see Table 5-11). 246595 RAMAN-TX P1+ P5 P6 P3 P4 P2 P1 P2 VOA1 PBC PUMP1 PUMP2 PUMP3 PUMP4 VOA2 PBC P Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 DFB in-fiber Output Power LINE-TX P2 DWDM RX Input Power LINE-RX P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-RX 5-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Physical photodiodes P3 through P6 monitor the power for the RAMAN-COP card (see Table 5-12). The PM parameters for the power values are listed in the Optics and 8b10b PM Parameter Definitions document. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.4. 5.10.3 RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Card Functions The functions of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards are: • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 5.10.4 Related Procedures for RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP Cards Caution During a software upgrade, do not unplug the RAMAN-CTP or RAMAN-COP card fibers or connectors. The ends of unterminated fibers or connectors emit invisible laser radiation. The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the RAMAN-CTP and RAMAN-COP cards: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power LINE-RX P7 DWDM TX Input Power COM-RX P8 Total Co-Pump in-fiber Output Power LINE-TX P9 DFB Input Power LINE-RX P10 ASE Input Power LINE-RX Table 5-11 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port Table 5-12 RAMAN-CTP Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P3 Pump 1 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX P4 Pump 2 in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX P5 Total Pump in-fiber Output Power RAMAN-TX P6 Back-Reflected Pump Power RAMAN-TX 5-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G201 Configure the Raman Pump on an MSTP Link, page 15-4 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord, page 16-72 • DLP-G690 Configure the Raman Pump Using Manual Day-0 Installation • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards 5.11 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card specifications, see the OPT-EDFA-17 Amplifier Card Specifications and OPT-EDFA-24 Amplifier Card Specifications sections in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are C-band, DWDM EDFA amplifiers/preamplifiers with 20-dBm output powers. These cards do not contain mid-stage access loss for a Dispersion Compensation Unit (DCU). The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards provide a noise-figure optimized version of the EDFA amplifiers to cope with new modulation formats like PM-DQPSK, which do not need dispersion compensation. To control gain tilt, a VOA is used. The amplifier module also includes the OSC add (TX direction) and drop (RX direction) optical filters. The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards share the same hardware platform and firmware architecture but differ in their operative optical gain range, which is 17 dB and 24 dB respectively. The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are true variable gain amplifiers, offering an optimal equalization of the transmitted optical channels over a wide gain range. They support 96 channels at 50-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm wavelength range). When an ONS 15454 has an OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card installed, an OSCM card is needed to process the OSC. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Slots 2 to 6 and Slots 12 to 16 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards as a preamplifier. Slots 1 and 17 are the default slots for provisioning the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards as a booster amplifier. You can install the OPT-EDFA-17 or OPT-EDFA-24 card in Slots 2 and 3 in an ONS 15454 M2 chassis, and Slots 2 to 7 in an ONS 15454 M6 chassis. The main functionalities of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are: 5-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards • Amplification of the input signal at COM-RX port towards LINE-TX port through a true-variable gain EDFA block • Multiplexing the OSC to the LINE-TX port • Demultiplexing the OSC from LINE-RX port • Monitoring of the LINE input or output signal with 1% TAP splitters The features of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are: • Embedded Gain Flattening Filter • Constant pump current mode (test mode) • Constant output power mode • Constant gain mode • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • ASE compensation in Constant Gain and Constant Output Power modes • Fast transient suppression • Programmable tilt • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Gain range with gain tilt control of 5 to 17 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 12 to 24 dB (for OPT-EDFA-24 card) • Extended gain range (with uncontrolled tilt) of 17 to 20 dB (for OPT-EDFA-17 card) and 24 to 27 dB (for OPT-EDFA-24 card) • Optical Safety Remote Interlock (OSRI) • Automatic Alarm Shutdown (ALS) 5.11.1 Card Faceplate Ports and Block Diagrams The OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards have eight optical ports located on the faceplate: • MON RX is the input monitor port (receive section). • MON TX is the output monitor port. • COM RX is the input signal port. • COM TX is the output signal port (receive section). • LINE RX is the input signal port (receive section). • LINE TX is the output signal port. • OSC RX is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX is the OSC drop output port. 5-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Figure 5-26 shows the OPT-EDFA-17 card faceplate. Figure 5-26 OPT-EDFA-17 Card Faceplate The OPT-EDFA-24 card faceplate is similar to that of the OPT-EDFA-17 card. Figure 5-27 shows a simplified block diagram of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 card features. FAIL ACT SF COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 RX RX RX RX MON COM OSC LINE TX TX TX TX OPT-EDFA XX 246681 5-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Figure 5-27 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Block Diagram Figure 5-28 shows a block diagram of how the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 optical modules function. Figure 5-28 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Optical Modules Function 246683 SCL Bus TCCi M Line RX Optical module FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi P BAT A&B Monitor Line RX Line TX Monitor Line TX COM TX COM RX OSC TX OSC RX Processor DC/DC Power supply Input filters 246682 OSC-TX MON-RX P5 P6 P Physical photodiode LINE-RX COM-TX PASSIVE Section ACTIVE Section OSC 1% TAP DROP OSC-RX MON-TX P4 P3 P2 P1 LINE-TX COM-RX OSC 1% TAP ADD True Variable Gain EDFA 5-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards 5.11.2 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes PD1 through PD6 monitor the power for the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards (see Table 5-13). 5.11.3 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Functions The functions of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are: • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • G.4 Port-Level Indicators, page G-9 5.11.4 Related Procedures for OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards The list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 cards are: • NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File, page 14-47 • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G31 Install the DWDM Dispersion Compensating Units, page 14-68 • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G38 Provision OSC Terminations, page 14-126 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G76 Verify Optical Span Loss Using CTC • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • DLP-G140 View Power Statistics for Optical Amplifier, 40-SMR1-C, and 40-SMR2-C Cards • NTP-G77 Manage Automatic Power Control • NTP-G160 Modify OPT-AMP-L, OPT-AMP-17-C, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, OPT-RAMP-CE, 15454-M-RAMAN-CTP, 15454-M-RAMAN-COP, OPT-EDFA-17, and OPT-EDFA-24 Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-27 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards Table 5-13 OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 EDFA Input Power COM-RX P2 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX P3 EDFA Output Power LINE-TX P4 OSC ADD Input Power OSC-RX P5 OSC DROP Output Power LINE-RX P6 COM-TX Output Power LINE-RX 5-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 5 Provision Optical Amplifier Cards OPT-EDFA-17 and OPT-EDFA-24 Cards CH A P T E R 6-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards This chapter describes legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks and related procedures. For card safety and compliance information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 6.1 Card Overview, page 6-1 • 6.2 Safety Labels, page 6-9 • 6.3 32MUX-O Card, page 6-9 • 6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card, page 6-13 • 6.4 32DMX-O Card, page 6-14 • 6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card, page 6-18 • 6.5 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-19 • 6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card, page 6-23 Note For a description of the 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, 40-MUX-C, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, and 40-WXC-C cards, see the “Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards” chapter. 6.1 Card Overview The card overview section contains card summary, compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation plan information for legacy multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 6-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview 6.1.1 Card Summary Table 6-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards. 6.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 6-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for the legacy cards. Table 6-1 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information 32MUX-O The 32MUX-O has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “6.3 32MUX-O Card” section on page 6-9. 32DMX-O The 32DMX-O has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 6-14 4MD-xx.x The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “6.5 4MD-xx.x Card” section on page 6-19. Table 6-2 Software Compatibility for Legacy Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Release Cards 32MUX-O 32DMX-O 4MD-xx.x R4.5 Yes Yes Yes R4.6 Yes Yes Yes R4.7 Yes Yes Yes R5.0 Yes Yes Yes R6.0 Yes Yes Yes R7.0 Yes Yes Yes R7.2 Yes Yes Yes R8.0 Yes Yes Yes R8.5 Yes Yes Yes R9.0 Yes Yes Yes R9.1 Yes Yes Yes R9.2 Yes Yes Yes R9.2.1 Yes Yes Yes R9.3 Yes Yes Yes R9.4 Yes Yes Yes 6-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview 6.1.3 Interface Classes The 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, and 4MD-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 6-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output power of each interface class. Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Table 6-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) without FEC D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with E-FEC enabled 6-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 6-5 lists the optical performance parameters that provide signal input for the 40-Gbps multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Table 6-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Optimum Maximum BER2 2. BER = bit error rate 10–15 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. 40-Gbps multirate transponder/40-Gbps EC transponder (40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — OC-192 LR ITU — — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm 6-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 6-6 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to multiplexer and demultiplexer cards. Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10G) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10E) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 6-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameters (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No No No No Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –27 dBm –33 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm 6-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview 6.1.4 Channel Allocation Plan ONS 15454 DWDM multiplexer and demultiplexer cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. Table 6-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels. Note In some cases, a card uses only one of the bands (C band or L band) and some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU grid. See the specific card description or the “Hardware Specifications” document for more details. Transmitted Power Range1 TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –2.0 to 0 dBm TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –1000 to +3200 ps/nm 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 6-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 6-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 6-8 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the L-band channels. 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 6-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 6-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Card Overview Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 6-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards Safety Labels 6.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”. 6.3 32MUX-O Card Note For 32MUX-O card specifications, see the “32MUX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 32-Channel Multiplexer (32MUX-O) card multiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 32MUX-O card takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. 6.3.1 32MUX-O Card Functions The 32MUX-O functions include: • Arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) device that enables full multiplexing functions for the channels. • Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation prior to multiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. • Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation. • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 An additional optical monitoring port with 1:99 splitting ratio is available. 6.3.2 32MUX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 6-1 shows the 32MUX-O faceplate. 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 6-8 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (L Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 6-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card Figure 6-1 32MUX-O Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”. Figure 6-2 shows a block diagram of the 32MUX-O card. 54.1 - 60.6 46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6 32MUX-0 COM TX RX MON FAIL ACT SF 96468 6-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card Figure 6-2 32MUX-O Block Diagram The 32MUX-O card has four receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 32MUX-O card also has two LC-PC-II optical connectors, one for the main output and the other for the monitor port. Figure 6-3 shows the 32MUX-O optical module functional block diagram. Figure 6-3 32MUX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 6.3.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32MUX-O Cards The 32MUX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM TX is the line output. COM MON is the optical monitoring port. The xx.x to yy.y RX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y, according to the channel plan. Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS RX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS RX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS RX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS RX 134413 Processor MON COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98301 1 32 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator MON COM TX Inputs P32 P31 P30 P29 P4 P3 P2 P1 P 6-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card 6.3.3 Channel Plan The 32MUX-O is typically used in hub nodes and provides the multiplexing of 32 channels, spaced at 100 GHz, into one fiber before their amplification and transmission along the line. The channel plan is shown in Table 6-9. Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 1 30.3 195.9 1530.33 2 31.2 195.8 1531.12 3 31.9 195.7 1531.90 4 32.6 195.6 1532.68 5 34.2 195.4 1534.25 6 35.0 195.3 1535.04 7 35.8 195.2 1535.82 8 36.6 195.1 1536.61 9 38.1 194.9 1538.19 10 38.9 194.8 1538.98 11 39.7 194.7 1539.77 12 40.5 194.6 1540.56 13 42.1 194.4 1542.14 14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 15 43.7 194.2 1543.73 16 44.5 194.1 1544.53 17 46.1 193.9 1546.12 18 46.9 193.8 1546.92 19 47.7 193.7 1547.72 20 48.5 193.6 1548.51 21 50.1 193.4 1550.12 22 50.9 193.3 1550.92 23 51.7 193.2 1551.72 24 52.5 193.1 1552.52 25 54.1 192.9 1554.13 26 54.9 192.8 1554.94 27 55.7 192.7 1555.75 28 56.5 192.6 1556.55 29 58.1 192.4 1558.17 30 58.9 192.3 1558.98 6-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32MUX-O Card 6.3.4 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P32 monitor the power for the 32MUX-O card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-10. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. 6.3.5 Related Procedures for the 32MUX-O Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32MUX-O card: • “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53 • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64 • “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47 • “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78 • “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on page 14-82 • “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85 • “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90 • “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72 • “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113 • “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114 • “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections” • “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test” task on page 21-3 • “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71 • “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance” 31 59.7 192.2 1559.79 32 60.6 192.1 1560.61 1. The Channel Number column is only for reference purposes. The channel ID is consistent with the ONS 15454 and is used in card identification. Table 6-9 32MUX-O Channel Plan Channel Number1 Channel ID Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Table 6-10 32MUX-O Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD COM TX 6-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card • “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards” • “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54 • “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55 • “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57 • “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59 • “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62 • “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123 • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13 • “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14 • “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card” • “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51 • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27 6.4 32DMX-O Card Note For 32DMX-O card specifications, see the “32DMX-O Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX-O) card demultiplexes 32 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 32DMX-O takes up two slots in an ONS 15454 and can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. 6.4.1 32DMX-O Card Functions The 32DMX-O functions include: • AWG that enables channel demultiplexing functions. • Each single-channel port is equipped with VOAs for automatic optical power regulation after demultiplexing. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. • The 32DXM-O has four physical receive connectors that accept MPO cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. 6-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card Note In contrast, the single-slot 32DMX card does not have VOAs on each drop port for optical power regulation. The 32DMX optical demultiplexer module is used in conjunction with the 32WSS card in ONS 15454 Multiservice Transport Platform (MSTP) nodes. • Each single-channel port is monitored using a photodiode to enable automatic power regulation. • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 6.4.2 32DMX-O Card Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 6-4 shows the 32DMX-O card faceplate. 6-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card Figure 6-4 32DMX-O Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”. Figure 6-5 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-O card. 32DMX-0 FAIL ACT SF 46.1 - 52.5 38.1 - 44.5 30.3 - 36.6 TX 54.1 - 60.6 RX COM MON 145935 6-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card Figure 6-5 32DMX-O Block Diagram Figure 6-6 shows the 32DMX-O optical module functional block diagram. Figure 6-6 32DMX-O Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 6.4.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 32DMX-O Cards The 32DMX-O card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. MON is the output monitor port. COM RX is the line input. The xx.x to yy.y TX ports represent the four groups of eight channels ranging from wavelength xx.x to wavelength yy.y according to the channel plan. 6.4.3 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-O card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-11. Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS TX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS TX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS TX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS TX 96480 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 98302 1 32 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P32 P31 P30 P29 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P33 6-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 32DMX-O Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 6.4.4 Related Procedures for the 32DMX-O Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-O card: • “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53 • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64 • “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47 • “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78 • “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on page 14-82 • “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85 • “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90 • “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72 • “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113 • “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114 • “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections” • “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71 • “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test” task on page 21-3 • “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance” • “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards” • “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54 • “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55 • “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57 Table 6-11 32DMX-O Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX 6-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card • “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59 • “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62 • “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123 • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13 • “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14 • “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card” • “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51 • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27 6.5 4MD-xx.x Card Note For 4MD-xx.x card specifications, see the section “4MD-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 4-Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer (4MD-xx.x) card multiplexes and demultiplexes four 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan. The 4MD-xx.x card is designed to be used with band OADMs (both AD-1B-xx.x and AD-4B-xx.x). The card is bidirectional. The demultiplexer and multiplexer functions are implemented in two different sections of the same card. In this way, the same card can manage signals flowing in opposite directions. There are eight versions of this card that correspond with the eight sub-bands specified in Table 6-12 on page 6-22. The 4MD-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 6.5.1 4MD-xx.x Card Functions The 4MD-xx.x has the following functions implemented inside a plug-in optical module: • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel multiplex/demultiplex function. • Software-controlled VOAs at every port of the multiplex section regulate the optical power of each multiplexed channel. • Software-monitored photodiodes at the input and output multiplexer and demultiplexer ports for power control and safety purposes. • Software-monitored virtual photodiodes at the common DWDM output and input ports. A virtual photodiode is a firmware calculation of the optical power at that port. This calculation is based on the single channel photodiode reading and insertion losses of the appropriated paths. • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 6.5.2 4MD-xx.x Card Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 6-7 shows the 4MD-xx.x faceplate. 6-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card Figure 6-7 4MD-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1”. Figure 6-8 shows a block diagram of the 4MD-xx.x card. 4MD -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX COM TX 96470 6-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card Figure 6-8 4MD-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 6-9 shows the 4MD-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 6-9 4MD-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram The optical module shown in Figure 6-9 is optically passive and consists of a cascade of interferential filters that perform the channel multiplexing and demultiplexing functions. VOAs are present in every input path of the multiplex section in order to regulate the optical power of each multiplexed channel. Some optical input and output ports are monitored by means of photodiodes implemented both for power control and for safety purposes. An internal control manages VOA settings and functionality as well as photodiode detection and alarm thresholds. The power at the main output Optical Module Channel Inputs 96482 Processor COM TX COM RX Channel Outputs FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P DC/DC converter Power supply input filters BAT A&B 98303 Virtual photodiode COM TX COM RX Demux RX channels TX channels Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Control Control interface V1 V Mux P1 P2 P3 P3 P5 P6 P7 P8 P V2 6-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card and input ports is monitored through the use of virtual photodiodes. A virtual photodiode is implemented in the firmware of the plug-in module. This firmware calculates the power on a port, summing the measured values from all single channel ports (and applying the proper path insertion loss) and then providing the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card with the obtained value. 6.5.2.1 Port-Level Indicators for the 4MD-xx.x Cards The 4MD-xx.x card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. COM RX is the line input. COM TX is the line output. The 15xx.x TX ports represent demultiplexed channel outputs 1 to 4. The 15xx.x RX ports represent multiplexed channel inputs 1 to 4. 6.5.3 Wavelength Pairs Table 6-12 shows the band IDs and the add/drop channel IDs for the 4MD-xx.x card. 6.5.4 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P8 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the 4MD-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 6-13. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. Table 6-12 4MD-xx.x Channel Sets Band ID Add/Drop Channel IDs Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2, 31.9, 32.6 Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0, 35.8, 36.6 Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9, 39.7, 40.5 Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9, 43.7, 44.5 Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9, 47.7, 48.5 Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9, 51.7, 52.5 Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9, 55.7, 56.5 Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9, 59.7, 60.6 Table 6-13 4MD-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX V1 OUT COM COM TX V2 IN COM COM RX 6-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card 6.5.5 Related Procedures for the 4MD-xx.x Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 4MD-xx.x card: • “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53 • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” task on page 14-64 • “NTP-G143 Import the Cisco Transport Planner NE Update Configuration File” task on page 14-47 • “NTP-G48 Perform the OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 21-94 • “DLP-G89 Verify OADM Node Pass-Through Channel Connections” task on page 21-99 • “DLP-G92 Verify 4MD-xx.x Pass-Through Connection Power” task on page 21-100 • “DLP-G93 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSCM Cards” task on page 21-104 • “NTP-G49 Perform the Active OADM Node Acceptance Test on a Symmetric Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-106 • “DLP-G94 Verify Add and Drop Connections on an OADM Node with OSC-CSM Cards” task on page 21-110 • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-40 • “DLP-G105 Provision Optical Channel Network Connections” task on page 16-41 • “NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs” task on page 14-78 • “NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes” task on page 14-82 • “DLP-G315 Install Fiber-Optic Cables From the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Standard Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-85 • “DLP-G356 Install Fiber-Optic Cables from the 32WSS/32DMX and 32MUX-O/32DMX-O Cards to the Deep Patch Panel Tray” task on page 14-90 • “NTP-G184 Create a Provisionable Patchcord” task on page 16-72 • “NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords” task on page 14-113 • “NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually” task on page 14-114 • “NTP-G41 Perform the Terminal or Hub Node with 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O Cards Acceptance Test” task on page 21-3 • “NTP-G44 Perform the Anti-ASE Hub Node Acceptance Test” task on page 21-71 • “NTP-G86 Convert a Pass-Through Connection to Add/Drop Connections” • “NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance” • “DLP-G78 Verify the 32MUX-O or 40-MUX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G269 Verify the 32DMX-O or 40-DMX-C Card Power” task on page 21-7 • “DLP-G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards” • “NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds” task on page 20-54 6-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 6 Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards 4MD-xx.x Card • “DLP-G414 Change Optical Line Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-55 • “DLP-G415 Change Optical Line Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-57 • “DLP-G416 Change Optical Channel Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-59 • “DLP-G417 Change Optical Channel Threshold Settings for 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, or 4MD-xx.x Cards” task on page 20-62 • “DLP-G355 Delete an Internal Patchcord” task on page 14-123 • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-13 • “DLP-G251 Reset DWDM Cards Using CTC” task on page 24-14 • “NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Card” • “DLP-G351 Delete a Card in CTC” task on page 14-51 • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” task on page 24-27 CH A P T E R 7-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units This chapter explains the Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units (T-DCU) used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. The T-DCU unit compensates for chromatic dispersion (CD) of the transmission fiber. The T-DCU provides two line cards with varied set of tunable wavelengths to compensate for CD. This chapter includes: • 7.1 Card Overview, page 7-1 • 7.2 Safety Labels, page 7-2 • 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-2 • 7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance, page 7-5 • 7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards, page 7-6 7.1 Card Overview The T-DCU card provides a selectable set of discrete negative chromatic dispersion values to compensate for chromatic dispersion of the transmission line. The card operates over the entire C-band (in the range of 1529.0 nm to 1562.5 nm) and monitors the optical power at the input and the output ports. The two types of T-DCU line cards are: • TDC-CC (Coarse T-DCU) • TDC-FC (Fine T-DCU) Note Each T-DCU card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. Cards should be installed in slots that have the same symbols. See the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 7-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Safety Labels 7.1.1 Card Summary Table 7-1 lists and summarizes the information about the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards. 7.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards The TDC-CC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -1650 ps/nm with a granularity of 110 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum. The TDC-FC card provides 16 values of CD ranging from 0 to -675 ps/nm with a granularity of 45 ps/nm in the C-band spectrum. You can configure the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards for the CD value listed in Table 7-2. Table 7-1 T-DCU Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information TDC-CC The TDC-CC has one set of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1 to 6 and slots 12 to 17. See the 7.3 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards section. TDC-FC The TDC-FC has one set of optical ports located on the faceplate. It operates in slots 1 to 6 and slots 12 to 17. Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm] 0 0 1 02 1 -110 -45 2 -220 -90 3 -330 -135 4 -440 -180 5 -550 -225 6 -660 -270 7 -770 -315 8 -880 -360 9 -990 -405 10 -1100 -450 11 -1210 -495 12 -1320 -540 7-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards 7.3.1 Key Features The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards provide the following features: • Single slot card with three LEDs on the front panel. • Two LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. • Operates in slots from slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. • Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) of the optical spectrum. • Allows upto 16 provisionable CD values for chromatic dispersion compensation. • Connects to OPT-PRE, OPT-AMP-C, OPT-RAMP-C, and OPT-RAMP-CE amplifiers and 40-SMR-1 and 40-SMR-2 cards. • Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling for selectable thresholds. • Allows monitoring and provisioning using CTC, SNMP, or TL1. 7.3.2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplate Diagram Figure 7-1 shows the TDC-CC and TDC-FC faceplate diagram. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards can be installed or pulled out of operation from any user interface slot, without impacting other service cards operating within that shelf. 13 -1430 -585 14 -1540 -630 15 -1650 -675 1. The default value of the TDC-CC CD value for Coarse Unit is 0. 2. The default value of the TDC-FC value for Fine Unit is 0. Table 7-2 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Tunable CD Value Unit Configuration TDC-CC [ps/nm] TDC-FC [ps/nm] 7-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Figure 7-1 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Faceplates Note The coarse T-DCU is identified with the card label as TDC-CC and the fine T-DCU with TDC-FC in the faceplate of the T-DCU card. 7.3.3 Functioning of Optical Ports The T-DCU unit contains the DC-RX (input) and DC-TX (output) ports. The optical signal enters the DC-RX port, compensates the chromatic dispersion and then exits from the DC-TX port. TDC-CC FAIL ACT SF DC RX TX TDC-FC FAIL ACT SF DC RX TX Any of the 12 general purpose slots 276444 7-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Monitoring Optical Performance 7.3.4 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Block Diagram The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards embed an optical module with four spools (D1, D2, D3, and D4) of dispersion compensating fiber that connects through the 2x2 bypass switches (Figure 7-2). Each bypass switch allows the corresponding dispersion compensation fiber spools to connect to the optical path from the DC-RX (input port) to the DC-TX (output port). The switch configuration selects the requested CD value and combines the four spools based on the 16 chromatic dispersion compensation values fetched. The photo diodes PD1 and PD2 are used to monitor the input and output ports respectively. Figure 7-2 Block Diagram of TDC-CC and TDC-FC 7.3.5 TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards Functions The functions of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards are: • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 7.4 Monitoring Optical Performance The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards monitor the optical input power and optical output power of the fiber. It monitors the insertion loss from the input (DC-RX) to the output (DC-TX) port, with the help of the two photodiodes PD1 and PD2. The TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards report the minimum, average, and maximum power statistics of each of the monitored ports or channels in the specific card. To view the optical power statistics of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards, refer to the Monitor Performance document. The performance data is recorded at 15 minutes and 24 hours intervals. Note You can view the performance monitoring (PM) data of the card using CTC, SNMP, and TL1 interfaces. Note The PM data is stored on a wrap-around basis at 32 x 15 min. and 2 x 24 hour intervals. 276445 2x2 Switch D1 2x2 Switch D2 2x2 Switch D3 2x2 Switch D4 S1 S2 S3 S4 DC-RX DC-TX PD1 PD2 7-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 7 Setup Tunable Dispersion Compensating Units Monitoring Optical Performance 7.4.1 Related Procedures for TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • DLP-G525 View Optical Power Statistics for TDC-CC and TDC-FC cards • NTP-G240 Modify TDC-CC and TDC-FC Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-76 • NTP-G242 Modify the CD setting of TDC-CC and TDC-FC Cards • NTP-G119 Power Down the Node, page 24-27 CH A P T E R 8-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 8 Provision Protection Switching Module This chapter describes the Protection Switching Module (PSM) card used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 8.1 PSM Card Overview • 8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card, page 8-5 8.1 PSM Card Overview The PSM card performs splitter protection functions. In the transmit (TX) section of the PSM card (see Figure 8-1), the signal received on the common receive port is duplicated by a hardware splitter to both the working and protect transmit ports. In the receive (RX) section of the PSM card (Figure 8-1), a switch is provided to select one of the two input signals (on working and protect receive ports) to be transmitted through the common transmit port. The PSM card supports multiple protection configurations: • Channel protection—The PSM COM ports are connected to the TXP/MXP trunk ports. • Line (or path) protection—The PSM working (W) and protect (P) ports are connected directly to the external line. • Multiplex section protection—The PSM is equipped between the MUX/DMX stage and the amplification stage. • Standalone—The PSM can be equipped in any slot and supports all node configurations. The PSM card is a single-slot card that can be installed in any node from Slot 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The PSM card includes six LC-PC-II optical connectors on the front panel. In channel protection configuration, the PSM card can be installed in a different shelf from its peer TXP/MXP card. 8-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module PSM Card Overview Note It is strongly recommended that you use the default layouts designed by Cisco Transport Planner, which place the PSM card and its peer TXP/MXP card as close as possible to simplify cable management. For more information on the node configurations supported for the PSM card, see the 12.3 Supported Node Configurations for PSM Card, page 12-46. For more information on the network topologies supported for the PSM card, see the 13.6 Network Topologies for the PSM Card, page 13-19. 8.1.1 Key Features The PSM card provides the following features: • Operates over the C-band (wavelengths from 1529 nm to 1562.5 nm) and L-band (wavelengths from 1570.5 nm to 1604 nm) of the optical spectrum. • Implements bidirectional non-revertive protection scheme. For more details on bidirectional switching, see the “8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching” section on page 8-4. • Supports automatic creation of splitter protection group when the PSM card is provisioned. • Supports switching priorities based on ITU-T G.873.1. • Supports performance monitoring and alarm handling with settable thresholds. • Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS), a safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. ALS is applicable only in line protection configuration. For information about using the card to implement ALS in a network, see the 13.11 Network Optical Safety, page 13-30. 8.1.2 PSM Block Diagram Figure 8-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the PSM card. 8-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module PSM Card Overview Figure 8-1 PSM Block Diagram 8.1.3 PSM Faceplate Ports The PSM card has six optical ports located on the faceplate: • COM-RX (receive) is the input signal port. • COM-TX (transmit) is the output signal port. • W-RX is the working input signal port (receive section). • W-TX is the working output signal port (transmit section). • P-RX is the protect input signal port (receive section). • P-TX is the protect output signal port (transmit section). All ports are equipped with photodiodes to monitor optical power and other related thresholds. The COM-RX port is equipped with a virtual photodiode (firmware calculations of port optical power) to monitor optical power. The W-RX, P-RX, W-TX, and P-TX ports have optical power regulation, which are provided by variable optical attenuators (VOA). All VOAs equipped within the PSM card work in control attenuation mode. Figure 8-2 shows the PSM card faceplate. 270910 TX Section RX Section COM-RX W-TX P-TX W-RX P-RX COM-TX PD5 VOA3 1x2 Switch 50/50 Splitter PD2 PD4 PD3 VOA1 PD1 VOA2 Virtual PD 8-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module PSM Card Overview Figure 8-2 PSM Card Faceplate 8.1.4 PSM Card-Level Indicators Table G-1 describes the card-level indicators on the card. 8.1.5 PSM Bidirectional Switching A VOA is equipped after the hardware splitter within the PSM card. The VOA implements bidirectional switching when there is a single fiber cut in a protection configuration involving two peer PSM cards. Figure 8-3 shows a sample configuration that explains the bidirectional switching capability of the PSM card. 270911 PSM FAIL ACT SF COM P RX TX RX TX RX TX W 1345567 Any of the 12 general purpose slots 8-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module PSM Card Overview Figure 8-3 PSM Bidirectional Switching In this example, there is a fiber cut in the working path from Station A to Station B as shown in Figure 8-3. As a result of the fiber cut, an LOS alarm is raised on the W-RX port of Station B and it immediately switches traffic on to its P-RX port. Station B simultaneously also stops transmission (for approximately 25 milliseconds) on its W-TX port, which raises an LOS alarm on the W-RX port of Station A. This causes Station A to also switch traffic to its P-RX port. In this way, PSM implements bidirectional switching without any data exchange between the two stations. Since the two stations do not communicate using signaling protocols (overhead bytes), a Manual or Force protection switch on the PSM card is implemented by creating a traffic hit. For example, consider that you perform a Manual or Force protection switch on Station A. The TX VOA on the active path is set to automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) state for 25 milliseconds. This causes Station B to switch traffic to the other path because it cannot differentiate between a maintenance operation and a real fail. After 25 milliseconds, the VOA in Station A is automatically reset. However, Station B will not revert back by itself because of nonrevertive switching protection scheme used in the PSM card. To effectively implement switching, the Lockout and Force commands must be performed on both the stations. If these commands are not performed on both the stations, the far-end and near-end PSMs can be misaligned. In case of misalignment, when a path recovers, traffic might not recover automatically. You might have to perform a Force protection switch to recover traffic. Note The order in which you repair the paths is important in the event of a double failure (both the working and protect paths are down due to a fiber cut) on the PSM card in line protection configuration when the active path is the working path. If you repair the working path first, traffic is automatically restored. However, if you repair the protect path first, traffic is not automatically restored. You must perform a Force protection switch to restore traffic on the protect path. 8.1.6 Related Procedures for PSM Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the PSM card: • NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards, page 14-64 • NTP-G202 Modify PSM Card Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-47 • NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114 270915 TX Section RX Section COM-RX W-TX P-TX W-RX P-RX W-RX P-RX W-TX P-TX COM-TX PD5 RX Section TX Section COM-TX COM-RX PD3 PD4 PD2 PD1 A B PD3 PD4 PD2 PD1 PD5 8-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 8 Provision Protection Switching Module PSM Card Overview • DLP-G493 Provision Protected Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-44 • DLP-G479 View Optical Power Statistics for the PSM Card • DLP-G176 Modify a Splitter Protection Group • DLP-G459 Delete a Splitter Protection Group CH A P T E R 9-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards This chapter describes optical add/drop cards used in Cisco ONS 15454 dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 9.1 Card Overview, page 9-1 • 9.2 Safety Labels, page 9-9 • 9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card, page 9-9 • 9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card • 9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card, page 9-12 • 9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card • 9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card, page 9-16 • 9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card • 9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card, page 9-20 • 9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card • 9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card, page 9-23 • 9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card 9.1 Card Overview The card overview section contains card overview, software compatibility, interface class, and channel allocation information for optical add/drop cards. 9-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. Optical add/drop cards are divided into two groups: band optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) cards and channel OADM cards. Band OADM cards add and drop one or four bands of adjacent channels. The cards in this chapter, including the 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) and the 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) are utilized only in the C band. Channel OADM cards add and drop one, two, or four adjacent channels; they include the 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x), the 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x), and the 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.x). Note For information about L band add and drop capability, see Chapter 10, “Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards.” 9.1.1 Card Summary Table 9-1 lists and summarizes the functions of the optical add/drop cards. Table 9-1 Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information AD-1C-xx.x The AD-1C-xx.x card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card” section on page 9-9. AD-2C-xx.x The AD-2C-xx.x card has four sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card” section on page 9-12. AD-4C-xx.x The AD-4C-xx.x card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card” section on page 9-16. AD-1B-xx.x The AD-1B-xx.x card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card” section on page 9-20. AD-4B-xx.x The AD-4B-xx.x card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card” section on page 9-23. 9-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 9-2 lists the CTC software compatibility for each optical add/drop card. Table 9-2 Software Release Compatibility for Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 AD-1C -xx.x 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM AD-2C -xx.x 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM AD-4C -xx.x 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM AD-1B -xx.x 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM AD-4B -xx.x 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 9-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.3 Interface Classes The AD-1C-xx.x, AD-2C-xx.x, AD-4C-xx.x, AD-1B-xx.x, and AD-4B-xx.x cards have different input and output optical channel signals depending on the interface card where the input signal originates from. The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 9-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performances and output power of each interface class. Table 9-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards. Table 9-3 ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with FEC enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) without FEC and the 10-Gbps muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L), 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C), and ADM-10G cards with FEC disabled C OC-192 LR ITU cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) without FEC D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz DWDM muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC disabled and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L, 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) and the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards with E-FEC enabled 9-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 9-5 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards. Table 9-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 40 Gbps 40 Gbps 40 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Optimum Maximum BER2 2. BER = bit error rate 10–15 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. 40-Gbps multirate transponder/40-Gbps FEC transponder (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — OC-192 LR ITU — — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 8 dB 9-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 2.5-Gbps cards that provide signal input to the optical add/drop cards have the interface performance parameters listed in Table 9-6. Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10G) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder (TXP_MR_10E) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 9-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No No No No Threshold Average Average Average Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 6 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 12 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –27 dBm –33 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm –7 dBm –17dBm 9-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 9.1.4 DWDM Card Channel Allocation Plan ONS 15454 DWDM channel OADM and band OADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. Table 9-7 lists the channel IDs and wavelengths assigned to the C-band DWDM channels. Note In some cases, a card uses only some or all of the channels listed in a band. Also, some cards use channels on the 100-GHz ITU-T grid while others use channels on the 50-GHz ITU-T grid. See specific card descriptions in Appendix B, “Hardware Specifications,” for more details. Transmitted Power Range1 TXP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –2.0 to 0 dBm — — TXPP_MR_2.5G –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm –4.5 to –2.5 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — MXPP_MR_2.5G — –1.5 to +0.5 dBm — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) — — — — +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –1000 to +3200 ps/nm 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 9-6 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Class G Class H Class J Type Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Power Limited Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 9-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 9-7 DWDM Channel Allocation Plan (C Band) (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 9-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards Safety Labels 9.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. 9.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Note For AD-1C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 1-Channel OADM (AD-1C-xx.fx) card passively adds or drops one of the 32 channels utilized within the 100-GHz-spacing of the DWDM card system. Thirty-two versions of this card—each designed only for use with one wavelength—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. Each wavelength version of the card has a different part number. The AD-1C-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The AD-1C-xx.x has the following internal features: • Two cascaded passive optical interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • One software-controlled variable optical attenuator (VOA) regulates the optical power of the inserted channel. • Software-controlled VOA regulates the insertion loss of the express optical path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds, are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculations of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports are monitored within the software. 9.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams Figure 9-1 shows the AD-1C-xx.x faceplate. 9-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1C-xx.x Card Figure 9-1 AD-1C-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9. Figure 9-2 shows a block diagram of the AD-1C-xx.x card. AD-1C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 96473 9-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1C-xx.x Card Figure 9-2 AD-1C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 9-3 shows the AD-1C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-3 AD-1C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.3.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-1C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-8. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124074 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx 98304 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Channel 15xx.xx Physical photodiode RX Variable optical attenuator V1 P COM TX P1 P3 P5 P4 V2 P2 V Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 ADD DROP RX P2 DROP DROP TX 9-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 9.3.3 AD-1C-xx.x Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 9.3.4 Related Procedures for AD-1C-xx.x Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1C-xx.x card: • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64 • “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on page 16-40 • “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2 • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27 9.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Note For AD-2C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-2C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in theHardware Specifications document. The 2-Channel OADM (AD-2C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops two adjacent 100-GHz channels within the same band. Sixteen versions of this card—each designed for use with one pair of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. Each version of the card has a different part number. The AD-2C-xx.x has the following features: • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. P3 IN EXP EXP RX P4 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX Table 9-8 AD-1C-xx.x Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port 9-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card • Two software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power of inserted channels. • Software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express channels. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports are monitored within the software. 9.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams Figure 9-4 shows the AD-2C-xx.x faceplate. Figure 9-4 AD-2C-xx.x Faceplate AD-2C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 96474 9-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9. Figure 9-5 shows a block diagram of the AD-2C-xx.x card. Figure 9-5 AD-2C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 9-6 shows the AD-2C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-6 AD-2C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.4.2 Wavelength Pairs The AD-2C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the wavelength pairs listed in Table 9-9. In this table, channel IDs are given rather than wavelengths. To compare channel IDs with the actual wavelengths they represent, see wavelengths in Table 9-7 on page 9-7. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 98305 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply input filters BAT A&B Add RX Drop TX Add RX Drop TX CH 1 CH 2 98306 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Second channel TX RX RX Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 V2 COM TX First channel P1 P P3 P4 P2 P5 P7 P6 9-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-2C-xx.x Card 9.4.3 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-2C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-10. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 9.4.4 AD-2C-xx.x Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 Table 9-9 AD-2C-xx.x Channel Pairs Band ID Add/Drop Channel ID Band 30.3 (A) 30.3, 31.2 31.9, 32.6 Band 34.2 (B) 34.2, 35.0 35.8, 36.6 Band 38.1 (C) 38.1, 38.9 39.7, 40.5 Band 42.1 (D) 42.1, 42.9 43.7, 44.5 Band 46.1 (E) 46.1, 46.9 47.7, 48.5 Band 50.1 (F) 50.1, 50.9 51.7, 52.5 Band 54.1 (G) 54.1, 54.9 55.7, 56.5 Band 58.1 (H) 58.1, 58.9 59.7, 60.6 Table 9-10 AD-2C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P2 ADD COM TX P3–P4 DROP DROP TX P5 IN EXP EXP RX P6 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX 9-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 9.4.5 Related Procedures for AD-2C-xx.x Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-2C-xx.x card: • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64 • “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on page 16-40 • “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2 • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27 9.5 AD-4C-xx.x Card Note For AD-4C-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-4C-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 4-Channel OADM (AD-4C-xx.x) card passively adds or drops all four 100-GHz-spaced channels within the same band. Eight versions of this card—each designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. There are eight versions of this card with eight part numbers. The AD-4C-xx.x has the following features: • Passive cascade of interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • Four software-controlled VOAs in the add section, one for each add port, regulate the optical power of inserted channels. • Two software-controlled VOAs regulate insertion loss on express and drop path, respectively. • Internal control of the VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds. • Software-monitored virtual photodiodes (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output and input ports. 9.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams Figure 9-7 shows the AD-4C-xx.x faceplate. 9-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card Figure 9-7 AD-4C-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9. Figure 9-8 shows a block diagram of the AD-4C-xx.x card. AD-4C -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX 15xx.xx TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 96475 9-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card Figure 9-8 AD-4C-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 9-9 shows the AD-4C-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-9 AD-4C-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.5.2 Wavelength Sets The AD-4C-xx.x cards are provisioned for the sets of four 100-GHz-spaced wavelengths shown Table 9-11 on page 9-19. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124075 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 1 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 2 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 3 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 4 98299 Control Control interface 4Ch OADM module Virtual photodiode COM RX COM TX EXP RX EXP TX TX Channels RX Channels Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 V2 P1 P9 P11 P10 P12 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P 9-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4C-xx.x Card 9.5.3 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P10 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-4C-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-12. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 9.5.4 AD-4C-xx.x Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 9.5.5 Related Procedures for AD-4C-xx.x Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4C-xx.x card: • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64 • “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 Table 9-11 AD-4C-xx.x Channel Sets Band ID Add/Drop Wavelengths Band 30.3 (A) 1530.3, 1531.2, 1531.9, 1532.6 Band 34.2 (B) 1534.2, 1535.0, 1535.8, 1536.6 Band 38.1 (C) 1538.1, 1538.9, 1539.7, 1540.5 Band 42.1 (D) 1542.1, 1542.9, 1543.7, 1544.5 Band 46.1 (E) 1546.1, 1546.9, 1547.7, 1548.5 Band 50.1 (F) 1550.1, 1550.9, 1551.7, 1552.5 Band 54.1 (G) 1554.1, 1554.9, 1555.7, 1556.5 Band 58.1 (H) 1558.1, 1558.9, 1559.7, 1560.6 Table 9-12 AD-4C-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX P9 IN EXP EXP RX P10 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX 9-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on page 16-40 • “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2 • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27 9.6 AD-1B-xx.x Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For AD-1B-xx.x card specifications, see the “AD-1B-xx.x Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The 1-Band OADM (AD-1B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops a single band of four adjacent 100-GHz-spaced channels. Eight versions of this card with eight different part numbers—each version designed for use with one band of wavelengths—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other. The AD-1B xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to17 and has the following features: • Passive cascaded interferential filters perform the channel add and drop functions. • Two software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the express and drop OADM paths (drop section). • Output power of the dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of the VOA drop. • The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output are monitored within the software. 9.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams Figure 9-10 shows the AD-1B-xx.x faceplate. 9-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card Figure 9-10 AD-1B-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9. Figure 9-11 shows a block diagram of the AD-1B-xx.x card. AD-1B -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX XX.X TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 96471 9-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-1B-xx.x Card Figure 9-11 AD-1B-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 9-12 shows the AD-1B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-12 AD-1B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.6.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P4 and virtual photodiodes V1 and V2 monitor the power for the AD-1B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-13. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124073 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Band xx.x Rx Band xx.x Tx 98307 Control Control interface Virtual photodiode COM RX EXP RX EXP TX TX Band xx.x Physical photodiode RX Physical photodiode V V2 V1 COM TX P1 P3 P5 P4 P2 P Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 ADD BAND RX P2 DROP BAND TX 9-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 9.6.3 AD-1B-xx.x Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 9.6.4 Related Procedures for AD-1B-xx.x Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-1B-xx.x card: • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64 • “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on page 16-40 • “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2 • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27 9.7 AD-4B-xx.x Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The 4-Band OADM (AD-4B-xx.x) card passively adds or drops four bands of four adjacent 100-GHz-spaced channels. Two versions of this card with different part numbers—each version designed for use with one set of bands—are used in the ONS 15454 DWDM system. The card bidirectionally adds and drops in two different sections on the same card to manage signal flow in both directions. This card can be used when there is asymmetric adding and dropping on each side (east or west) of the node; a band can be added or dropped on one side but not on the other. The AD1B-xx.x can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and has the following features: • Five software-controlled VOAs regulate the optical power flowing in the OADM paths. • Output power of each dropped band is set by changing the attenuation of each VOA drop. P3 IN EXP EXP RX P4 OUT EXP EXP TX V1 IN COM COM RX V2 OUT COM COM TX Table 9-13 AD-1B-xx.x Port Calibration (continued) Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port 9-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card • The VOA express is used to regulate the insertion loss of the express path. • VOA settings and functions, photodiode detection, and alarm thresholds are internally controlled. • Virtual photodiode (firmware calculation of port optical power) at the common DWDM output port are monitored within the software. 9.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams Figure 9-13 shows the AD-4B-xx.x faceplate. Figure 9-13 AD-4B-xx.x Faceplate For information on safety labels for the card, see the “9.2 Safety Labels” section on page 9-9. Figure 9-14 shows a block diagram of the AD-4B-xx.x card. AD-4B -X.XX FAIL ACT SF RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX XX.X TX RX EXP TX RX COM TX 96472 9-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card Figure 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Block Diagram Figure 9-15 shows the AD-4B-xx.x optical module functional block diagram. Figure 9-15 AD-4B-xx.x Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 9.7.2 Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P11 and virtual photodiode V1 monitor the power for the AD-4B-xx.x card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 9-14. Optical Module COM RX COM TX 124075 uP8260 processor DC/DC converter EXP TX EXP RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCC M SCL Bus TCC P Power supply Input filters BAT A&B Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 1 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 2 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 3 Add Rx Drop Tx Channel 4 Virtual photodiode COM RX TX B30.3 or B46.1 RX Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator V V1 EXP RX EXP TX COM TX TX B34.2 or B50.1 RX TX B38.1 or B54.1 RX TX RX B42.1 or B58.1 98308 P1 P P2 P3 P4 P9 P11 P12 P10 P5 P6 P7 P8 9-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 9 Provision Optical Add/Drop Cards AD-4B-xx.x Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 9.7.3 AD-4B-xx.x Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 9.7.4 Related Procedures for AD-4B-xx.x Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AD-4B-xx.x card: • “NTP-G30 Install the DWDM Cards” procedure on page 14-64 • “NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup” procedure on page 14-127 • “NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections” procedure on page 16-40 • “NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up” procedure on page 15-2 • NTP-G74 Monitor DWDM Card Performance • “NTP-G106 Reset Cards Using CTC” procedure on page 24-13 • NTP-G107 Remove Permanently or Remove and Replace DWDM Cards • “NTP-G119 Power Down the Node” procedure on page 24-27 Table 9-14 AD-4B-xx.x Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P4 ADD COM TX P5–P8 DROP DROP TX P9 IN EXP EXP RX P10 OUT EXP EXP TX P11 IN COM COM RX V1 OUT COM COM TX CH A P T E R 10-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards This chapter describes the Cisco ONS 15454 cards deployed in reconfigurable optical add/drop (ROADM) networks. For card safety and compliance information, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms document. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Chapter topics include: • 10.1 Card Overview, page 10-2 • 10.2 Safety Labels, page 10-15 • 10.3 32WSS Card, page 10-16 • 10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card, page 10-22 • 10.4 32WSS-L Card, page 10-22 • 10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card, page 10-29 • 10.5 32DMX Card, page 10-29 • 10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card, page 10-33 • 10.6 32DMX-L Card, page 10-34 • 10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card, page 10-38 • 10.7 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-39 • 10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card, page 10-43 • 10.8 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-44 • 10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card, page 10-48 • 10.9 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-49 • 10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card, page 10-53 • 10.10 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-54 10-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview • 10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card, page 10-60 • 10.11 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-60 • 10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card, page 10-67 • 10.12 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-67 • 10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card, page 10-73 • 10.13 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-73 • 10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card, page 10-80 • 10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards, page 10-80 • 10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card, page 10-90 • 10.15 MMU Card, page 10-90 • 10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card, page 10-93 Note This chapter contains information about cards that perform mesh topology functions. Multiplexer and demultiplexer cards that do not perform these functions are described in Chapter 6, “Provision Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards.” 10.1 Card Overview The ROADM cards include six add drop cards utilized in the C-band (32WSS, 32DMX, 32DMX-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, and MMU), two add drop cards utilized for the L-band (32WSS-L, and 32DMX-L), and two single module ROADM (SMR) cards utilized in the C-band (40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C). This section provides card summary, compatibility, channel allocation, and safety information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots that have the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. 10.1.1 Card Summary Table 10-1 lists and summarizes information about each ROADM card. Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary Card Port Description For Additional Information 32WSS The 32WSS card has seven sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.3 32WSS Card” section on page 10-16 32WSS-L The 32WSS-L card has seven sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.4 32WSS-L Card” section on page 10-22 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 32DMX The 32DMX has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.5 32DMX Card” section on page 10-29 32DMX-L The 32DMX-L has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.6 32DMX-L Card” section on page 10-34 40-DMX-C The 40-DMX-C has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.7 40-DMX-C Card” section on page 10-39 40-DMX-CE The 40-DMX-CE has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.8 40-DMX-CE Card” section on page 10-44 40-MUX-C The 40-MUX-C has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.9 40-MUX-C Card” section on page 10-49. 40-WSS-C The 40-WSS-C card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.10 40-WSS-C Card” section on page 10-54 40-WSS-CE The 40-WSS-CE card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.11 40-WSS-CE Card” section on page 10-60 40-WXC-C The 40-WXC-C card has five sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.12 40-WXC-C Card” section on page 10-67 80-WXC-C The 80-WXC-C card has 14 ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.13 80-WXC-C Card” section on page 10-73. 40-SMR1-C The 40-SMR1-C card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards” section on page 10-80 40-SMR2-C The 40-SMR2-C card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16. See the “10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards” section on page 10-80 MMU The MMU card has six sets of ports located on the faceplate. It operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “10.15 MMU Card” section on page 10-90 Table 10-1 ROADM Card Summary (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information 10-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 10.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 10-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for the ROADM cards. Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 32WSS No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 32WSS-L No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 40-WSS-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-WSS-CE No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 32DMX No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 32DMX-L No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 40-DMX-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-DMX-C E No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-MUX-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-WXC-C No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 10-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 80-WXC-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-SMR1-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40-SMR2-CNo No No No No No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MMU No No No No No 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM Table 10-2 Software Release Compatibility for ROADM Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 10-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 10.1.3 Interface Classes The input interface cards have been grouped in classes listed in Table 10-3. The subsequent tables list the optical performance and output power of each interface class. Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes Input Power Class Card A 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L), 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L) with forward error correction (FEC) enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C) B 10-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_10G) and muxponder card (MXP_2.5G_10G) without FEC C OC-192 LR ITU cards without FEC, 10-Gbps multirate transponder (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) cards with FEC disabled D 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), both protected and unprotected, with FEC enabled E OC-48 100-GHz dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) muxponder card (MXP_MR_2.5G) and 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected; FEC disabled; and retime, reshape, and regenerate (3R) mode enabled F 2.5-Gbps multirate transponder card (TXP_MR_2.5G), protected or unprotected, in regenerate and reshape (2R) mode G OC-48 ELR 100 GHz card H 2/4 port GbE transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) I 10-Gbps multirate transponder cards (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L) and 10-Gbps muxponder cards (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_MR_10DME_L) with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) enabled, 40-Gbps transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C), and 40-Gbps muxponder cards (40G-MXP-C, 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C) K OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, 100GHz 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled L 40Gbps Duobinary CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card M 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF N 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10E_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_MR_10DME_C) with E-FEC enabled O 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC enabled 10-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 10-4 lists the optical performance parameters for 40-Gbps cards. P 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), 10Gbps Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC enabled T 40Gbps DPSK CRS-1 DWDM ITU-T line card V OC-192/STM-64 LR ITU cards without FEC, full tunable 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC disabled, full tunable W 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with FEC enabled, full tunable X 10Gbps Ethernet Xponder (GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XP, 10GE_XPE), Sonet/SDH add/drop (ADM_10G), OTU2 Xponder (OTU2_XP), with E-FEC enabled, full tunable Y 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with FEC enabled and maximum likelihood sequence estimator (MLSE) correction Z 10Gbps enhanced full tunable transponder (TXP_MR_10EX_C) and muxponder (MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, MXP_MR_10DMEX_C), with E-FEC enabled and MLSE correction Table 10-3 Cisco ONS 15454 Card Interfaces Assigned to Input Power Classes (continued) Input Power Class Card Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance Parameter Class A Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 9 dB 20 dB 8 dB Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 40-Gbps multirate transponder/40-Gbps FEC transponder (40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm — 10-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 10-5, Table 10-6, and Table 10-7 lists the optical performance parameters for 10-Gbps cards. OC-192 LR ITU — — Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. Table 10-4 40-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (continued) Parameter Class A Class I Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited (if appl.) Power Limited OSNR Limited (if appl.) Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limit ed Power Limited OSNR Limite d Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneratio n 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes No No Yes (E-FEC) No Threshold Optimum Average Average Optimum Average Maximum BER2 10–15 10–12 10–12 10–15 10–12 OSNR1 sensitivity 23 dB 8.5 dB 23 dB 19 dB 19 dB 19 dB 20 dB 6 dB 23 dB3 16 dB3 23 dB4 17 dB4 23 dB5 17 dB5 Power sensitivity –24 dBm –18 dBm –21 dBm –20 dBm –22 dBm –22 dBm –26 dBm –18 dBm –24 dBm3 –17 dBm3 –23 dBm4 –18 dBm4 –23 dBm5 –17 dBm5 Power overload –8 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm –8 dBm –7 dBm 10-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Transmitted Power Range6 10-Gbps multirate transponder/ 10-Gbps FEC transponder +2.5 to 3.5 dBm (for TXP_MR_10G) +3.0 to 6.0 dBm (for TXP_MR_10E) +2.5 to 3.5 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — OC-192 LR ITU — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder — — — — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm Dispersion compensatio n tolerance +/–800 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–1,000 ps/nm +/–800 ps/nm –400 to +800 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. This value is for Xen Pak XFP used with Catalyst card. 4. This value is for XFP used with Catalyst, Xponder, and ADM-10G cards. 5. This value is for X2 XFP used with Catalyst card. 6. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) No Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Average Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–12 OSNR1 sensitivity 19 dB 5 dB 11 dB 11 dB 23 dB 8 dB 23 dB 16 dB Power sensitivity –27 dBm –20 dBm –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –18 dBm –24 dBm –18 dBm Table 10-5 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class A, B, C, I, and K) (continued) Parameter Class A Class B Class C Class I Class K Type Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limit ed Power Limited OSNR Limite d Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited 10-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Power overload –8 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm –7 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbp s FEC transponder +3.0 to 6.0 dBm — — — OC-192 LR ITU — — — 0 to +3.0 dBm 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder — –1.0 to +3.0 dBm –1.0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance +/–800 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1600 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 10 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R 3R FEC Yes Yes (E-FEC) Yes Yes (E-FEC) Threshold Optimum Optimum Optimum Optimum Maximum BER2 10–15 10–15 10–15 10–15 OSNR1 sensitivity 8.5 dB 8.5 dB 19 dB 5 dB 23 dB 8 dB 19 dB 5.5 dB Power sensitivity –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –20 dBm –24 dBm –20 dBm –27 dBm –20 dBm Power overload –7 dBm –7 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm Transmitted Power Range3 10-Gbps multirate transponder/10-Gbps FEC transponder — — +3.0 to 6.0 dBm +3.0 to 6.0 dBm OC-192 LR ITU — — — — Table 10-6 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class N, O, P, and V) (continued) Parameter Class N Class O Class P Class V Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited 10-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview Table 10-8 and Table 10-9 lists the optical interface performance parameters for 2.5-Gbps cards. 10-Gbps Ethernet Xponder, Sonet/SDH Add/Drop, OTU2 Xponder 0 to +3.0 dBm 0 to +3.0 dBm — — Dispersion compensation tolerance –500 to +1100 ps/nm –500 to +1300 ps/nm –800 to +1600 ps/nm –2200 to +3700 ps/nm 1. OSNR = optical signal-to-noise ratio 2. BER = bit error rate 3. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the optical add drop multiplexer (OADM) cards. Table 10-7 10-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class W, X, Y, and Z) (continued) Parameter Class W Class X Class Y Class Z Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR1 Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Table 10-8 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class D, E, and F) Parameter Class D Class E Class F Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 2R FEC Yes No No Threshold Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–15 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 5 dB 14 dB 10 dB 15 dB 15 dB Power sensitivity –31 dBm –25 dBm –30 dBm –23 dBm –24 dBm –24 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –9 dBm –9 dBm Transmitted Power Range1 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm –1.0 to 1.0 dBm MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G — +2.0 to +4.0 dBm — OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) — — — 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF — — — Dispersion compensation tolerance –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +5400 ps/nm –1200 to +3300 ps/nm 10-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview 10.1.4 Channel Allocation Plans ONS 15454 DWDM ROADM cards are designed for use with specific channels in the C band and L band. In most cases, the channels for these cards are either numbered (for example, 1 to 32 or 1 to 40) or delimited (odd or even). Client interfaces must comply with these channel assignments to be compatible with the ONS 15454 system. . The following cards operate in the C-band: • 32WSS • 32DMX • 32DMX-C • 40-MUX-C • 40-WXC-C Table 10-9 2.5-Gbps Interface Optical Performance (Class G, H, and M) Parameter Class G Class H Class M Type Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Power Limited OSNR Limited Maximum bit rate 2.5 Gbps 1.25 Gbps 2.5 Gbps Regeneration 3R 3R 3R FEC No No No Threshold Average Average Average Maximum BER 10–12 10–12 10–12 OSNR sensitivity 14 dB 11 dB 13 dB 8 dB 14 dB 9 dB Power sensitivity –27 dBm –23 dBm –28 dBm –18 dBm –28 dBm –22 dBm Power overload –9 dBm –7 dBm –9 dBm Transmitted Power Range1 1. These values, decreased by patchcord and connector losses, are also the input power values for the OADM cards. TXP_MR_2.5G — — — TXPP_MR_2.5G — MXP_MR_2.5G –2.0 to 0 dBm MXPP_MR_2.5G — OC-48 ELR 100 GHz — — — 2/4 port GbE Transponder (GBIC WDM 100GHz) –1200 to +3300 ps/nm 0 to +3 dBm — 2.5 Gbps DWDM ITU-T SPF — 0 to +4 dBm Dispersion compensation tolerance –1000 to +3600 ps/nm –800 to +2400 ps/nm 10-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview • 80-WXC-C • 40-SMR1-C • 40-SMR2-C • MMU Table 10-10 lists the C-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a comprehensive C-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities. . Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 10-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Card Overview The following add drop cards utilize the L-band DWDM channels: • 32WSS-L • 32DMX-L Table 10-11 lists the L-band channel IDs and wavelengths at ITU-T 50-GHz intervals. This is a comprehensive L-band channel table that encompasses present and future card capabilities. 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 1. Channels on the C-band are 4-skip-1, starting at 1530.33 nm. Table 10-10 DWDM C-Band1 Channel Allocation Plan with 50-GHz Spacing (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 10-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Safety Labels 10.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 1. Channels on the L-band are contiguous, starting at 1577.86 nm. The channels listed in this table begin with 1570.83 nm for backward compatibility with other ONS products. Table 10-11 DWDM L-band1 Channel Allocation Plan at 50 GHz Spacing (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 10-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card 10.3 32WSS Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For 32WSS card specifications, see the “32WSS Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch (32WSS) card performs channel add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS card can be installed in the following pairs of slots: • Slots 1 and 2 • Slots 3 and 4 • Slots 5 and 6 • Slots 12 and 13 • Slots 14 and 15 • Slots 16 and 17 10.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 32WSS has six types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (listed in Table 10-13 on page 10-21). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether that channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a variable optical attenuator (VOA). The 32WSS has four physical receive connectors that accept multifiber push-on (MPO) cables on its front panel for the client input interfaces. Each MPO cable breaks out into eight separate cables. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS card in the same network element (NE). • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS card within the NE. • COM TX port: The COM TX (line input) port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, OPT-BST) for transmission outside of the NE. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal containing drop channels to the 32DMX card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 10-1 shows the 32WSS card front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports. 10-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 10-1 32WSS Faceplate and Ports Figure 10-2 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS card and Figure 10-3 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports. 115291 FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 DROP TX TX RX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS 32 Add Ports Add 1-8 Add 9-16 Add 17-24 Add 25-32 DROP TX EXP RX EXP TX COM RX COM TX 10-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 10-2 32WSS Block Diagram Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX port are processed in two ways: Add channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in Figure 10-3, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS card. EXP RX port (In from other 32WSS within the network element) EXP TX port (To the other 32WSS within the network element) DROP TX port dropped channels (To COM RX port of 32DMX) COM RX port (In from preamplifier, OPT-PRE, or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-BST or OSC-CSM) 115293 32 add ports Add 1 Add 2 Add 32 Optical splitter Add channel or pass-through Wavelength selective switch 10-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card Figure 10-3 32WSS Optical Block Diagram The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows: • EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS card within the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked. After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal, which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-BST or OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no amplification is needed). • COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS card’s optical splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX where the drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow out of the 32WSS card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WSS module within the NE. • COM TX Port Monitoring 1 2 32 Add 32 32 1 pass-through EXP RX port (In from 32WSS) EXP TX port (To 32WSS) DROP TX port (To 32DMX) 2 pass-through 32 pass-through Optical splitter Dropped channels 2 Photodiode VOA COM RX port (In from OPT-PRE preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-BST or OSC-CSM) Add 2 2 Add 1 1 115292 Optical DMUX (AWG) Optical MUX (AWG) Optical switch (Add channel or pass-through) P1 P33 P2 P34 P32 P64 P65 P66 P67 P69 P68 10-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card The COM TX value can be measured by either a physical or a virtual photodiode of the 15454-32WSS card. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is between 1024 (0x400) and 2047 (0x800) the COM TX value is measured by physical photodiode. If the vendor ID of the 15454-32WSS card is greater than 2048 (0x800), the COM TX value is measured by the virtual photodiode. For COM TX values measured by virtual photodiode, check the values at the RX port in the downstream of the COM TX port (COM-RX port on OPT-BST or OSC-CSM card). 10.3.2 32WSS ROADM Functionality The 32WSS card works in combination with the 32DMX card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). ROADM functionality using the 32WSS card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (totalling six slots needed in the ONS 15454 chassis). For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 10.3.3 32WSS Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS card. Table 10-12 shows how the returned power level values are calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide. Table 10-12 32WSS Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX P33–P641 1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state of the optical switch PASS THROUGH COM TX ADD (Power) COM TX P65 OUT EXP EXP TX P66 IN EXP EXP RX P67 OUT COM COM TX P68 IN COM COM RX P69 DROP DROP TX 10-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS Card 10.3.4 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan The 32WSS Card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-13. Table 10-13 32WSS Channel Allocation Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.1 195.1 1536.61 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.87 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.46 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 10-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 10.3.5 32WSS Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.3.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-65 10.4 32WSS-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For 32WSS-L card specifications, see the “32WSS-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The two-slot 32-Channel Wavelength Selective Switch L-Band (32WSS-L) card performs channel add/drop processing within the ONS 15454 DWDM node. The 32WSS-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber.The 32WSS-L card can be installed in the following pairs of slots: • Slots 1 and 2 • Slots 3 and 4 • Slots 5 and 6 • Slots 12 and 13 • Slots 14 and 15 • Slots16 and 17 10-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 10.4.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 32WSS-L card faceplate has six types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 32): These ports are used for adding channels (which are listed in Table 10-15 on page 10-28). Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether the channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 32WSS-L card in the same NE. • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 32WSS-L card within the NE. • COM TX port: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split-off optical signal with drop channels to the 32DMX-L card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 10-4 shows the 32WSS-L module front panel and identifies the traffic flow through the ports. 10-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 10-4 32WSS-L Faceplate and Ports Figure 10-5 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the 32WSS-L card and Figure 10-6 on page 10-26 shows how optical signals are processed on the EXP RX and COM RX ports. 134973 FAIL ACT SF 98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6 DROP TX TX RX EXP RX TX COM RX TX ADD RX 32WSS-L 32 Add Ports Add 1-8 Add 9-16 Add 17-24 Add 25-32 DROP TX EXP RX EXP TX COM RX COM TX 10-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 10-5 32WSS-L Block Diagram Aggregate optical signals that enter the EXP RX and COM RX ports are processed in two ways: add channel/pass-through and optical splitter processing. The optical processing stages are shown in Figure 10-6, which provides a detailed optical functional diagram of the 32WSS-L card. EXP RX port (In from other 32WSS-L within the network element) EXP TX port (To the other 32WSS-L within the network element) DROP TX port dropped channels (To COM RX port of 32DMX) COM RX port (In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-AMP-L booster or OSC-CSM) 134971 32 add ports Add 1 Add 2 Add 32 Optical splitter Add channel or pass-through Wavelength selective switch 10-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Figure 10-6 32WSS-L Optical Block Diagram The EXP RX PORT and COM RX PORT operate as follows: • EXP RX Port Add Channel/Pass-through Processing The incoming optical signal is received at the EXP RX port from the other 32WSS-L card within the NE. The incoming aggregate optical signal is demultiplexed into 32 individual wavelengths, or channels. Each channel is then individually processed by the optical switch, which performs add/pass-through processing. By using software controls, the switch either selects the optical channel coming in from the demultiplexer (that is, the pass-through channel) or it selects the external ADD channel. If the ADD port channel is selected this channel is transmitted and the optical signal coming from the demultiplexer is blocked. After the optical switch stage, all of the channels are multiplexed into an aggregate optical signal, which is sent out on the COM TX port. The output is typically connected to an OPT-AMP-L or OPT-BST-E card (in the event a booster amplifier is needed) or to an OSC-CSM card (if no amplification is needed). • COM RX Port Optical Splitter Processing The COM RX port receives the incoming optical signal and directs it to the 32WSS-L card’s optical splitter. The splitter optically diverts channels that are designated to be dropped to the DROP TX port. The DROP TX port is typically connected to the COM RX port of the 32DMX-L where the drop channels are being dropped. Channels that are not dropped pass-through the optical splitter and flow out of the 32WSS-L card EXP TX port. Typically, this optical signal is connected to the other 32WS-L module within the NE. 1 2 32 Add 32 32 1 pass-through EXP RX port (In from 32WSS-L) EXP TX port (To 32WSS-L) DROP TX port (To 32DMX-L) 2 pass-through 32 pass-through Optical splitter Dropped channels 2 Photodiode VOA Add 2 2 Add 1 1 134972 Optical DMUX (AWG) Optical MUX (AWG) Optical switch (Add channel or pass-through) P1 P33 P2 P34 P32 P64 P65 P66 P67 P69 P68 COM RX port (In from OPT-AMP-L preamplifier or OSC-CSM) COM TX port (To OPT-AMP-L booster or OSC-CSM) 10-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card 10.4.2 32WSS-L ROADM Functionality The 32WSS-L works in combination with the 32DMX-L to implement L-band (1570 to 1620 nm) functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32WSS-L card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (totalling six slots needed in the ONS 15454 chassis). For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. Note A terminal site can be configured using a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 10.4.3 32WSS-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P69 monitor the power for the 32WSS-L card. Table 10-14 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.4.4 32WSS-L Channel Plan The 32WSS-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-15. Table 10-14 32WSS-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 ADD (Power ADD) ADD RX P33–P641 1. P33–P64 monitor either ADD or PASSTHROUGH power, depending on the state of the optical switch PASS THROUGH COM TX ADD (Power) COM TX P65 OUT EXP EXP TX P66 IN EXP EXP RX P67 OUT COM COM TX P68 IN COM COM RX P69 DROP DROP TX 10-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32WSS-L Card Table 10-15 32WSS-L Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86 78.6 189.9 1578.69 79.5 189.8 1579.52 80.3 189.7 1580.35 B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18 82.0 189.5 1582.02 82.8 189.4 1582.85 83.6 189.3 1583.69 B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53 85.3 189.1 1585.36 86.2 189 1586.20 87.0 188.9 1587.04 B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88 88.7 188.7 1588.73 89.5 188.6 1589.57 90.4 188.5 1590.41 B91.2 91.2 188.4 591.26 92.1 188.3 1592.10 92.9 188.2 1592.95 93.7 188.1 1593.79 B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64 95.4 187.9 1595.49 96.3 187.8 1596.34 97.1 187.7 1597.19 B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04 98.8 187.5 1598.89 99.7 187.4 1599.75 00.6 187.3 1600.60 B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46 02.3 187.1 1602.31 03.1 187 1603.17 04.0 186.9 1604.03 10-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card 10.4.5 32WSS-L Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.4.6 Related Procedures for 32WSS-L Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32WSS-L card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-65 10.5 32DMX Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For 32DMX card specifications, see the “32DMX Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer (32DMX) card is an optical demultiplexer. The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17. 10.5.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 32DMX card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power monitoring. • DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 10-17 on page 10-32) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. The incoming optical signal to the demultiplexer comes into the COM RX port. This input port is connected using a single LC duplex optical connector.Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 10-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 6-14. Figure 10-7 shows the 32DMX card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports. Figure 10-7 32DMX Faceplate and Ports A block diagram of the 32DMX card is shown in Figure 10-8. 145936 32DMX FAIL ACT SF 54.1-60.6 46.1-52.5 38.1-44.5 30.3-36.6 COM RX TX MON 32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports Logical View Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 32WSS on COM RX) COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-32 10-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card Figure 10-8 32DMX Block Diagram Figure 10-9 shows the 32DMX optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-9 32DMX Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.5.2 32DMX ROADM Functionality The 32DMX card works in combination with the 32WSS card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX card requires two 32DMX single-slot cards and two 32WSS double-slot cards (for six slots total in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 30.3 to 36.6 8 CHS TX 38.1 to 44.5 8 CHS TX 46.1 to 52.5 8 CHS TX 54.1 to 60.6 8 CHS TX 96480 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 1 32 Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX 20 dB max attenuation DROP TX P4 P3 P2 P1 P32 P31 P30 P29 P33 P34 P 124967 10-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card For information about the ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS card and a 32DMX card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 10.5.3 32DMX Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-16. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.5.4 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan The 32DMX card’s channel labels, frequencies, and wavelengths are listed in Table 10-17. Table 10-16 32DMX Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.1 195.1 1536.61 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.87 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.46 10-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX Card 10.5.5 32DMX Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.5.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 Table 10-17 32DMX Channel Allocation Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 10-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card • NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54 10.6 32DMX-L Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) Note For 32DMX-L card specifications, see the “32DMX-L Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The single-slot 32-Channel Demultiplexer L-Band card (32DMX-L) is an L-band optical demultiplexer. The card receives an aggregate optical signal on its COM RX port and demultiplexes it into to (32) 100-GHz-spaced channels. The 32DMX-L card is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The 32DMX-L card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and in Slots 12 to 17. 10.6.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 32DMX-L card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for optical power monitoring. • DROP TX ports (1 to 32): On its output, the 32DMX-L card provides 32 drop ports (listed in Table 10-21 on page 10-42) that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using four 8-fiber MPO ribbon connectors. Each drop port has a photodiode for optical power monitoring. Unlike the two-slot 32DMX-O demultiplexer, the drop ports on the 32DMX-L do not have a VOA per channel for optical power regulation. For a description of the 32DMX-O card, see the “6.4 32DMX-O Card” section on page 6-14. Figure 10-10 shows the 32DMX-L card front panel and the basic traffic flow through the ports. 10-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card Figure 10-10 32DMX-L Faceplate and Ports Figure 10-11 shows a block diagram of the 32DMX-L card. 145940 32DMX FAIL ACT SF 98.0-04.0 91.2-97.1 84.5-90.4 77.8-83.6 COM RX TX 32 Drop Port Outputs 32 Drop Ports Logical View Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 32WSS-L on COM RX) COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-32 MON 10-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card Figure 10-11 32DMX-L Block Diagram Figure 10-12 shows the 32DMX-L optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-12 32DMX-L Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.6.2 32DMX-L ROADM Functionality The 32DMX-L card works in combination with the 32WSS-L card to implement ROADM functionality. AS a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured to add or drop individual optical channels using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 32DMX-L card requires two 32DMX-L single-slot cards and two 32WSS-L double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 77.8 to 83.6 8 CHS TX 84.5 to 90.4 8 CHS TX 91.2 to 97.1 8 CHS TX 98.0 to 04.0 8 CHS TX 134969 Processor MON COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 1 32 Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX 20 dB max attenuation DROP TX P4 P3 P2 P1 P32 P31 P30 P29 P33 P34 P 124967 10-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. Note A terminal site can be configured using only a 32WSS-L card and a 32DMX-L card plugged into the east or west side of the shelf. 10.6.3 32DMX-L Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P33 monitor the power for the 32DMX-L card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-18. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.6.4 32DMX-L Channel Plan The 32DMX-L card uses 32 banded channels on the ITU-T 100-GHz grid, as shown in Table 10-19. Table 10-18 32DMX-L Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P32 DROP DROP TX P33 INPUT COM COM RX Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) B77.8 77.8 190 1577.86 78.6 189.9 1578.69 79.5 189.8 1579.52 80.3 189.7 1580.35 B81.1 81.1 189.6 1581.18 82.0 189.5 1582.02 82.8 189.4 1582.85 83.6 189.3 1583.69 B84.5 84.5 189.2 1584.53 85.3 189.1 1585.36 86.2 189 1586.20 87.0 188.9 1587.04 10-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 32DMX-L Card 10.6.5 32DMX-L Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.6.6 Related Procedures for 32DMX-L Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 32DMX-L card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards B87.8 87.8 188.8 1587.88 88.7 188.7 1588.73 89.5 188.6 1589.57 90.4 188.5 1590.41 B91.2 91.2 188.4 1591.26 92.1 188.3 1592.10 92.9 188.2 1592.95 93.7 188.1 1593.79 B94.6 94.6 188 1594.64 95.4 187.9 1595.49 96.3 187.8 1596.34 97.1 187.7 1597.19 B98.0 98.0 187.6 1598.04 98.8 187.5 1598.89 99.7 187.4 1599.75 00.6 187.3 1600.60 B01.4 01.4 187.2 1601.46 02.3 187.1 1602.31 03.1 187 1603.17 04.0 186.9 1604.03 Table 10-19 32DMX-L Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 10-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card • NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54 10.7 40-DMX-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-DMX-C card specifications, see the “40-DMX-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band (40-DMX-C) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42), and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-C card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 10.7.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 40-DMX-C has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. • DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-C card provides 40 drop ports that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. Figure 10-13 shows the 40-DMX-C card faceplate. 10-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card Figure 10-13 40-DMX-C Faceplate Figure 10-14 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-C card. 159554 40-DMX-C 55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 COM TX RX FAIL ACT SF 40 Drop Ports Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 Drop 33-40 40 Drop Port Outputs Logical View COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-40 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 40-WSS-C on COM RX) 10-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card Figure 10-14 40-DMX-C Block Diagram Figure 10-15 shows the 40-DMX-C optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-15 40-DMX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.7.2 40-DMX-C ROADM Functionality The 40-DMX-C card works in combination with the 40-WSS-C card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-C card requires two single-slot 40-DMX-C cards and two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 151971 Processor COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 36.6 to 42.1 8 CHS RX 30.3 to 35.8 8 CHS RX 42.9 to 48.5 8 CHS RX 49.3 to 54.9 8 CHS RX 55.7 to 61.4 8 CHS RX 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P41 151972 10-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card For other cards’ ROADM functionality, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. 10.7.3 40-DMX-C Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-C card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-20 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.7.4 40-DMX-C Channel Plan Table 10-21 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-C card. Table 10-20 40-DMX-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 DROP DROP TX P41 INPUT COM COM RX Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 10-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-C Card 10.7.5 40-DMX-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.7.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-C card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 10-21 40-DMX-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54 10.8 40-DMX-CE Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-DMX-CE card specifications, see the “40-DMX-CE Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The single-slot 40-Channel Demultiplexer C-band, even channels (40-DMX-CE) card demultiplexes 40 100-GHz-spaced even-numbered channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-23 on page 10-47), and sends them to dedicated output ports. The overall optical power can be adjusted using a single VOA that is common to all channels. The 40-DMX-CE card is unidirectional, optically passive, and can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 10.8.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 40-DMX-CE card has two types of ports: • COM RX port: COM RX is the line input port for the aggregate optical signal being demultiplexed. This port is supported by a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. • DROP TX ports (1 to 40): On its output, the 40-DMX-CE card provides 40 drop ports that are typically used for dropping channels within the ROADM node. These ports are connected using five physical connectors on the front panel that accept MPO client input cables. (MPO cables break out into eight separate cables.) The 40-DMX-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. Figure 10-16 shows the 40-DMX-CE card faceplate. 10-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card Figure 10-16 40-DMX-CE Card Faceplate Figure 10-17 shows a block diagram of the 40-DMX-CE card. 240642 40-DMX-C 56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2 COM TX RX FAIL ACT SF 40 Drop Ports Drop 1-8 Drop 9-16 Drop 17-24 Drop 25-32 Drop 33-40 40 Drop Port Outputs Logical View COM-RX Drop-1 Drop-2 Drop-40 COM RX (Receives Drop-TX from 40-WSS-CE on COM RX) 10-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card Figure 10-17 40-DMX-CE Card Block Diagram Figure 10-18 shows the 40-DMX-CE card optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-18 40-DMX-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.8.2 40-DMX-CE Card ROADM Functionality The 40-DMX-CE card works in combination with the 40-WSS-CE card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-DMX-CE card requires two single-slot 40-DMX-CE cards and two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). Optical module 240641 Processor COM RX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 37.0 to 42.5 8 CHS RX 30.7 to 36.2 8 CHS RX 43.3 to 48.9 8 CHS RX 49.7 to 55.3 8 CHS RX 56.1 to 61.8 8 CHS RX 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator COM RX DROP TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P P41 151972 10-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card For the ROADM functionality of other cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. 10.8.3 40-DMX-CE Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power at the outputs of the 40-DMX-CE card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed power at the input, calibrated to the COM-RX port. Table 10-22 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.8.4 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan Table 10-23 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are demultiplexed by the 40-DMX-CE card. Table 10-22 40-DMX-CE Card Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 DROP DROP TX P41 INPUT COM COM RX Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.5 195.75 1531.51 32.3 195.65 1532.29 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.9 195.45 1533.86 B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.4 195.25 1535.43 36.2 195.15 1536.22 37.0 195.05 1537.00 37.8 194.95 1537.79 B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.4 194.75 1539.37 40.1 194.65 1540.16 40.9 194.55 1540.95 41.8 194.45 1541.75 10-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-DMX-CE Card 10.8.5 40-DMX-CE Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.8.6 Related Procedures for 40-DMX-CE Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-DMX-CE card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54 43.3 194.25 1543.33 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.7 193.95 1545.72 B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52 47.3 193.75 1547.32 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.7 193.45 1549.72 B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52 51.3 193.25 1551.32 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.7 192.95 1553.73 B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54 55.3 192.75 1555.34 56.1 192.65 1556.15 56.9 192.55 1556.96 57.8 192.45 1557.77 B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.4 192.25 1559.39 60.2 192.15 1560.20 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.8 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-23 40-DMX-CE Card Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54 10.9 40-MUX-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-MUX-C card specifications, see the “40-MUX-C Card Specification” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The single-slot 40-Channel Multiplexer C-band (40-MUX-C) card multiplexes forty ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan in Table 10-21 on page 10-42. The 40-MUX-C card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-MUX-C card is typically used in hub nodes. 10.9.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 40-MUX-C card has two types of ports: • COM TX port: COM TX is the line output port for the aggregate optical signal being multiplexed. This port is supported by both a VOA for optical power regulation and a photodiode for per channel optical power monitoring. Note By default, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes (for example, electrical power failure). A manual VOA setting is also available. • DROP RX ports (1 to 40): The 40-MUX-C card provides 40 input optical channels. These ports are connected using five physical receive connectors on the card’s front panel that accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-DMX-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main output. For the wavelength range, see Table 10-21 on page 10-42. Figure 10-19 shows the 40-MUX-C card faceplate. 10-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card Figure 10-19 40-MUX-C Card Faceplate Figure 10-20 shows a block diagram of the 40-MUX-C card. 40-MUX-C 55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 COM RX TX FAIL ACT SF 159555 Client ports 1-8 Client ports 9-16 Client ports 17-24 Client ports 25-32 Client ports 33-40 Logical View COM TX Client-1 Client-2 Client-40 40 Client Channel Inputs 40 Client Ports COM TX Sends combined signal to OPT- BST 10-51 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card Figure 10-20 40-MUX-C Card Block Diagram Figure 10-21 shows the 40-MUX-C optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-21 40-MUX-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.9.2 40-MUX-C Card Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P40 monitor the power of the individual input ports to the 40-MUX-C card. P41 monitors the total multiplexed output power, calibrated to the COM-TX port. Table 10-24 shows the returned power level values calibrated to each port. Optical module 36.6 to 42.1 8 CHS RX 30.3 to 35.8 8 CHS RX 42.9 to 48.5 8 CHS RX 49.3 to 54.9 8 CHS RX 55.7 to 61.4 8 CHS RX Processor COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management SCL Bus TCCi M SCL Bus TCCi P DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B 151974 1 40 Control Control interface Physical photodiode Variable optical attenuator Inputs COM TX P40 P39 P38 P37 P4 P3 P2 P1 P 151975 10-52 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.9.3 40-MUX-C Card Channel Plan Table 10-25 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are multiplexed by the 40-MUX-C card. Table 10-24 40-MUX-C Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1–P40 ADD ADD RX P41 OUTPUT COM COM-TX Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 10-53 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-MUX-C Card 10.9.4 40-MUX-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.9.5 Related Procedures for 40-MUX-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-MUX-C card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 10-25 40-MUX-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-54 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G175 Modify 32MUX-O, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, 40-DMX-CE, and 4MD-xx.x Line Card Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-54 10.10 40-WSS-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-WSS-C card specifications, see the “40-WSS-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch C-Band (40-WSS-C) card switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-21 on page 10-42) and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-C card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 The 40-WSS-C features include: • Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port (EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. • Signal splitting in a 70%-to-30% ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-C for dropping signals, then to the other 40-WSS-C card. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a variable optical attenuator (VOA). In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. Within the 40-WSS-C card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port. 10.10.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 40-WSS-C has eight types of ports: • ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-WSS-C card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. 10-55 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-C card in the same NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-C card within the NE. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 10-22 shows the 40-WSS-C card faceplate. Figure 10-22 40-WSS-C Faceplate Figure 10-23 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-C card. 159394 40-WSS-C 55.7 - 61.4 49.3 - 54.9 42.9 - 48.5 36.6 - 42.1 30.3 - 35.8 ADD RX COM RX TX EXP RX TX DROP TX FAIL ACT SF 10-56 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card Figure 10-23 40-WSS-C Block Diagram 10-57 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card Figure 10-24 shows the 40-WSS-C optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-24 40-WSS-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.10.2 40-WSS-C ROADM Functionality The 40-WSS-C card works in combination with the 40-DMX-C card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-C card requires two 40-WSS-C double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-C single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). For information about ROADM functionality for other cards, see that card’s description in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. 10.10.3 40-WSS-C Power Monitoring The 40-WSS-C has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 10-26 lists the physical diode descriptions. Optical module 159392 uP8260 COM RX COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management 2xSCL Buses DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B EXP RX ADD RX LC connector MPO connector EXP TX DROP TX 10-58 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. Additionally, the 40-WSS-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-27 lists the virtual diodes. 10.10.4 40-WSS-C Channel Plan Table 10-28 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by the 40-WSS-C card. Table 10-26 40-WSS-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX PDi31 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power) Table 10-27 40-WSS-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power) Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 10-59 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-C Card 10.10.5 40-WSS-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 10-28 40-WSS-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-60 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card 10.10.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-C card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-65 10.11 40-WSS-CE Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-WSS-CE card specifications, see the “40-WSS-CE Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Selective Switch Even-Channel C-Band (40-WSS-CE) card switches 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-31 on page 10-65) and sends them to dedicated output ports. The 40-WSS-CE card is bidirectional and optically passive. The card can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The 40-WSS-CE features include: • Receipt of an aggregate DWDM signal into 40 output optical channels from the Line receive port (EXP RX) in one direction and from the COM-RX port in the other direction. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. • Signal splitting in a 70-to-30 percent ratio, sent to the 40-DMX-CE card for dropping signals, then to the other 40-WSS-CE card. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. In the case of electrical power failure, the VOA is set to its maximum attenuation for safety purposes. A manual VOA setting is also available. Within the 40-WSS-CE card, the first AWG opens the spectrum and each wavelength is directed to one of the ports of a 1x2 optical switch. The same wavelength can be passed through or stopped. If the pass-through wavelength is stopped, a new channel can be added at the ADD port. The card’s second AWG multiplexes all of the wavelengths, and the aggregate signal is output through the COM-TX port. 10.11.1 Faceplate and Block Diagrams The 40-WSS-CE card has eight types of ports: 10-61 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card • ADD RX ports (1 to 40): These ports are used for adding channels. Each add channel is associated with an individual switch element that selects whether an individual channel is added. Each add port has optical power regulation provided by a VOA. The five connectors on the card faceplate accept MPO cables for the client input interfaces. MPO cables break out into eight separate cables. The 40-WSS-CE card also has one LC-PC-II optical connector for the main input. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives an optical signal from another 40-WSS-CE card in the same NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WSS-CE card within the NE. • DROP TX port: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-DMX-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 10-25 shows the 40-WSS-CE card faceplate. 10-62 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 10-25 40-WSS-CE Faceplate Figure 10-26 shows a block diagram of the 40-WSS-CE card. 240643 40-WSS-C 56.2 - 61.8 49.7 - 55.3 43.3 - 48.9 37.0 - 42.5 30.7 - 36.2 ADD RX COM RX TX EXP RX TX DROP TX FAIL ACT SF 10-63 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 10-26 40-WSS-CE Block Diagram 10-64 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card Figure 10-27 shows the 40-WSS-CE optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-27 40-WSS-CE Card Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.11.2 40-WSS-CE Card ROADM Functionality The 40-WSS-CE card works in combination with the 40-DMX-CE card to implement ROADM functionality. As a ROADM node, the ONS 15454 can be configured at the optical channel level using CTC, Cisco Transport Planner, and CTM. ROADM functionality using the 40-WSS-CE card requires two 40-WSS-CE double-slot cards and two 40-DMX-CE single-slot cards (for a total of six slots in the ONS 15454 chassis). For information about ROADM functionality for another cards, see the description of that card in this chapter. For a diagram of a typical ROADM configuration, see the “12.1.3 ROADM Node” section on page 12-11. 10.11.3 40-WSS-CE Card Power Monitoring The 40-WSS-CE card has physical diodes that monitor power at various locations on the card. Table 10-29 lists the physical diode descriptions. Optical module 159392 uP8260 COM RX COM TX FPGA For SCL Bus management 2xSCL Buses DC/DC Power supply Input filters BAT A&B EXP RX ADD RX LC connector MPO connector EXP TX DROP TX 10-65 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. Additionally, the 40-WSS-CE card has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-30 lists the virtual diodes. 10.11.4 40-WSS-CE Card Channel Plan Table 10-31 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are switched by the 40-WSS-CE card. Table 10-29 40-WSS-CE Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX PDi31 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power) Table 10-30 40-WSS-CE Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power) Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.7 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.5 195.75 1531.51 32.3 195.65 1532.29 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.9 195.45 1533.86 B34.6 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.4 195.25 1535.43 36.2 195.15 1536.22 37.0 195.05 1537.00 37.8 194.95 1537.79 10-66 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WSS-CE Card 10.11.5 40-WSS-CE Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 B38.6 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.4 194.75 1539.37 40.1 194.65 1540.16 40.9 194.55 1540.95 41.8 194.45 1541.75 B42.5 42.5 194.35 1542.54 43.3 194.25 1543.33 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.7 193.95 1545.72 B46.5 46.5 193.85 1546.52 47.3 193.75 1547.32 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.7 193.45 1549.72 B50.5 50.5 193.35 1550.52 51.3 193.25 1551.32 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.7 192.95 1553.73 B54.4 54.4 192.85 1554.54 55.3 192.75 1555.34 56.1 192.65 1556.15 56.9 192.55 1556.96 57.8 192.45 1557.77 B58.6 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.4 192.25 1559.39 60.2 192.15 1560.20 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.8 191.95 1561.83 Table 10-31 40-WSS-CE Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-67 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card 10.11.6 Related Procedures for 40-WSS-CE Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WSS-CE card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G93 Modify the 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 40-WSS-C, or 40-WSS-CE Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-65 10.12 40-WXC-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) Note For 40-WXC-C card specifications, see the “40-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The double-slot 40-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (40-WXC-C) card selectively sends any wavelength combination coming from nine input ports to a common output port. The device can manage up to 41 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 10-10 on page 10-13. Each channel can be selected from any input. The card is optically passive and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. .The 40-WXC-C card provides the following features: • Demultiplexing, selection, and multiplexing of DWDM aggregate signal from input ports to common output port. • Aggregate DWDM signal monitoring and control through a VOA. • VOAs are deployed in every channel path in order to regulate the channel’s optical power. In the case of an electrical power failure, VOAs are set to their maximum attenuation value, or to a fixed and configurable one. The VOA can also be set manually. • Per-channel optical power monitoring using photodiodes. The 40-WXC-C card acts as a selector element with the following characteristics: • It is able to select a wavelength from one input port and pass the wavelength through to the common out port. Simultaneously, the card can block the same wavelength coming from the other eight input ports. • It is able to stop wavelengths from all nine inputs. • It is able to monitor optical power and control path attenuation using per channel VOA independently of the wavelength input-to-out port connection. 10-68 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card 10.12.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The 40-WXC-C card has six types of ports: • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • COM TX: The COM TX port sends an aggregate optical signal to a booster amplifier card (for example, the OPT-BST card) for transmission outside of the NE. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends an optical signal to the other 40-WXC-C card within the NE. • MON TX: The optical service channel (OSC) monitor. • ADD/DROP RX: The 40-WXC-C card provides 40 input optical channels. For the wavelength range, see Table 10-34 on page 10-72. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains drop channels to the 40-WXC-C card, where the channels are further processed and dropped. Figure 10-28 shows the 40-WXC-C card faceplate. 10-69 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Figure 10-28 40-WXC-C Faceplate Figure 10-29 shows the 40-WXC-C optical module functional block diagram. 159396 40-WXC EXP COM RX TX EXP TX ADD DROP RX TX MON TX FAIL ACT SF RX EXP RX Ports (from 1 to 8): fibres come FROM Mesh PP Monitor Port: monitors the traffic transmitted on COM TX Port DROP TX: fibre connected to 40-DMX for local chs drop ADD RX: fibre connected to 40- MUX or xx-WSS for local chs Add EXP TX: internal connection TO Mesh PP COM RX: line RX interface FROM Pre-Amplifier COM TX: line TX interface TO Booster Amplifier 10-70 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Figure 10-29 40-WXC-C Optical Module Functional Block Diagram 10.12.2 40-WXC-C Power Monitoring The 40-WXC-C has 83 physical diodes (P1 through P40) that monitor power at the outputs of the card. Table 10-32 describes the physical diodes. WXC optical module COM TX ADD RX Virtual PDi3 P5 Table 10-32 40-WXC-C Physical Photodiode Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) P1 DROP DROP TX P2 EXP EXP RX PDi31 1. i indicates any channel from 01 through 40. RX Add i RX ports (that is, channel input Add i RX power), up to 40 ports and therefore 40 PDs1 PDi41 TX COM TX port (that is, per channel output COM TX power) up to 40 channels and therefore 40 PDs PD5 COM COM TX port (that is, total output COM TX power) 10-71 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. Additionally, the 40-WXC-C has two virtual diodes. Virtual diodes are monitor points for each physical photodiode; they are identified with a physical diode relative to the way that the physical diode is identified with one of the two interlink (ILK) ports. Table 10-33 lists the virtual diodes. The usage of WXC and mesh PP power readings to troubleshoot a LOS-P in WXC COM TX port in Side A is described in the following example. The example is explained assuming a single wavelength 1558.17 in the setup that comes from Side H to Side A. If there is more than one wavelength, then there is a risk of dropping traffic when pulling common fibers. The example is explained below: When the wavelength from side H is 1558.17, you can check the power reading at WXC EXP TX port of the WXC card and verify the consistency with side H pre output power and WXC COMRX-EXPTX port loss. You can also check with a power meter connected to the 8th fiber (since it is from side H) of an MPO-FC (or LC) cable connected to the TAP-TX port of the MESH-PP. This value should be consistent with the previous reading, less than the insertion loss of the installed PP-MESH. If it is consistent, the issue is with the MPO between side A WXC and PP-MESH. If it is not consistent, the issue is with the PP-MESH or the LC-LC from side H. With only the PP-MESH already tested during installation, the only issue can be with the patch cord b. You can check if the 1558.17 wavelength from side H is unequalized (that is, if the channel is not aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels) by keeping the DMX COM-RX port of side H in maintenance, and checking both the signal and ASE levels of CHAN-TX ports of the DMX card. If the channel is equalized (that is, if the channel is aligned with the linear fit of the power values of the other channels), then the issue is in the WXC side A that cannot properly regulate the VOA for such channel. If the channel is unequalized, then the issue is on a remote node. Note With an OSA or a spare 40 DMX, you can see the light coming from all the sides from TAP-TX of the PP-MESH. 10.12.3 40-WXC-C Channel Plan Table 10-34 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross connected by the 40-WXC-C card. Table 10-33 40-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD1 COM COM RX port (total input COM RX power) VPD2 EXP EXP TX port (total output EXP TX power) 10-72 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 40-WXC-C Card Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) Ch. 01 29.5 196 1529.55 B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 10-73 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 10.12.4 40-WXC-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.12.5 Related Procedures for 40-WXC-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-WXC-C card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79 10.13 80-WXC-C Card (Cisco ONS 15454 and ONS 15454 M6 only) B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 1. This channel is unused by the 40-WXC-C Table 10-34 40-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-74 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card Note For 80-WXC-C card specifications, see the “80-WXC-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. The double-slot 80-channel Wavelength Cross-Connect C-band (80-WXC-C) card manages up to 80 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced channels identified in the channel plan (Table 10-10 on page 10-13) and sends them to dedicated output ports. Each channel can be selected from any input port to any output port. The card is optically passive, and provides bidirectional capability. It can be installed in Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 the ONS 15454 chassis and Slots 2 to 6 in the ONS 15454 M6 chassis. The 80-WXC-C card provides the following functionalities: • When used in the multiplexer or bidirectional mode, the 80-WXC-C card allows selection of a single wavelength or any combination of wavelengths from any of the nine input ports to the common output port. • When used in the bidirectional mode, the output wavelength from the COM-RX port is split to manage the express and drop wavelengths. • When used in the demultiplexer mode, the 80-WXC-C card, allows selection of a single wavelength or a combination of wavelengths from the common input port to any of the nine output ports. • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port. • Per-channel (closed loop) power regulation on the output port based on OCM block feedback. • Per-channel (open loop) attenuation regulation on the output port which is not based on the OCM feedback. The OCM unit provides per-channel optical power monitoring on the following ports: • COM port in output direction • COM port in input direction • DROP-TX port in output direction • Eight Express/Add/Drop (EAD) ports and one Add/Drop (AD) port in both input and output directions 10.13.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The 80-WXC-C card has 14 types of ports: • MON: The MON port monitors power on the COM T/R port. • COM RX: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from a preamplifier (such as the OPT-PRE) and sends it to the optical splitter. • DROP TX: In the bidirectional mode, the DROP TX port sends the optical signal to the demultiplexer. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE. • COM T/R: The COM port is bidirectional. It functions as a COM TX port in the multiplexer mode and as a COM RX port in the demultiplexer mode. • AD T/R: The AD port functions as ADD RX port in bidirectional and multiplexer modes and as a DROP port in the demultiplexer mode. 10-75 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card • EAD T/R i (where i = 1 to 8): The EAD ports function as EXP ports in the bidirectional mode, as ADD ports in the multiplexer mode, and as DROP ports in the demultiplexer mode. Figure 10-30 shows the 80-WXC-C card faceplate and the optical module functional block diagram. Figure 10-30 80-WXC-C Faceplate and the Optical Module Functional Block Diagram COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 5 6 7 ADD / DROP 8 3 4 EXP DROP TX RX COM TX 1 2 R/T COM T/R MON FAIL ACT SF 80-WXC-C EXP / ADD / DROP R/T R/T R/T R/T 249126 VPD4 VPD3 VOA DROP_TX OCM 12 PD2 EAD 1...8 OCM 1...9 AD DROP TX EXP TX COM RX MON COM LC connectors Variable optical attenuator OUT OCM 10 OCM 11 1 10 PD1 9 40/60 12x1 Optical Switch OCM WXC 10-76 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card The different units of the 80-WXC-C card are: • 40/60 splitter with VOA on drop path—The preamplifier output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 40%-to-60% ratio; 40% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port) and 60% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photodiode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 80-WXC-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C or a 40-WXC-C card. • 50 Ghz 10 port WXC—The WXC block is optically passive and has bidirectional capability. The WXC block can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from the eight input EAD ports and one AD port to a common (COM) output port, when used as a multiplexer, whereas it can selectively send any wavelength combination coming from its common (COM) input port to any of the eight output EAD ports and one AD port, when used as a demultiplexer. The WXC block can manage (on each port) up to 80 channels according to the channel grid reported in Table 10-37. Each channel can be selected from any input and routed to any output. • 50 Ghz Optical Channel Monitor (OCM)—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the COM T/R, DROP-TX, AD, and EADi (i=1 to 8) ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. 10.13.2 80-WXC-C Power Monitoring The 80-WXC-C has two physical photodiodes and an OCM unit that monitors power at the different ports of the card. Table 10-35 describes the physical photodiodes. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, see the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in the Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. Table 10-35 80-WXC-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 COM Total Power COM PD2 EXP-TX Total Power EXP-TX OCM1 EAD 1 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-1 OCM2 EAD 2 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-2 OCM3 EAD 3 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-3 OCM4 EAD 4 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-4 OCM5 EAD 5 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-5 OCM6 EAD 6 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-6 OCM7 EAD 7 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-7 OCM8 EAD 8 Per-Channel and Total Power EAD-8 OCM9 AD Per-Channel and Total Power AD OCM10 Output Per-Channel and Total Power COM OCM11 Input Per-Channel and Total Power COM OCM12 Drop Per-Channel and Total Power DROP-TX 10-77 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card Additionally, the 80-WXC-C has two virtual photodiodes. Table 10-36 lists the virtual photodiodes. 10.13.3 80-WXC-C Channel Plan Table 10-37 shows the 80 ITU-T 50-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) that are cross connected by the 80-WXC-C card. Table 10-36 80-WXC-C Virtual Photodiode Port Calibration Virtual Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) VPD3 DROP-TX Total Power DROP-TX VPD4 COM-RX Total Power COM-RX Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Ch. 01 - 196 1529.55 30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 30.7 195.85 1530.72 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.5 195.75 1531.51 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.3 195.65 1532.29 32.7 195.6 1532.68 33.1 195.55 1533.07 33.5 195.5 1533.47 33.9 195.45 1533.86 34.3 34.3 195.4 1534.25 34.6 195.35 1534.64 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.4 195.25 1535.43 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.2 195.15 1536.22 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.0 195.05 1537 37.4 195 1537.40 37.8 194.95 1537.79 10-78 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 38.2 38.2 194.9 1538.19 38.6 194.85 1538.58 39.0 194.8 1538.98 39.4 194.75 1539.37 39.8 194.7 1539.77 40.2 194.65 1540.16 40.6 194.6 1540.56 41.0 194.55 1540.95 41.3 194.5 1541.35 41.7 194.45 1541.75 42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.5 194.35 1542.94 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.3 194.25 1543.33 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.1 194.15 1544.13 44.5 194.1 1544.53 44.9 194.05 1544.92 45.3 194 1545.32 45.7 193.95 1545.72 46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.5 193.85 1546.52 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.3 193.75 1547.32 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.1 193.65 1548.11 48.5 193.6 1548.51 48.9 193.55 1548.91 49.3 193.5 1549.32 49.7 193.45 1549.72 Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 10-79 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards 80-WXC-C Card 10.13.4 80-WXC-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.5 193.35 1550.52 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.3 193.25 1551.32 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.1 193.15 1552.12 52.5 193.1 1552.52 52.9 193.05 1552.93 53.3 193 1553.33 53.7 192.95 1553.73 54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.5 192.85 1554.54 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.3 192.75 1555.34 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.2 192.65 1556.15 56.6 192.6 1556.55 57.0 192.55 1556.96 57.4 192.5 1557.36 57.8 192.45 1557.77 58.2 58.2 192.4 1558.17 58.6 192.35 1558.58 59.0 192.3 1558.98 59.4 192.25 1559.39 59.8 192.2 1559.79 60.2 192.15 1560.20 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.0 192.05 1561.01 61.4 192 1561.42 61.8 191.95 1561.83 1. This channel is unused by the 80-WXC-C Table 10-37 80-WXC-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 10-80 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10.13.5 Related Procedures for 80-WXC-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 80-WXC-C card: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G174 Modify the 40-WXC-C or 80-WXC-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-79 10.14 Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards Note For the 40-SMR1-C or 40-SMR2-C card specifications, see the “40-SMR1-C Card Specifications” or “40-SMR2-C Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. Note For 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C safety label information, see the “10.2 Safety Labels” section on page 10-15. The single-slot 40-channel single module ROADM (SMR-C) cards integrate the following functional blocks onto a single line card: • Optical preamplifier • Optical booster amplifier • Optical service channel (OSC) filter • 2x1 wavelength cross-connect (WXC) or a 4x1 WXC • Optical channel monitor (OCM) The SMR-C cards are available in two versions: • 10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card • 10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card The SMR-C cards can manage up to 40 channels spaced at 100GHz on each port according to the channel grid in Table 10-10. The cards can be installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 10.14.1 SMR-C Card Key Features The optical amplifier units in the SMR-C cards provide the following features: • Embedded gain flattening filter 10-81 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • Mid-stage access for dispersion compensation unit (only applicable for preamplifier erbium-doped fiber amplifier [EDFA]) • Fixed output power mode • Fixed gain mode • Nondistorting low-frequency transfer function • Amplified spontaneous emissions (ASE) compensation in fixed gain and fixed output power mode • Fast transient suppression • Programmable tilt (only applicable for preamplifier EDFA) • Full monitoring and alarm handling capability • Optical safety support through signal loss detection and alarm at any input port, fast power down control, and reduced maximum output power in safe power mode. • EDFA section calculates the signal power, by taking into account the expected ASE power contribution to the total output power. The signal output power or the signal gain can be used as feedback signals for the EDFA pump power control loop. The 1x2 WXC unit (40-SMR1-C card) provides the following features: • Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXP-RX or ADD-RX ports • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port • Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit • Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port The 1x4 WXC unit (40-SMR2-C card) provides the following features: • Selection of individual wavelength of the aggregated 100GHz signal from either the EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) or ADD-RX ports • Automatic VOA shutdown (AVS) blocking state on each wavelength and port • Per-channel power regulation based on external OCM unit • Open loop path attenuation control for each wavelength and port The OCM unit provides per channel optical power monitoring at EXP-RX, ADD-RX, DROP-TX, and LINE-TX ports. 10.14.2 40-SMR1-C Card The 40-SMR1-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x2 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier unit (single EDFA). 10.14.2.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The 40-SMR1-C card has the following types of ports: • MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port. • MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port. • DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU) and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input. • DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU. 10-82 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port. • ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section of the NE. • LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port. • LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port. • EXP RX: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to the 1x2 WXC unit. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE. Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR1-C card faceplate. Figure 10-31 40-SMR1-C Faceplate Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR1-C card. HAZARD LEVEL 1M OSC DC EXP MON RX TX ADD & DROP RX TX LINE RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX FAIL ACT SF 40-SMR 1-C COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 276440 10-83 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards Figure 10-32 40-SMR1-C Block Diagram The different units of the 40-SMR1-C card are: • OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel. • Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses (5 dB to 35 dB). • 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio, 70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 40-SMR1-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port either by a 40-WSS-C, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card. • 1x2 WXC—The 1x2 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received from either its ADD-RX or EXP-RX port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x2 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor the optical power. • OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXP-RX, ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX OSC-RX ADD-RX OCM Block OCM4 OCM3 OCM2 OCM1 VOA3 VOA2 LINE TX LINE RX MON-TX EXP-RX EXP-TX MON-RX EDFA 1 (variable Gain VOA1 30% 70% OSC DROP PD2 PD3 PD4 TAP PD5 TAP TAP PD8 OSC TAP ADD TAP TAP 276446 TAP PD6 WXC Block PD1 LC connector 10-84 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10.14.2.2 40-SMR1-C Power Monitoring The 40-SMR1-C card has seven physical diodes (PD1 through PD6 and PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-38). 10.14.2.3 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan Table 10-39 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the 40-SMR1-C card. Table 10-38 40-SMR1-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 LINE LINE-RX PD2 LINE LINE-RX PD3 DC DC-TX PD4 DC DC-RX PD5 EXP EXP-TX PD6 OSC OSC-RX PD8 LINE LINE-TX OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX OCM4 EXP OCH EXP-RX Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 10-85 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10.14.3 40-SMR2-C Card The 40-SMR2-C card includes a 100Ghz 1x4 WXC unit with integrated preamplifier and booster amplifier units (double EDFA). B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 10-39 40-SMR1-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-86 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards 10.14.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The 40-SMR2-C card has the following types of ports: • MON RX: The MON RX port monitors power on the EXP-TX output port. • MON TX: The MON TX port monitors power on the LINE-TX output port. • DC RX: The DC RX port receives the optical signal from the dispersion compensating unit (DCU) and sends it to the second stage preamplifier input. • DC TX: The DC TX port sends the optical signal from the first stage preamplifier output to the DCU. • OSC RX: The OSC RX port is the OSC add input port. • OSC TX: The OSC TX port is the OSC drop output port. • ADD/DROP RX: The ADD RX port receives the optical signal from the multiplexer section of the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit. • ADD/DROP TX: The DROP TX port sends the split off optical signal to the demultiplexer section of the NE. • LINE RX: The LINE RX port is the input signal port. • LINE TX: The LINE TX port is the output signal port. • EXP TX: The EXP TX port sends the split off optical signal that contains pass-through channels to the other side of the NE. • EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3): The EXPi-RX port receives the optical signal from the other side of the NE and sends it to the 1x4 WXC unit. Figure 10-31 shows the 40-SMR2-C card faceplate. Figure 10-33 40-SMR2-C Faceplate Figure 10-32 shows a block diagram of the 40-SMR2-C card. 276441 EXP OSC DC RX TX ADD & DROP RX TX LINE RX TX RX TX RX TX MON FAIL ACT SF 40-SMR 2-C COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 HAZARD LEVEL 1M 10-87 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards Figure 10-34 40-SMR2-C Block Diagram The different units of the 40-SMR2-C card are: • OSC filter—The OSC filter allows to add an OSC channel to the C-band in the transmission path and to drop an OSC channel on the receiving path. The OSCM card that is connected to the OSC-TX and OSC-RX ports generates the OSC channel. • Double-stage variable gain EDFA preamplifier—The double-stage preamplifier allows the insertion of a DCU between the DC-TX and DC-RX ports to compensate for chromatic dispersion. It is also equipped with built-in variable optical attenuator (VOA) and gain flattening filter (GFF) that provides tilt compensation and enables the use of this device over an extended range of span losses (5 dB to 35 dB). • 70/30 splitter and VOA—The output signal from the preamplifier is split in a 70%-to-30% ratio, 70% is sent on the pass-through path (EXP-TX port) and 30% is sent on the drop path (DROP-TX port). The VOA equipped on the drop path is used to match the power range of the receiver photo diode without the need for bulk attenuation. If a channel is expected to be dropped in the 40-SMR2-C card, the pass-through channel is stopped after the EXP-TX port by a 40-WSS-C, 40-SMR1-C, or 40-SMR2-C card. • 1x4 WXC—The 1x4 WXC aggregates on its output port a 100-GHz-spaced optical channel received from either its ADD-RX or EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3) port. In addition to the switching function, the 1x4 WXC allows to set a different per channel power for each of the managed wavelengths and also monitor the optical power. OSC-TX DC-TX DC-RX DROP-TX OSC-RX ADD-RX LINE TX LINE RX MON-TX EXP1-RX EXP2-RX EXP3-RX MON-RX EDFA 1 (Variable Gain) EDFA 2 (Fixed Gain) 30% 70% OSC DROP PD2 PD3 PD4 TAP PD5 TAP TAP PD8 PD7 OSC TAP ADD TAP 276447 TAP PD6 4x1 WXC Block PD1 TAP TAP LC connector MPO connector EXP-TX 6 ports OCM Block 10-88 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards • Single-stage fixed gain EDFA booster amplifier—The booster amplifier amplifies the output signal from the 1x4 WXC unit before transmitting it into the fiber. Since it is a fixed gain (17 dB) amplifier, it does not allow gain tilt control. • OCM—The OCM provides per channel power monitoring on the DROP-RX, EXPi-RX (where i = 1, 2, 3), ADD-RX, and LINE-TX ports. The power value for each wavelength is refreshed after a variable timer depending on the port and card activity. 10.14.3.2 40-SMR2-C Power Monitoring The 40-SMR2-C card has eight physical diodes (PD1 through PD8) and an OCM unit that monitors power at the input and output ports of the card (see Table 10-40). 10.14.3.3 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan Table 10-41 shows the 40 ITU-T 100-GHz-spaced, C-band channels (wavelengths) supported by the 40-SMR2-C card. Table 10-40 40-SMR2-C Port Calibration Physical Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port(s) PD1 LINE LINE-RX PD2 LINE LINE-RX PD3 DC DC-TX PD4 DC DC-RX PD5 EXP EXP-TX PD6 OSC OSC-RX PD7 Not reported on CTC Internal port PD8 LINE LINE-TX OCM1 LINE OCH LINE-TX OCM2 DROP OCH DROP-TX OCM3 ADD OCH ADD-RX OCM4 EXP-1 OCH EXP1-RX OCM5 EXP-2 OCH EXP2-RX OCM6 EXP-3 OCH EXP3-RX Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) B30.3 30.3 195.9 1530.33 31.1 195.8 1531.12 31.9 195.7 1531.90 32.6 195.6 1532.68 33.4 195.5 1533.47 10-89 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards Single Module ROADM (SMR-C) Cards B34.2 34.2 195.4 1534.25 35.0 195.3 1535.04 35.8 195.2 1535.82 36.6 195.1 1536.61 37.4 195 1537.40 B38.1 38.1 194.9 1538.19 38.9 194.8 1538.98 39.7 194.7 1539.77 40.5 194.6 1540.56 41.3 194.5 1541.35 B42.1 42.1 194.4 1542.14 42.9 194.3 1542.94 43.7 194.2 1543.73 44.5 194.1 1544.53 45.3 194 1545.32 B46.1 46.1 193.9 1546.12 46.9 193.8 1546.92 47.7 193.7 1547.72 48.5 193.6 1548.51 49.3 193.5 1549.32 B50.1 50.1 193.4 1550.12 50.9 193.3 1550.92 51.7 193.2 1551.72 52.5 193.1 1552.52 53.3 193 1553.33 B54.1 54.1 192.9 1554.13 54.9 192.8 1554.94 55.7 192.7 1555.75 56.5 192.6 1556.55 57.3 192.5 1557.36 B58.1 58.1 192.4 1558.17 58.9 192.3 1558.98 59.7 192.2 1559.79 60.6 192.1 1560.61 61.4 192 1561.42 Table 10-41 40-SMR2-C Channel Plan (continued) Band ID Channel Label Frequency (GHz) Wavelength (nm) 10-90 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card 10.14.4 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.14.5 Related Procedures for 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the 40-SMR-1C and 40-SMR-2C cards: • NTP-G140 Install Fiber-Optic Cables Between Terminal, Hub, or ROADM Nodes, page 14-82 • NTP-G185 Install Fiber-Optic Cables between Mesh Nodes, page 14-101 • NTP-G152 Create and Verify Internal Patchcords, page 14-113 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G243 Perform the Two-Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-1-C and OPT-AMP-17-C Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-147 • NTP-G244 Perform the Four Degree ROADM Node with 40-SMR-2-C Cards Acceptance Test, page 21-151 • NTP-G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, page 16-40 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • DLP- G141 View Optical Power Statistics for 32MUX-O, 32WSS, 32WSS-L, 32DMX-O, 32DMX, 32DMX-L, 40-WSS-C, 40-WSS-CE, 40-WXC-C, 80-WXC-C, 40-MUX-C, 40-DMX-C, and 40-DMX-CE Cards • NTP-G241 Modify the 40-SMR1-C and 40-SMR2-C Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-94 10.15 MMU Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The single-slot Mesh Multi-Ring Upgrade Module (MMU) card supports multiring and mesh upgrades for ROADM nodes in both the C-band and the L-band. Mesh/multiring upgrade is the capability to optically bypass a given wavelength from one section of the network or ring to another one without requiring 3R regeneration. In each node, you need to install one east MMU and one west MMU. The card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 and 12 through 17. Note For MMU card specifications, see the “MMU Card Specifications” section in the Hardware Specifications document. 10.15.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram The MMU has six types of ports: • EXP RX port: The EXP RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on the NE. 10-91 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card • EXP TX port: The EXP TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on the NE. • EXP-A RX port: The EXP-A RX port receives the optical signal from the ROADM section available on other NEs or rings. • EXP-A TX port: The EXP-A TX port sends the optical signal to the ROADM section available on other NEs or rings. • COM TX port: The COM TX port sends the optical signal to the fiber stage section. • COM RX port: The COM RX port receives the optical signal from the fiber stage section. Figure 10-35 shows the MMU card faceplate. 10-92 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card Figure 10-35 MMU Faceplate and Ports Figure 10-36 provides a high-level functional block diagram of the MMU card. 145190 ACT FAIL MMU SF RX TX EXP A RX TX EXP RX TX COM 10-93 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card Figure 10-36 MMU Block Diagram 10.15.2 MMU Power Monitoring Physical photodiodes P1 through P3 monitor the power for the MMU card. The returned power level values are calibrated to the ports as shown in Table 10-42. VP1 to VP3 are virtual photodiodes that have been created by adding (by software computation) the relevant path insertion losses of the optical splitters (stored in the module) to the real photodiode (P1 to P3) measurement. For information on the associated TL1 AIDs for the optical power monitoring points, refer the “CTC Port Numbers and TL1 Aids” section in Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide, Release 9.2.1. 10.15.3 MMU Card Functions • Card level indicators—Table G-4 on page G-9 • “G.4 Port-Level Indicators” section on page G-9 10.15.4 Related Procedures for MMU Card The following section lists procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MMU card: 145191 COM TX VPD2 75/25 PD1 EXP RX PD2 EXP A RX COM RX VPD3 95/5 VPD1 95/5 EXP TX Legend LC PC II Connector Optical splitter/coupler Real photodiode Virtual photodiode PD3 EXP A TX Table 10-42 MMU Port Calibration Photodiode CTC Type Name Calibrated to Port P1 1 (EXP-RX) EXP RX P2 5 (EXP A-RX) EXP A RX P3 6 (EXP A-TX) EXP A TX VP1 2 (EXP-TX) EXP TX VP2 4 (COM-TX) COM TX VP3 3 (COM-RX) COM RX 10-94 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 10 Provision Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Cards MMU Card • NTP-G34 Install Fiber-Optic Cables on DWDM Cards and DCUs, page 14-78 • NTP-G37 Run Automatic Node Setup, page 14-127 • NTP-G51 Verify DWDM Node Turn Up, page 15-2 • NTP-G149 Modify the MMU Line Settings and PM Thresholds, page 20-114 CH A P T E R 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note The terms “Unidirectional Path Switched Ring” and “UPSR” may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as “Path Protected Mesh Network” and “PPMN,” refer generally to Cisco’s path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration. Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration. This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, and AR_XP cards, as well as their associated plug-in modules (Small Form-factor Pluggables [SFPs or XFPs]). For card safety and compliance information, see the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco CPT and Cisco ONS Platforms. Note Unless otherwise specified, “ONS 15454” refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies. Note The cards described in this chapter are supported on the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M6, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Note The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise. Chapter topics include: • 11.1 Card Overview, page 11-3 • 11.2 Safety Labels, page 11-10 • 11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-10 • 11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card, page 11-14 • 11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-14 • 11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card, page 11-16 • 11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-16 • 11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards, page 11-18 • 11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-18 11-2 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards • 11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-23 • 11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-23 • 11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards, page 11-25 • 11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-25 • 11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card, page 11-28 • 11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-28 • 11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card, page 11-32 • 11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-32 • 11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards, page 11-38 • 11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-39 • 11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards, page 11-44 • 11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards, page 11-44 • 11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards, page 11-51 • 11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-52 • 11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards, page 11-58 • 11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-58 • 11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-82 • 11.15 ADM-10G Card, page 11-83 • 11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card, page 11-96 • 11.16 OTU2_XP Card, page 11-97 • 11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card, page 11-105 • 11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-105 • 11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card, page 11-108 • 11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card, page 11-108 • 11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card, page 11-112 • 11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-112 • 11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card, page 11-118 • 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards, page 11-119 • 11.21 MLSE UT, page 11-142 • 11.22 SFP and XFP Modules, page 11-142 Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1 interfaces. 1. 5G DDR InfiniBand is referred to as IB_5G. 11-3 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview 11.1 Card Overview The card overview section lists the cards described in this chapter and provides compatibility information. Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. For a list of slots and symbols, see the “Card Slot Requirements” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide. The purpose of a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is to convert the “gray” optical client interface signals into trunk signals that operate in the “colored” dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) wavelength range. Client-facing gray optical signals generally operate at shorter wavelengths, whereas DWDM colored optical signals are in the longer wavelength range (for example, 1490 nm = violet; 1510 nm = blue; 1530 nm = green; 1550 nm = yellow; 1570 nm = orange; 1590 nm = red; 1610 nm = brown). Some of the newer client-facing SFPs, however, operate in the colored region. Transponding or muxponding is the process of converting the signals between the client and trunk wavelengths. An MXP generally handles several client signals. It aggregates, or multiplexes, lower rate client signals together and sends them out over a higher rate trunk port. Likewise, it demultiplexes optical signals coming in on a trunk and sends them out to individual client ports. A TXP converts a single client signal to a single trunk signal and converts a single incoming trunk signal to a single client signal. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as TXPs, as MXPs, or as Layer 2 switches. All of the TXP and MXP cards perform optical to electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. As a result, they are not optically transparent cards. The reason for this is that the cards must operate on the signals passing through them, so it is necessary to do an OEO conversion. On the other hand, the termination mode for all of the TXPs and MXPs, which is done at the electrical level, can be configured to be transparent. In this case, neither the Line nor the Section overhead is terminated. The cards can also be configured so that either Line or Section overhead can be terminated, or both can be terminated. Note The MXP_2.5G_10G card, by design, when configured in the transparent termination mode, actually does terminate some of the bytes. See Table G-17 on page G-33 for details. 11.1.1 Card Summary Table 11-1 lists and summarizes the functions of each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card. Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Port Description For Additional Information TXP_MR_10G The TXP_MR_10G card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card” section on page 11-10. TXP_MR_10E The TXP_MR_10E card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card” section on page 11-14. 11-4 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards have two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-16. TXP_MR_2.5G The TXP_MR_2.5G card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18. TXPP_MR_2.5G The TXPP_MR_2.5G card has three sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-18. 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards have two ports located on the face plate. See the “11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards” section on page 11-23. MXP_2.5G_10G The MXP_2.5G_10G card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card” section on page 11-25. MXP_2.5G_10E The MXP_2.5G_10E card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card” section on page 11-28. MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards” section on page 11-32. MXP_MR_2.5G The MXP_MR_2.5G card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39. MXPP_MR_2.5G The MXPP_MR_2.5G card has ten sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards” section on page 11-39. MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards” section on page 11-44. 40G-MXP-C 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards have five ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards” section on page 11-52. AR_MXP and AR_XP The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have ten ports located on the faceplate. See the 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards, page 11-119. GE_XP and GE_XPE The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. See the “11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-58. ADM-10G The ADM-10G card has 19 sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.15 ADM-10G Card” section on page 11-83. OTU2_XP The OTU2_XP card has four ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.16 OTU2_XP Card” section on page 11-97. TXP_MR_10EX_C The TXP_MR_10EX_C card has two sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card” section on page 11-105. Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information 11-5 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview MXP_2.5G_10EX_C The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has nine sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card” section on page 11-108. MXP_MR_10DMEX_C The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has eight sets of ports located on the faceplate. See the “11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card” section on page 11-112. Table 11-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Transponder and Muxponder Cards (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information 11-6 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview 11.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 11-2 lists the platform and Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software compatibility for each TXP, TXPP, MXP, MXPP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP card. Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 TXP_MR_10G 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM TXP_MR_10E No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM TXP_MR_10E_C No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM TXP_MR_10E_L No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM TXP_MR_2.5G 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM TXPP_MR_2.5G 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_2.5G_10G 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 11-7 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview MXP_2.5G_10E No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_2.5G_10E_C No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_2.5G_10E_L No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM MXP_MR_2.5G No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXPP_MR_2.5G No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_MR_10DME_C No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_MR_10DME_L No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM 15454- DWDM Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 11-8 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 10GE_XP No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 10GE_XPE No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM ADM-10G No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM OTU2_XP No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 11-9 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Overview TXP_MR_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_2.5G_10EX_C No No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM MXP_MR_10DMEX_ C No No No No No No No No No No 1545 4-DW DM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40E-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40ME-TXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40G-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 11-10 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Safety Labels 11.2 Safety Labels For information about safety labels, see the “G.1 Safety Labels” section on page G-1. 11.3 TXP_MR_10G Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The TXP_MR_10G processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 10-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an STM-64/OC-192 short reach (1310-nm) signal, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, or a 10GBASE-LR signal compliant with IEEE 802.3. 40E-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 40ME-MXP-C No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM AR_MXP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM AR_XP No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 15454- M2, 15454- M6, 15454- DWDM Table 11-2 Platform and Software Release Compatibility for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Card Name R4.5 R4.6 R4.7 R5.0 R6.0 R7.0 R7.2 R8.0 R8.5 R9.0 R9.1 R9.2 R9.2.1 R9.3 R9.4 11-11 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card The TXP_MR_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The trunk port operates at 9.95328 Gbps (or 10.70923 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) and at 10.3125 Gbps (or 11.095 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_10G card does not display circuits under card view. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10G card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10G card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10G card. You can install TXP_MR_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)/Multiplex Section - Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRing), a path protection/single node control point (SNCP), or a regenerator. They can only be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing and 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10G port features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk port and a 1310-nm laser for the for the client port and contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. The TXP_MR_10G card has the following available wavelengths and versions: • ITU grid blue band: – 1538.19 to 1538.98 nm, 10T-L1-38.1 – 1539.77 to 1540.56 nm, 10T-L1-39.7 – 1530.33 to 1531.12 nm, 10T-L1-30.3 – 1531.90 to 1532.68 nm, 10T-L1-31.9 – 1534.25 to 1535.04 nm, 10T-L1-34.2 – 1535.82 to 1536.61 nm, 10T-L1-35.8 – 1542.14 to 1542.94 nm, 10T-L1-42.1 – 1543.73 to 1544.53 nm, 10T-L1-43.73 • ITU grid red band: – 1554.13 to 1554.94 nm, 10T-L1-54.1 11-12 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card – 1555.75 to 1556.55 nm, 10T-L1-55.7 – 1546.12 to 1546.92 nm, 10T-L1-46.1 – 1547.72 to 1548.51 nm, 10T-L1-47.7 – 1550.12 to 1550.92 nm, 10T-L1-50.1 – 1551.72 to 1552.52 nm, 10T-L1-51.7 – 1558.17 to 1558.98 nm, 10T-L1-58.1 – 1559.79 to 1560.61 nm, 10T-L1-59.7 11.3.1 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-1 shows the TXP_MR_10G faceplate and block diagram. 11-13 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10G Card Figure 11-1 TXP_MR_10G Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. 11.3.2 TXP_MR_10G Functions The functions of the TXP_MR_10G card are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-7 on page G-10 uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 145948 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 SR-1 optics modules or 10GBASE-LR Backplane DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 10G MR TXP 1530.33 - 1531.12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX CLIENT 1530.33 1531.12 DWDM TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm 11-14 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card 11.3.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10G Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10G card: • NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-191 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.4 TXP_MR_10E Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The card is fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G card. It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side) that is tunable over four wavelength channels (spaced at 100 GHz on the ITU grid) in the C band and tunable over eight wavelength channels (spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) in the L band. There are eight versions of the C-band card, with each version covering four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 wavelengths. There are five versions of the L-band card, with each version covering eight wavelengths, for a total coverage of 40 wavelengths. You can install TXP_MR_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10E card features a 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E card must be installed in Slots 6, 7, 12 or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 11.4.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10E card are: • A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately) – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 11-15 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E Card 11.4.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-2 shows the TXP_MR_10E faceplate and block diagram. Figure 11-2 TXP_MR_10E Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_10E card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_10E card. 11.4.3 TXP_MR_10E Functions The functions of the TXP_MR_10E card are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10 • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15 uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 131186 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10 Gb/s TP 1538.19 1538.98 Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) Backplane TX RX RX TX DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 4 tunable channels (C-band) or 8 tunable channels (L-band) on the 100-GHz ITU grid 11-16 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17 11.4.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10E card: • NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-191 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.5 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards TXP_MR_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are multirate transponders for the ONS 15454 platform. The cards are fully backward compatible with the TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards. They processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10E_C is tunable over the entire set of C-band wavelength channels (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). The TXP_MR_10E_L is tunable over the entire set of L-band wavelength channels (80 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid) and is particularly well suited for use in networks that employ DS fiber or SMF-28 single-mode fiber. The advantage of these cards over previous versions (TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E) is that there is only one version of each card (one C-band version and one L-band version) instead of several versions needed to cover each band. You can install TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the cards in a linear configuration, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards feature a universal transponder 2 (UT2) 1550-nm tunable laser (C band) or a UT2 1580-nm tunable laser (L band) for the trunk port and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E-L card is required to be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards contain two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 11.5.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are: • A tri-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately): 11-17 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) • A UT2 module tunable through the entire C band (TXP_MR_10E_C card) or L band (TXP_MR_10E_L card). The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid. • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping. • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 11.5.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-3 shows the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L faceplates and block diagram. Figure 11-3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 134975 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) Backplane DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 82 tunable channels (C-band) or 80 tunable channels (L-band) on the 50-GHz ITU grid FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP L TX RX RX TX FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP C TX RX RX TX 11-18 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10E_C or TXP_MR_10E_L card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the cards. 11.5.3 TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Functions The functions of the TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L cards are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10. • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15 • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17 11.5.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_10E_C and TXP_MR_10E_L: • NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-191 • DLP-G358 Provision TXP_MR_10E_L and TXP_MR_10E_C Cards for Acceptance Testing, page 21-24 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The TXP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into one 8-Mbps to 2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The TXPP_MR_2.5G card processes one 8-Mbps to 2.488-Gbps signal (client side) into two 8-Mbps to 2.5-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signals (trunk side). It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are tunable over four wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. They are available in eight versions, each of which covers four wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. 11-19 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it, and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The trunk/line port operates at up to 2.488 Gbps (or up to 2.66 Gbps with ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC) over unamplified distances up to 360 km (223.7 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or higher if dispersion compensation is used. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, a TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card does not display circuits under card view. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards support 2R (retime, regenerate) and 3R (retime, reshape, and regenerate) modes of operation where the client signal is mapped into a ITU-T G.709 frame. The mapping function is simply done by placing a digital wrapper around the client signal. Only OC-48/STM-16 client signals are fully ITU-T G.709 compliant, and the output bit rate depends on the input client signal. Table 11-45 shows the possible combinations of client interfaces, input bit rates, 2R and 3R modes, and ITU-T G.709 monitoring. Note ITU-T G.709 and FEC support is disabled for all the 2R payload types in the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Table 11-3 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709 OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R — 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON) 2.125 Gbps 3R1 1. No monitoring On or Off High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R — Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off 1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R — SDI/D1/DVB-ASI video 270 Mbps 2R — ISC-1 Compat 1.06 Gbps 2R Off ISC-3 1.06 or 2.125 Gbps 2R — ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R — 11-20 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The output bit rate is calculated for the trunk bit rate by using the 255/238 ratio as specified in ITU-T G.709 for OTU1. Table 11-4 lists the calculated trunk bit rates for the client interfaces with ITU-T G.709 enabled. For 2R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to pass data through transparently from client side interfaces to a trunk side interface, which resides on an ITU grid. The data might vary at any bit rate from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps, including ESCON, DVB-ASI, ISC-1, and video signals. In this pass-through mode, no performance monitoring (PM) or digital wrapping of the incoming signal is provided, except for the usual PM outputs from the SFPs. Similarly, this card has the ability to pass data through transparently from the trunk side interfaces to the client side interfaces with bit rates varying from 200-Mbps up to 2.38-Gbps. Again, no PM or digital wrapping of received signals is available in this pass-through mode. For 3R operation mode, the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards apply a digital wrapper to the incoming client interface signals (OC-N/STM-N, 1G-FC, 2G-FC, GE). PM is available on all of these signals except for 2G-FC, and varies depending upon the type of signal. For client inputs other than OC-48/STM-16, a digital wrapper might be applied but the resulting signal is not ITU-T G.709 compliant. The card applies a digital wrapper that is scaled to the frequency of the input signal. The TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards have the ability to take digitally wrapped signals in from the trunk interface, remove the digital wrapper, and send the unwrapped data through to the client interface. PM of the ITU-T G.709 OH and SONET/SDH OH is implemented. 11.6.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-4 shows the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates. Table 11-4 Trunk Bit Rates With ITU-T G.709 Enabled Client Interface ITU-T G.709 Disabled ITU-T G.709 Enabled OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 2.66 Gbps 2G-FC 2.125 Gbps 2.27 Gbps GE 1.25 Gbps 1.34 Gbps 1G-FC 1.06 Gbps 1.14 Gbps OC-12/STM-3 622 Mbps 666.43 Mbps OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 166.07 Mbps 11-21 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Figure 11-4 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Figure 11-5 shows a block diagram of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. CLIENT 2.5G MR TXP-P 1530.33 - 1532.68 2.5G MR TXP 1530.33 - 1532.68 FAIL ACT/STBY SF HAZARD LEVEL 1M RX TX DWDM A TX RX DWDM B TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm CLIENT ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm FAIL ACT/STBY SF HAZARD LEVEL 1M TX RX TX RX DWDM 145946 11-22 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Figure 11-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. You can install TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision this card in a linear configuration. TXP_MR_10G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards cannot be provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm laser for the client port. It contains two transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination. The TXPP_MR_2.5G card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client port and contains three transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors for optical cable termination. 11.6.2 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Functions The functions of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10 (for TXP_MR_2.5G) • Port level indicators—Table G-8 on page G-11 (for TXPP_MR_2.5G) SFP Client Switch Switch Driver Tunable Laser Switch Cross Switch Limiting Amp Limiting Amp Main APD+TA Protect APD+TA Mux Demux Mux Demux Mux Demux CPU Main ASIC Protect FPGA ASIC SCL FPGA SCL BUS 2R Tx path Trunk Out 2R Rx path CELL BUS CPU I/F CELL BUS DCC CPU to GCC 96636 11-23 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11.6.3 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration for both TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G: • NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-171 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (TXP_MR_2.5G only) • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.7 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards process a single 40-Gbps signal (client side) into a single 40-Gbps, 50-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one 40-Gbps port per card that can be provisioned for an OC-768/STM-256 very short reach (1550-nm) signal compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.691, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE, 40G Ethernet LAN signal compliant with IEEE 802.3ba, or OTU3 signal compliant with ITU-T G.709. The trunk port of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are tunable between 1529.55 nm through 1561.83 nm, ITU 50-GHz range. ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of forward error correction (FEC) that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the these cards. You can install and provision the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from PSM protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes. Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius. 11-24 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards 11.7.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-6 shows the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C faceplate and block diagram. Figure 11-6 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. 11.7.2 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Functions The functions of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 (supported on a client interface) • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10. 278758 40G-TXP-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF TRUNK CLIENT CLIENT HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 40 G FEC/EF EC OC7 G8/ OTUS VSR Trunk module TDC EDFA Tx Rx Trunk Rx Tx SFI 5.1 interface SFI 5.1 interface Threshold control Client TRUNK TX MX RX TX MX RX 11-25 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card 11.7.3 Related Procedures for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C: • NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-217 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The MXP_2.5G_10G card multiplexes/demultiplexes four 2.5-Gbps signals (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). It provides one extended long-range STM-64/OC-192 port per card on the trunk side (compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE) and four intermediate- or short-range OC-48/STM-16 ports per card on the client side. The port operates at 9.95328 Gbps over unamplified distances up to 80 km (50 miles) with different types of fiber such as C-SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and/or dispersion. Client ports on the MXP_2.5G_10G card are also interoperable with SONET OC-1 (STS-1) fiber optic signals defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE. An OC-1 signal is the equivalent of one DS-3 channel transmitted across optical fiber. OC-1 is primarily used for trunk interfaces to phone switches in the United States. There is no SDH equivalent for SONET OC-1. The MXP_2.5G_10G card is tunable over two neighboring wavelengths in the 1550-nm, ITU 100-GHz range. It is available in 16 different versions, each of which covers two wavelengths, for a total coverage of 32 different wavelengths in the 1550-nm range. Note ITU-T G.709 specifies a form of FEC that uses a “wrapper” approach. The digital wrapper lets you transparently take in a signal on the client side, wrap a frame around it and restore it to its original form. FEC enables longer fiber links because errors caused by the optical signal degrading with distance are corrected. The port can also operate at 10.70923 Gbps in ITU-T G.709 Digital Wrapper/FEC mode. Caution Because the transponder has no capability to look into the payload and detect circuits, an MXP_2.5G_10G card does not display circuits under card view. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_2.5G_10G card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_2.5G_10G card. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_2.5G_10G card. You can install MXP_2.5G_10G cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. 11-26 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Caution Do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1or 2. Likewise, do not install an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 17 if you have installed a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 15 or 16. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors. You can provision this card in a linear configuration. MXP_2.5G_10G cards cannot be provisioned as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. They can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans only when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10G port features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and SFP connectors on the client side for optical cable termination. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 11.8.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-7 shows the MXP_2.5G_10G faceplate. 11-27 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10G Card Figure 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10G Faceplate For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page G-1. Figure 11-8 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10G card. CLIENT DWDM 1 2 4x 2.5G 10G MXP 1530.33 - 1531.12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX TX RX 3 TX RX 4 TX RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 8 dBm TX RX 1530.33 1531.12 145945 11-28 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E Card Figure 11-8 MXP_2.5G_10G Card Block Diagram 11.8.2 MXP_2.5G_10G Functions The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10G card are: • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators— Table G-7 on page G-10 11.8.3 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10G Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10G: • NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-261 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.9 MXP_2.5G_10E Card The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10E MXP.” The MXP_2.5G_10E card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports full transparent termination the client side. The card multiplexes four 2.5 Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E provides wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. uP bus uP Flash RAM ASIC Optical STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver 9.953, 10.3125, 10.709, or 11.095 Gbps SCI 83659 Backplane Optical STM-64 / OC-192 Transceiver 9.95328 or 10.70923 Gbps Framer/FEC/DWDM Processor DWDM (Trunk) Client 11-29 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E Card The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up generic communications channels (GCCs) for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. The MXP_2.5G_10E works with optical transport network (OTN) devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. The MXP_2.5G_10E card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support full transparent termination. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision this card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10E features a 1550-nm laser on the trunk port and four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses a dual LC connector on the trunk side and uses SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are short reach (SR) or intermediate reach (IR) and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 11.9.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10E card has the following high level features: • Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard Reed-Solomon (RS, specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new block code (BCH) algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E card has modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • High level provisioning support: The MXP_2.5G_10E card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Link monitoring and management: The MXP_2.5G_10E card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. 11-30 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E Card • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available, the MXP_2.5G_10E automatically synchronizes to one of the input client interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages multiplex section alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) insertion. 11.9.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-9 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E faceplate. Figure 11-9 MXP_2.5G_10E Faceplate For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page G-1. 145937 FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MxP 530.33- 1550.12 RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX Client LEDs DWDM LED 11-31 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E Card Figure 11-10 shows a block diagram of the MXP_2.5G_10E card. Figure 11-10 MXP_2.5G_10E Block Diagram 11.9.3 MXP_2.5G_10E Functions The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E card are: • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15 • G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19 • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • G.15 Jitter, page G-19 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10. uP bus Serial bus Processor Onboard Flash memory RAM Optical transceiver 115357 FEC/ Wrapper Processor (G.709 FEC) E-FEC DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR) SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Backplane 11-32 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11.9.3.1 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wave-locked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Table 11-5 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths. The laser is tunable over eight wavelengths at 50-GHz spacing or four at 100-GHz spacing. 11.9.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E Card: • NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-261 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.10 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are DWDM muxponders for the ONS 15454 platform that support transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the cards is “4x2.5G 10E MXP C” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card and “4x2.5G 10E MXP L” for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The cards multiplex four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4 x OC48/STM-16 SFP) into Table 11-5 MXP_2.5G_10E Trunk Wavelengths Band Wavelength (nm) Band Wavelength (nm) 30.3 1530.33 46.1 1546.12 30.3 1531.12 46.1 1546.92 30.3 1531.90 46.1 1547.72 30.3 1532.68 46.1 1548.51 34.2 1534.25 50.1 1550.12 34.2 1535.04 50.1 1550.92 34.2 1535.82 50.1 1551.72 34.2 1536.61 50.1 1552.52 38.1 1538.19 54.1 1554.13 38.1 1538.98 54.1 1554.94 38.1 1539.77 54.1 1555.75 38.1 1540.56 54.1 1556.55 42.1 1542.14 58.1 1558.17 42.1 1542.94 58.1 1558.98 42.1 1543.73 58.1 1559.79 42.1 1544.53 58.1 1560.61 11-33 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards provide wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5 Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards work with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. You can install MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a linear configuration, as a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The cards can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the cards are configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The MXP_2.5G_10E_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode. This is necessary to provision a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 11.10.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have the following high level features: • Four 2.5 Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10 Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into a ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). 11-34 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards • High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_2.5G_10E_C) or full L band (MXP_2.5G_10E_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. 11.10.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-11 shows the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L faceplates and block diagram. 11-35 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Figure 11-11 MXP_2.5G_10E _C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page G-1. 11.10.3 MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Functions The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are: • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15 • G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19 FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP C RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP L RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RAM Processor 145941 Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Backplane FEC/ Wrapper E-FEC Processor (G.709 FEC) Serial bus uP bus Onboard Flash memory Client LEDs DWDM LED SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR) 11-36 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • G.15 Jitter, page G-19 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10. 11.10.3.1 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Both the MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards implement the UT2 module. The MXP_2.5G_10E_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card uses an L-band version. Table 11-6 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 11-37 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards Table 11-7 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10E_L card. The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 11-6 MXP_2.5G_10E_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11-38 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards 11.10.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards: 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 11-7 MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 11-39 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards • NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-261 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.11 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The MXP_MR_2.5G card aggregates a mix and match of client Storage Area Network (SAN) service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-16/OC-48 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Note In Software Release 7.0 and later, two additional operating modes have been made available to the user: pure ESCON (all 8 ports running ESCON), and mixed mode (Port 1 running FC/GE/FICON, and Ports 5 through 8 running ESCON). When the card is part of a system running Software Release 6.0 or below, only one operating mode, (FC/GE) is available for use. The 2.5-Gbps Multirate Muxponder–Protected–100 GHz–Tunable 15xx.xx-15yy.yy (MXPP_MR_2.5G) card aggregates various client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, Fibre Channel, and ESCON) into one 2.5 Gbps STM-16/OC-48 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides two long-reach STM-16/OC-48 ports per card and is compliant with ITU-T G.957 and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Because the cards are tunable to one of four adjacent grid channels on a 100-GHz spacing, each card is available in eight versions, with 15xx.xx representing the first wavelength and 15yy.yy representing the last wavelength of the four available on the card. In total, 32 DWDM wavelengths are covered in accordance with the ITU-T 100-GHz grid standard, G.692, and Telcordia GR-2918-CORE, Issue 2. The card versions along with their corresponding wavelengths are shown in Table 11-8. The muxponders are intended to be used in applications with long DWDM metro or regional unregenerated spans. Long transmission distances are achieved through the use of flat gain optical amplifiers. The client interface supports the following payload types: • 2G FC Table 11-8 Card Versions Card Version Frequency Channels at 100 GHz (0.8 nm) Spacing 1530.33–1532.68 1530.33 nm 1531.12 nm 1531.90 nm 1532.68 nm 1534.25–1536.61 1534.25 nm 1535.04 nm 1535.82 nm 1536.61 nm 1538.19–1540.56 1538.19 nm 1538.98 nm 1539.77 nm 1540.56 nm 1542.14–1544.53 1542.14 nm 1542.94 nm 1543.73 nm 1544.53 nm 1546.12–1548.51 1546.12 nm 1546.92 nm 1547.72 nm 1548.51 nm 1550.12–1552.52 1550.12 nm 1550.92 nm 1551.72 nm 1552.52 nm 1554.13–1556.55 1554.13 nm 1554.94 nm 1555.75 nm 1556.55 nm 1558.17–1560.61 1558.17 nm 1558.98 nm 1559.79 nm 1560.61 nm 11-40 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards • 1G FC • 2G FICON • 1G FICON • GE • ESCON Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 2.5 Gbps. Table 11-9 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the ITU-T Transparent Generic Framing Procedure (GFP-T) G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed serializer/deserializer (SERDES) is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. Table 11-10 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client ports. The table is intended to show the full client payload configurations for the card. Table 11-9 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate ITU-T GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 2G FICON 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FICON 1.06 Gbps Yes GE 1.25 Gbps Yes ESCON 0.2 Gbps Yes Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate 2G FC 1 2.125 Gbps 1G FC 1, 2 2.125 Gbps 2G FICON 1 2.125 Gbps 1G FICON 1, 2 2.125 Gbps GE 1, 2 2.5 Gbps 1G FC ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.06 Gbps 0.8 Gbps 1.86 Gbps total 11-41 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards 11.11.1 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-12 shows the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G faceplates. 1G FICON ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.06 Gbps 0.8 Gbps 1.86 Gbps total GE ESCON (mixed mode) 1 5, 6, 7, 8 1.25 Gbps 0.8 Gbps Total 2.05 Gbps ESCON 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1.6 Gbps Table 11-10 Client Data Rates and Ports (continued) Mode Port(s) Aggregate Data Rate 11-42 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards Figure 11-12 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Faceplates For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Figure 11-13 shows a block diagram of the MXP_MR_2.5G card. The card has eight SFP client interfaces. Ports 1 and 2 can be used for GE, FC, FICON, or ESCON. Ports 3 through 8 are used for ESCON client interfaces. There are two SERDES blocks dedicated to the high-speed interfaces (GE, FC, FICON, and ESCON) and two SERDES blocks for the ESCON interfaces. A FPGA is provided to support different configurations for different modes of operation. This FPGA has a Universal Test and Operations Physical Interface for ATM (UTOPIA) interface. A transceiver add/drop multiplexer MXP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G 124077 MXP MR 2.5G 15xx.xx 15xx.xx FAIL ACT/STBY SF MXPP MR 2.5G 15xx.xx 15xx.xx RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX DWDMB DWDMA FAIL ACT/STBY SF RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TXRX TX RX TX DWDM RX TX 11-43 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards (TADM) chip supports framing. Finally, the output signal is serialized and connected to the trunk front end with a direct modulation laser. The trunk receive signal is converted into an electrical signal with an avalanche photodiode (APD), is deserialized, and is then sent to the TADM framer and FPGA. The MXPP_MR_2.5G is the same, except a 50/50 splitter divides the power at the trunk interface. In the receive direction, there are two APDs, two SERDES blocks, and two TADM framers. This is necessary to monitor both the working and protect paths. A switch selects one of the two paths to connect to the client interface. Figure 11-13 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Block Diagram Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards in a loopback configuration on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 11.11.2 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Functions The functions of the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards are: • G.18 Performance Monitoring, page G-20 • G.19 Distance Extension, page G-20 • G.20 Slot Compatibility, page G-20 • G.21 Interoperability with Cisco MDS Switches, page G-20 • G.22 Client and Trunk Ports, page G-20 • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 SFP 1 SFP 6 SFP 5 SFP 4 SFP 3 SFP 2 SFP 8 SERDES FPGA (for FC, GE, FICON, ESCON, PCS, B2B, GFP-T) SERDES SFP 7 High-speed SERDES QDR SRAM TADM framer Laser APD Serializer Deserializer ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON ESCON Trunk interface 134986 GE, FC, FICON, ESCON GE, FC, FICON, ESCON 11-44 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-10 on page G-12 11.11.3 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards: • NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-282 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 (MXP_MR_2.5G only) • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.12 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards MXP_MR_10DME_L: (Cisco ONS 15454 only) The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards aggregate a mix of client SAN service client inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10.0 Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957. The cards support aggregation of the following signal types: • 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 1-Gigabit Ethernet • 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1) • 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3) Note On the card faceplates, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are displayed as 10DME_C and 10DME_L, respectively. Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it safely. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The cards support ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. 11-45 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 10 Gbps. You can install MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The MXP_MR_10DME_L features a tunable 1580-nm L-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 80 wavelengths on the ITU grid, also with 50-GHz spacing. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The cards uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and use SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Table 11-11 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. There are two FPGAs on each MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L, and a group of four ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 11-12 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port. Table 11-11 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 1.06 Gbps Yes Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC 1 5 X X X X 2 6 X X — — 11-46 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE. A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards support FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled. The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards feature a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The cards contains eight 12.5 degree downward tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with a 45 degree downward angle. The throughput of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards is affected by the following parameters: • Distance extension—If distance extension is enabled on the card, it provides more throughput but more latency. If distance extension is disabled on the card, the buffer to buffer credits on the storage switch affects the throughput; higher the buffer to buffer credits higher is the throughput. Note For each link to operate at the maximum throughput, it requires a minimum number of buffer credits to be available on the devices which the link connects to. The number of buffer credits required is a function of the distance between the storage switch extension ports and the link bandwidth, that is, 1G, 2G, or 4G. These buffer credits are provided by either the storage switch (if distance extension is disabled) or by both the storage switch and the card (if distance extension is enabled). • Forward Error Correction (FEC)—If Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) is enabled on the trunk port of the card, the throughout is significantly reduced in comparison to standard FEC being set on the trunk port. Note If distance extension is enabled on the card, the FEC status does not usually affect the throughput of the card. • Payload size—The throughput of the card decreases with decrease in payload size. The resultant throughput of the card is usually the combined effect of the above parameters. 11.12.1 Key Features The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have the following high-level features: 3 7 X X X — 4 8 X X — — Table 11-12 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 (continued) Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC 11-47 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. • Pluggable client interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These include an OC-48/STM 16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • Y-cable protection: Supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27 for more detailed information. • High level provisioning support: The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • ALS: A safety mechanism used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, see the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448. • Link monitoring and management: The cards use standard OC-48 OH bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The cards pass the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards normally synchronize from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3 is not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. Note MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards cannot be used for line timing. • Configurable squelching policy: The cards can be configured to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The cards are tunable across the full C band (MXP_MR_10DME_C) or full L band (MXP_MR_10DME_L), thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. • You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch. • From Software Release 9.0, the fast switch feature of MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards along with the buffer-to-buffer credit recovery feature of MDS switches, prevents reinitialization of ISL links during Y-cable switchovers. 11-48 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11.12.2 Faceplates and Block Diagram Figure 11-14 shows the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L faceplates and block diagram. Figure 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Faceplates and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards. 10DME-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF 145767 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX DWDM 4 RX TX 10DME-L FAIL ACT/STBY SF RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX DWDM 4 RX TX SPF 1/1 4G FC SerDes 1 x QDR 2M x 36bit Burst4 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA Framer G.709/FEC OTN MXP UT2 Data path 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 2/1 SPF 3/1 CPU Core FPGA Power supply DCC/GCC CPUC bus SPF 4/1 SPF 6/1 4G FC SerDes 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 7/1 SPF 8/1 SPF 9/1 Client ports Group 1 Group 2 11-49 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11.12.3 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Functions The functions of the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards are: • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11 11.12.3.1 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. Both the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards implement the UT2 module. The MXP_MR_10DME_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2 and the MXP_MR_10DME_L card uses an L-band version. Table 11-13 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 11-50 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards Table 11-14 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DME_L card. The laser is fully tunable over 80 wavelengths in the L band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 11-13 MXP_MR_10DME_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 190.85 1570.83 41 188.85 1587.46 2 190.8 1571.24 42 188.8 1587.88 3 190.75 1571.65 43 188.75 1588.30 4 190.7 1572.06 44 188.7 1588.73 5 190.65 1572.48 45 188.65 1589.15 6 190.6 1572.89 46 188.6 1589.57 7 190.55 1573.30 47 188.55 1589.99 8 190.5 1573.71 48 188.5 1590.41 9 190.45 1574.13 49 188.45 1590.83 10 190.4 1574.54 50 188.4 1591.26 11 190.35 1574.95 51 188.35 1591.68 11-51 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards 11.12.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards: 12 190.3 1575.37 52 188.3 1592.10 13 190.25 1575.78 53 188.25 1592.52 14 190.2 1576.20 54 188.2 1592.95 15 190.15 1576.61 55 188.15 1593.37 16 190.1 1577.03 56 188.1 1593.79 17 190.05 1577.44 57 188.05 1594.22 18 190 1577.86 58 188 1594.64 19 189.95 1578.27 59 187.95 1595.06 20 189.9 1578.69 60 187.9 1595.49 21 189.85 1579.10 61 187.85 1595.91 22 189.8 1579.52 62 187.8 1596.34 23 189.75 1579.93 63 187.75 1596.76 24 189.7 1580.35 64 187.7 1597.19 25 189.65 1580.77 65 187.65 1597.62 26 189.6 1581.18 66 187.6 1598.04 27 189.55 1581.60 67 187.55 1598.47 28 189.5 1582.02 68 187.5 1598.89 29 189.45 1582.44 69 187.45 1599.32 30 189.4 1582.85 70 187.4 1599.75 31 189.35 1583.27 71 187.35 1600.17 32 189.3 1583.69 72 187.3 1600.60 33 189.25 1584.11 73 187.25 1601.03 34 189.2 1584.53 74 187.2 1601.46 35 189.15 1584.95 75 187.15 1601.88 36 189.1 1585.36 76 187.1 1602.31 37 189.05 1585.78 77 187.05 1602.74 38 189 1586.20 78 187 1603.17 39 188.95 1586.62 79 186.95 1603.60 40 188.9 1587.04 80 186.9 1604.03 Table 11-14 MXP_MR_10DME_L Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 11-52 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards • NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-300 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.13 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards aggregate a variety of client service inputs (GigabitEthernet, fibre channel, OTU2, OTU2e, and OC-192) into a single 40-Gbps OTU3/OTU3e signal on the trunk side. You can either have 40E-MXP-C, or 40ME-MXP-C card based on your requirement, though the CTC name 40E-MXP-C is common for both. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards support aggregation of the following signals: • With overclock enabled on the trunk port: – 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel – OTU2e • With overclock disabled on the trunk port: – 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel – 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (GFP framing) – 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy (WIS framing) – OC-192/STM-64 – OTU2 Caution Handle the card with care. Dropping or misuse of the card could result in permanent damage. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C muxponders pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently, section, or line termination. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate performance monitoring. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODTU23 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping client payloads into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. You can install and provision the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis The client ports of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards interoperates with all the existing TXP/MXP (OTU2 trunk) cards. The client port of 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards does not interoperate with OTU2_XP card when the signal rate is OTU1e (11.049 Gbps) and the “No Fixed Stuff” option is enabled on the trunk port of OTU2_XP card. 11-53 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards For OTU2 and OTU2e client protocols, Enhanced FEC (EFEC) is not supported on Port 1 of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. Table 11-15 lists the FEC configuration supported on OTU2/OTU2e protocol for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. When setting up the card for the first time, or when the card comes up after clearing the LOS-P condition due to fiber cut, the trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card takes about 6 minutes to lock a signal. The trunk port of the 40G-MXP-C card raises an OTUK-LOF alarm when the card is comes up. The alarm clears when the trunk port locks the signal. When a protection switch occurs on the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards, the recovery from PSM protection switch takes about 3 to 4 minutes. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards is tunable over C-band on the trunk port. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards support pluggable XFPs on the client ports on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side, and XFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The XFP pluggable modules are SR, LR, MM, DWDM, or CWDM and support an LC fiber connector. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards contains four XFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each XFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual LC connector facing downward at 45 degrees. Table 11-16 shows the input data rate for each client interface. 11.13.1 Key Features The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards provides the following key features: • The 40G-MXP-C card uses the RZ-DQPSK 40G modulation format. Table 11-15 Client Interface Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C Client Port FEC Configuration Supported on OTU2/OTU2e Client Protocol Port 1 Only Standard FEC Port 2 Standard and Enhanced FEC Port 3 Standard and Enhanced FEC Port 4 Standard and Enhanced FEC Table 11-16 Client Interface Input Data Rates for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards Client Interface Input Data Rate 8-Gigabit Fibre Channel 8.48 Gbps 10-Gigabit Fibre Channel 10.519 Gbps 10-GigabitEthernet LAN-Phy 10.312 Gbps 10-GigabitEthernet WAN-Phy 9.953 Gbps OC-192/STM-64 9.953 Gbps OTU2 10.709 Gbps OTU2e 11.096 Gbps 11-54 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards • The 40E-MXP-C and 40ME-MXP-C cards uses the CP-DQPSK modulation format. • Onboard E-FEC processor—The E-FEC functionality improves the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (239,255) correction algorithm. A new BCH algorithm implemented (according to G.975.1 I.7) in E-FEC allows recovery of an input BER up to 1E-3. The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards support both the standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC standard, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. • Y-cable protection—Supports Y-cable protection only between the same card type on ports with the same port number and signal rate. For more information on Y-cable protection, seethe “G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection” section on page G-27. Note Y-cable cannot be created on a 10 GE port when WIS framing is enabled on the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. • Unidirectional regeneration—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards supports unidirectional regeneration configuration. Each 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card in the configuration regenerates the signal received from another 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card in one direction. Note When you configure the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards in the Unidirectional Regen mode, ensure that the payload is not configured on the pluggable port modules of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C card. 11-55 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards Figure 11-15 shows a typical unidirectional regeneration configuration. Figure 11-15 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards in Unidirectional Regeneration Configuration • High level provisioning support—The cards are initially provisioned using Cisco Transport Planner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)—A safety mechanism, Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS), is used in the event of a fiber cut. The Auto Restart ALS option is supported only for OC-192/STM-64 and OTU2 payloads. The Manual Restart ALS option is supported for all payloads. For more information on provisioning ALS for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards, see the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead—The cards are provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead. This is used to eliminate forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization—The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards synchronize to the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. Because of a maintenance or upgrade activity, if the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards are not available, the cards automatically synchronize to one of the input client interface clocks. • Squelching policy—The cards are set to squelch the client interface output if there is LOS at the DWDM receiver, or if there is a remote fault. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are tunable across the full C-band wavelength. 278759 Client DWDM System DWDM System 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C 40G-MXP-C Client DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk DWDM Trunk 11-56 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards 11.13.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-16 shows the faceplate and block diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. Figure 11-16 Faceplate and Block Diagram of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. 11.13.3 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Functions The functions of the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards are: 278757 XFP XFP XFP XFP MSA 100 40 G FEC/EF EC Trunk module TDC EDFA XFP Child card Tx Rx Trunk 4x XFI SFI 5.1 interface Threshold control 40G-MXP-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF XFP1 XFP2 XFP3 XFP4 TRUNK RX 2 TX RX 1 TX RX 4 TX RX 3 TX TRUNK TX MX RX HAZARD LEVEL 1 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 11-57 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11 11.13.3.1 Wavelength Identification The 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards use trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. These cards implement the UT2 module; they use a C-band version of the UT2. Table 11-17 lists the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 11-58 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.13.4 Related Procedures for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards: • NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-322 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.14 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are Gigabit Ethernet Xponders for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. Note GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the GE_XP card and 10GE_XPE card is the enhanced version of the 10GE_XP card. The cards aggregate Ethernet packets received on the client ports for transport on C-band trunk ports that operate on a 100-GHz grid. The trunk ports operate with ITU-T G.709 framing and either FEC or E-FEC. The GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards are designed for bulk point-to-point transport over 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 11-17 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 11-59 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards wavelengths. The GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards are designed for bulk GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, multipoint-to-multipoint transport over 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths for Video-on-Demand (VOD), or broadcast video across protected 10GE LAN PHY wavelengths. You can install and provision the GE_XP, and GE_XPE cards in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in ONS 15454 DWDM chassis • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The GE_XP and GE_XPE are double-slot cards with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE are single-slot cards with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client ports support SX, LX, and ZX SFPs and SR and 10GBASE-LR XFPs. (LR2 XFPs are not supported.) The trunk ports support a DWDM XFP. 11-60 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The RAD pluggables (ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW= and ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW=) do not support: • No loopbacks (Terminal or Facility) • RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) alarm • AIS and LOS alarm Caution A fan-tray assembly (15454E-CC-FTA for the ETSI shelf, or 15454-CC-FTA for the ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned to perform different Gigabit Ethernet transport roles. All the cards can work as Layer 2 switches. However, the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can also perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponders (10GE TXP mode), and the GE_XP and GE_XPE can perform as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponders (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP mode). Table 11-18 shows the card modes supported by each card. Note Changing the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode requires the ports to be in a OOS-DSBL (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI) service state. In addition, no circuits can be provisioned on the cards when the mode is being changed. 11.14.1 Key Features The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have the following high-level features: • Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) that allows you to bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. • Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) protocol that facilitates proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation. Table 11-18 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes Card Mode Cards Description Layer 2 Ethernet switch GE_XP 10GE_XP GE_XPE 10GE_XPE Provides capability to switch between any two ports irrespective of client or trunk port. Supported Ethernet protocols and services include 1+1 protection, QoS (Quality of Service), CoS (Class of Service), QinQ, MAC learning, MAC address retrieval, service provider VLANs (SVLANs), IGMP snooping and Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR), link integrity, and other Ethernet switch services. 10GE TXP 10GE_XP 10GE_XPE Provides a point-to-point application in which each 10 Gigabit Ethernet client port is mapped to a 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk port. 10GE MXP 20GE MXP GE_XP GE_XPE Provides the ability to multiplex the twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports on the card to one or both of its 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The card can be provisioned as a single MXP with twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to one trunk port (Port 21) or as two MXPs with ten Gigabit Ethernet client ports mapped to a trunk port (Ports 1 to 10 mapped to Port 21, and Ports 11-20 mapped to Port 22). 11-61 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol that facilitates link monitoring, remote failure indication, and remote loopback. • Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) that controls network loops, handles link failures, and improves convergence time. • Configurable service VLANs (SVLANs) and customer VLANs (CVLANs). • Ingress rate limiting that can be applied on both SVLANs and CVLANs. You can create SVLAN and CVLAN profiles and can associate a SVLAN profile to both UNI and NNI ports; however, you can associate a CVLAN profile only to UNI ports. • CVLAN rate limiting that is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. • Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) to class of service (CoS) mapping that you can configure for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. • Ports, in Layer 2 switch mode, can be provisioned as network-to-network interfaces (NNIs) or user-network interfaces (UNIs) to facilitate service provider to customer traffic management. • Broadcast drop-and-continue capability for VOD and broadcast video applications. • Gigabit Ethernet MXP, TXP, and Layer 2 switch capability over the ONS 15454 DWDM platform. • Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ONS 15454 ETSI shelf assembly, ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly, ONS 15454 M2, and the ONS 15454 M6 shelf assemblies. Compatible with TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, and TSCE cards. • Far-End Laser Control (FELC) that is supported on copper SFPs from Release 8.52 and later releases. For more information on FELC, see the “G.36 Far-End Laser Control” section on page G-32. • Layer 2 switch mode that provides VLAN translation, QinQ, ingress CoS, egress QoS, Fast Ethernet protection switching, and other Layer 2 Ethernet services. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. Also interoperable with Cisco Catalyst 6500 and Cisco 7600 series Gigabit Ethernet, 10 GE interfaces and CRS-1 10GE interfaces. • The GE_XP and GE_XPE cards have twenty Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet client ports and two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports. The client Gigabit Ethernet signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing when configured in one of the MXP modes (10GE MXP or 20GE MXP). • ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous and asynchronous mapping. E-FEC with ITU-T G.709 ODU and 2.7 Gbps with greater than 8 dB coding gain. • IEEE 802.3 frame format that is supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable. • MAC learning capability in Layer 2 switch mode. • MAC address retrieval in cards provisioned in the L2-over-DWDM mode. • When a port is in UNI mode, tagging can be configured as transparent or selective. In transparent mode, only SVLANs in the VLAN database of the node can be configured. In selective mode, a CVLAN- to-SVLAN relationship can be defined. • Layer 2 VLAN port mapping that allows the cards to be configured as multiple Gigabit Ethernet TXPs and MXPs. • Y-cable protection is configurable in TXP and MXP modes. 11-62 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Two protection schemes are available in Layer 2 mode. They are: – 1+1 protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for client ports. – Fast Automatic Protection—Protection scheme to address card, port, or shelf failures for trunk ports. • End-to-end Ethernet link integrity. • Pluggable client interface optic modules (SFPs and XFPs)—Client ports support tri-rate SX, LX, and ZX SFPs, and 10-Gbps SR1 XFPs. • Pluggable trunk interface optic modules; trunk ports support the DWDM XFP. • Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping that restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present. • Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network. • Ingress CoS that assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of incoming frames. • Egress QoS that defines the QoS capabilities for the egress port. • MAC address learning that facilitates switch processing. • Storm Control that limits the number of packets passing through a port. You can define the maximum number of packets allowed per second for the following types of traffic: Broadcast, Multicast, and Unicast. The threshold for each type of traffic is independent and the maximum number of packets allowed per second for each type of traffic is 16777215. 11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list Table 11-19 lists the protocol compatibility for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 11.14.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-17 shows the GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram looks the same. Table 11-19 Protocol Compatibility List for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Protocol L1 1+1 FAPS IGMP REP LACP CFM EFM L1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No 1+1 No Yes Yes No No Yes No FAPS Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No IGMP Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No REP No No No Yes No Yes No LACP No No No No No No No CFM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No EFM No No No No No No No 11-63 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Figure 11-17 GE_XP and GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports are displayed as follows: • Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate • 21-1 and 22-1 on CTC • 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table Figure 11-18 shows the 10GE_XP faceplate and block diagram. The 10 GE_XPE faceplate and block diagram looks the same. FAIL ACT SF GE-XP 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 5 RX TX 6 RX TX 7 RX TX 8 RX TX 9 RX TX 10 RX TX 11 RX TX 12 RX TX 13 RX TX 14 RX TX 15 RX TX 16 RX TX 17 RX TX 18 RX TX 19 RX TX 20 RX TX RX TX 2 TRUNK 1 CONSOLE T2 T1 RX TX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL CLIENT: +3dBm TRUNK: +1dBm HAZARD LEVEL 1 159052 12GE Client ports CONN 8GE Client ports XAUI to SF14 XAUI to SF14 FEC SERDES XFP WDM FEC SERDES XFP WDM MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking BCM 5650x SCL FPGA COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 Client Ports 9-14 Client GE Ports 1-8 GE Client Ports 15-20 Trunk GE Ports 1-2 10GE BCM 5650x with Ethernet ASIC 11-64 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Figure 11-18 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE Faceplates and Block Diagram The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are displayed as follows: • Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 on the faceplate • 3-1 and 4-1 on CTC • 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table For information about safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL CLIENT: +3dBm TRUNK: +1dBm HAZARD LEVEL 1 10GE XP RX 2 TX TRUNK RX 1 TX RX 2 TX CLIENT RX 1 TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 FAIL ACT SF CONSOLE 159053 159053 XFP XAUI SERDES XFP XAUI SERDES XAUI to SF14 XAUI to SF14 FEC SERDES XFP WDM FEC SERDES XFP WDM MPC8270 core Power supply Clocking BCM 5650x with Ethernet ASIC SCL FPGA Client Ports 1-2 10GE Trunk Ports 1-2 10GE 11-65 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.4 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Functions The functions of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are: • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11 11.14.4.1 Client Interface The client interface is implemented with separately orderable SFP or XFP modules. The client interfaces support the following tri-rate SFPs and XFPs using dual LC connectors and multimode fiber: • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC - 850 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-SX) • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-LX) • SFP - GE/1G-FC/2G-FC 1300 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-G2F-ZX) • SFP - 10/100/1000Base-T - Copper (PID ONS-SE-ZE-EL) Intra office up to 100; Cable: RJ45 STP CAT5, CAT5E, and CAT6 • SFP - 1000Base BX D/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXD) • SFP - 1000Base BX U/Gigabit Ethernet 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SE-GE-BXU) • SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-LX10) • SFP - Fast Ethernet 1310 nm - MM - LC (PID ONS-SI-100-FX) • SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS1/E1 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP1) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - Fast Ethernet over DS3/E3 - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-EOP3) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - E1/DS1 over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) (GE_XPE only) • SFP - E3/DS3 PDH over Fast Ethernet - SM - LC (PID ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW) (GE_XPE only) Note The recommended topology for using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs is shown in Figure 11-19. Figure 11-19 Recommended Topology for Using ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW and ONS -SC-E3-T3-PW SFPs The client interfaces support the following dual-rate XFP using dual LC connectors and single-mode fiber: 249504 Network A with Internal Timing Network B with LoopbackTiming Node A Ethernet Network ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW on Port n of GE_XPE Card in Node A with Loopback Timing ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW on Port n of GE_XPE Card in Node B with AdaptiveTiming Node B 11-66 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • XFP - OC-192/STM-64/10GE/10-FC/OTU2 - 1310 SR - SM LC (PID: ONS-XC-10G-S1) • XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-L2) • XFP - 10GE - 1550 nm - SM - LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-C) Note If ONS-XC-10G-C XFP is used on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards on client port 1, the maximum temperature at which the system qualifies is +45 degree Celsius. The client interfaces support the following multimode XFP using dual LC connectors and multi-mode fiber: • XFP - OC-192/10GFC/10GE - 850 nm MM LC (PID ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM) 11.14.4.2 DWDM Trunk Interface The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk ports operating at 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10.3125 Gbps) or 10 Gigabit Ethernet into OTU2 (nonstandard 11.0957 Gbps). The ports are compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.709, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE standards. The ports are capable of carrying C-band and L-band wavelengths through insertion of DWDM XFPs. Forty channels are available in the 1550-nm C band 100-GHz ITU grid, and forty channels are available in the L band. 11.14.4.3 Configuration Management The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards support the following configuration management parameters: • Port name—User-assigned text string. • Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status. • MTU—Provisionable maximum transfer unit (MTU) to set the maximum number of bytes per frames accepted on the port. • Mode—Provisional port mode, either Autonegotiation or the port speed. • Flow Control—Flow control according to IEEE 802.1x pause frame specification can be enabled or disabled for TX and RX ports. • Bandwidth—Provisionable maximum bandwidth allowed for the port. • Ingress CoS—Assigns a CoS value to the port from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) and accepts CoS of incoming frames. • Egress QoS—Defines the QoS capabilities at the egress port. • NIM—Defines the port network interface management type based on Metro Ethernet Forum specifications. Ports can be defined as UNI or NNI. • MAC Learning—MAC address learning to facilitate switch processing. • VLAN tagging provided according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Note When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards are provisioned in a MXP or TXP mode, only the following parameters are available: Port Name, State, MTU, Mode, Flow control, and Bandwidth. 11-67 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.4.4 Security GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card ports can be provisioned to block traffic from a user-defined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic is normally switched. You can manually specify the set of blocked MAC addresses for each port. Each port of the card can receive traffic from a limited predefined set of MAC addresses. The remaining traffic will be dropped. This capability is a subset of the Cisco IOS “Port Security” feature. 11.14.4.5 Card Protection The following card protection schemes are available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. • Y-Cable Protection—See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27. • 1+1 Protection—See the “G.35.2 1+1 Protection” section on page G-30. • Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection—See the “G.35.3 Layer 2 Over DWDM Protection” section on page G-31. 11.14.4.5.1 Related Procedures for Card Protection The following are the related procedures for creating card protection on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards: • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-168 • DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings, page 11-393 11.14.5 IGMP Snooping As networks increase in size, multicast routing becomes critically important as a means to determine which segments require multicast traffic and which do not. IP multicasting allows IP traffic to be propagated from one source to a number of destinations, or from many sources to many destinations. Rather than sending one packet to each destination, one packet is sent to the multicast group identified by a single IP destination group address. GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can learn up to a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. This includes groups on all the VLANs. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping restricts the flooding of multicast traffic by forwarding multicast traffic to those interfaces where a multicast device is present. When the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card receives an IGMP leave group message from a host, it removes the host port from the multicast forwarding table after generating group specific queries to ensure that no other hosts interested in traffic for the particular group are present on that port. Even in the absence of any “leave” message, the cards have a timeout mechanism to update the group table with the latest information. After a card relays IGMP queries from the multicast router, it deletes entries periodically if it does not receive any IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients. In a multicast router, general queries are sent on a VLAN when Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) is enabled on the VLAN. The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card forwards queries to all ports belonging to the VLAN. All hosts interested in this multicast traffic send Join requests and are 11-68 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards added to the forwarding table entry. The Join requests are forwarded only to router ports. By default, these router ports are learned dynamically. However, they can also be statically configured at the port level in which case the static configuration overrides dynamic learning. For information about interaction of IGMP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. 11.14.5.1 IGMP Snooping Guidelines and Restrictions The following guidelines and restrictions apply to IGMP snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards: • IGMP snooping V2 is supported as specified in RFC 4541. • IGMP snooping V3 is not supported and the packets are flooded in the SVLAN. • Layer 2 multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic. • GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support IGMP snooping on 128 stacked VLANs and GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support up to 256 stacked VLANs that are enabled. • IGMP snooping can be configured per SVLAN or CVLAN. By default, IGMP snooping is disabled on all SVLANs and CVLANs. • IGMP snooping on CVLAN is enabled only when: – MVR is enabled. – UNI ports are in selective add and selective translate modes. For each UNI port, a CVLAN must be specified for which IGMP snooping is to be enabled. • IGMP snooping can be enabled only on one CVLAN per port. If you enable IGMP snooping on CVLAN, you cannot enable IGMP snooping on the associated SVLAN and vice versa. The number of VLANs that can be enabled for IGMP snooping cannot exceed 128. • When IGMP snooping is enabled on double-tagged packets, CVLAN has to be the same on all ports attached to the same SVLAN. • When IGMP snooping is working with the Fast Automatic Protection Switch (FAPS) in a ring-based setup, it is advisable to configure all NNI ports as static router ports. This minimizes the multicast traffic hit when a FAPS switchover occurs. The following conditions are raised from IGMP snooping at the card: • MCAST-MAC-TABLE-FULL—This condition is raised when the multicast table is full and a new join request is received. This table is cleared when at least one entry gets cleared from the multicast table after the alarm is raised. • MCAST-MAC-ALIASING—This condition is raised when there are multiple L3 addresses that map to the same L2 address in a VLAN. This is a transient condition. For more information on severity level of these conditions and procedure to clear these alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide. 11.14.5.2 Fast-Leave Processing Note Fast-Leave processing is also known as Immediate-Leave. 11-69 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards IGMP snooping Fast-Leave processing allows the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE to remove an interface that sends a leave message from the forwarding table without first sending group specific queries to the interface. When you enable IGMP Fast-Leave processing, the card immediately removes a port from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message on that port. 11.14.5.3 Static Router Port Configuration Multicast-capable ports are added to the forwarding table for every IP multicast entry. The card learns of such ports through the PIM method. 11.14.5.4 Report Suppression Report suppression is used to avoid a storm of responses to an IGMP query. When this feature is enabled, a single IGMP report is sent to each multicast group in response to a single query. Whenever an IGMP snooping report is received, report suppression happens if the report suppression timer is running. The Report suppression timer is started when the first report is received for a general query. Then this time is set to the response time specified in general query. 11.14.5.5 IGMP Statistics and Counters An entry in a counter contains multicasting statistical information for the IGMP snooping capable GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. It provides statistical information about IGMP messages that have been transmitted and received. IGMP statistics and counters can be viewed via CTC from the Performance > Ether Ports > Statistics tab. This information can be stored in the following counters: • cisTxGeneralQueries—Number of general queries transmitted through an interface. • cisTxGroupSpecificQueries—Total group specific queries transmitted through an interface. • cisTxReports—Total membership reports transmitted through an interface. • cisTxLeaves—Total Leave messages transmitted through an interface. • cisRxGeneralQueries—Total general queries received at an interface. • cisRxGroupSpecificQueries—Total Group Specific Queries received at an interface. • cisRxReports—Total Membership Reports received at an interface. • cisRxLeaves—Total Leave messages received at an interface. • cisRxValidPackets—Total valid IGMP packets received at an interface. • cisRxInvalidPackets—Total number of packets that are not valid IGMP messages received at an interface. 11.14.5.6 Related Procedure for Enabling IGMP Snooping To enable IGMP snooping on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-411. 11-70 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.6 Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications using wide-scale deployment of multicast traffic across an Ethernet-ring-based service provider network (for example, the broadcast of multiple television channels over a service-provider network). MVR allows a subscriber on a port to subscribe and unsubscribe to a multicast stream on the network-wide multicast VLAN. It allows the single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while subscribers remain in separate VLANs. MVR provides the ability to continuously send multicast streams in the multicast VLAN, but to isolate the streams from the subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons. MVR assumes that subscriber ports subscribe and unsubscribe (“Join” and “Leave”) these multicast streams by sending out IGMP Join and Leave messages. These messages can originate from an IGMP version-2-compatible host with an Ethernet connection. MVR operates on the underlying mechanism of IGMP snooping. MVR works only when IGMP snooping is enabled. The card identifies the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated MAC addresses in the card forwarding table, intercepts the IGMP messages, and modifies the forwarding table to include or remove the subscriber as a receiver of the multicast stream, even though the receivers is in a different VLAN than the source. This forwarding behavior selectively allows traffic to cross between different VLANs. Note When MVR is configured, the port facing the router must be configured as NNI in order to allow the router to generate or send multicast stream to the host with the SVLAN. If router port is configured as UNI, the MVR will not work properly. 11.14.6.1 Related Procedure for Enabling MVR To enable MVR on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card” section on page 11-413. 11.14.7 MAC Address Learning The GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses. MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards. The cards learn the MAC address of packets they receive on each port and add the MAC address and its associated port number to the MAC address learning table. As stations are added or removed from the network, the GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards update the MAC address learning table, adding new dynamic addresses and aging out those that are currently not in use. MAC address learning can be enabled or disabled per SVLAN. When the configuration is changed from enable to disable, all the related MAC addresses are cleared. The following conditions apply: • If MAC address learning is enabled on per port basis, the MAC address learning is not enabled on all VLANs, but only on VLANs that have MAC address learning enabled. • If per port MAC address learning is disabled then the MAC address learning is disabled on all VLANs, even if it is enabled on some of the VLAN supported by the port. • If the per port MAC address learning is configured on GE-XP and 10 GE-XP cards, before upgrading to GE-XPE or 10 GE-XPE cards, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Failing to do so disables MAC address learning. 11-71 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.7.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Learning To enable MAC address learning on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-401. 11.14.8 MAC Address Retrieval MAC addresses learned can be retrieved or cleared on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC addresses can be retrieved using the CTC or TL1 interface. GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards support 32K MAC addresses and GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards support 16K MAC addresses. To avoid delay in processing requests, the learned MAC addresses are retrieved using an SVLAN range. The valid SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093. The MAC addresses of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards can also be retrieved. The card MAC addresses are static and are used for troubleshooting activities. One MAC address is assigned to each client, trunk, and CPU ports of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. These internal MAC addresses can be used to determine if the packets received on the far-end node are generated by GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. For MAC address retrieval, the following conditions apply: • The cards must be provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. • MAC address learning must be enabled per SVLAN on GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE cards. • MAC address learning must be enabled per port on GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards. 11.14.8.1 Related Procedure for MAC Address Retrieving To retrieve and clear MAC addresses on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-403. 11.14.9 Link Integrity The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card support end-to-end Ethernet link integrity. This capability is integral to providing an Ethernet private line service and correct operation of Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols on the attached Ethernet devices. The link integrity feature propagates a trunk fault on all the affected SVLAN circuits in order to squelch the far end client interface. Ethernet-Advanced IP Services (E-AIS) packets are generated on a per-port/SVLAN basis. An E-AIS format is compliant with ITU Y.1731. Note E-AIS packets are marked with a CoS value of 7 (also called .1p bits). Ensure that the network is not overloaded and there is sufficient bandwidth for this queue in order to avoid packet drops. When link integrity is enabled on a per-port SVLAN basis, E-AIS packets are generated when the following alarms are raised; • LOS-P 11-72 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • OTUKLOF/LOM • SIGLOSS • SYNCHLOSS • OOS • PPM not present When link integrity is enabled, GE_XP and 10 GE_XP card supports up to128 SVLANs and GE_XPE, 10 GE_XPE can support up to 256 SVLANs. 11.14.9.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Link Integrity To enable link integrity on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” section on page 11-406. 11.14.10 Ingress CoS Ingress CoS functionality enables differentiated services across the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. A wide range of networking requirements can be provisioned by specifying the class of service applicable to each transmitted traffic. When a CVLAN is configured as ingress CoS, the per-port settings are not considered. A maximum of 128 CVLAN and CoS relationships can be configured. 11.14.10.1 Related Procedure for Enabling Ingress CoS To enable Ingress CoS on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the: • “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” section on page 11-381 • “DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC” section on page 11-347 11.14.11 CVLAN Rate Limiting CVLAN rate limiting is supported on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. CVLAN rate limiting is supported for QinQ service in selective add mode. The following limitations and restrictions apply to CVLAN rate limiting: • CVLAN rate limiting is not supported for the following service types: – Selective translate mode – Transparent mode – Selective double add mode – Selective translate add mode – Untagged packets – CVLAN range – Services associated with the channel group • CVLAN rate limiting and SVLAN rate limiting cannot be applied to the same service instance. 11-73 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • Pseudo-IOS command line interface (PCLI) is not supported for CVLAN rate limiting. • A VLAN profile with Link Integrity option enabled cannot be used to perform CVLAN rate limiting. • On GE_XP and 10 GE_XP cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 128 services. However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 192 minus the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of 64 CVLAN rate limiting service instances). • On GE_XPE and 10 GE_XPE cards, CVLAN rate limiting can be applied to up to 256 services. However, the number of provisionable CVLAN rate limiting service instances is equal to 384 minus the number of SVLAN rate limiting service instances present on the card (subject to a minimum of 128 CVLAN rate limiting service instances). 11.14.11.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CVLAN Rate To provision CVLAN rate on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card” section on page 11-408. 11.14.12 DSCP to CoS Mapping DSCP to CoS mapping can be configured for each port. You can configure the CoS of the outer VLAN based on the incoming DSCP bits. This feature is supported only on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. PCLI is not supported for DSCP to CoS mapping. DSCP to CoS mapping is supported for the following service types: – Selective add mode – Selective translate mode – Transparent mode – Selective double add mode – Selective translate add mode – Untagged packets – CVLAN range – Services associated with the channel group 11.14.12.1 Related Procedure for Provisioning CoS Based on DSCP To provision CoS based on DSCP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings” section on page 11-399. 11.14.13 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of the IEEE802.3ad standard that allows you to bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a network device such as a switch to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer device. 11-74 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards LACP allows you to form a single Layer 2 link automatically from two or more Ethernet links. This protocol ensures that both ends of the Ethernet link are functional and agree to be members of the aggregation group before the link is added to the group. LACP must be enabled at both ends of the link to be operational. For more information on LACP, refer to the IEEE802.3ad standard. For information about interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. 11.14.13.1 Advantages of LACP LACP provides the following advantages: • High-speed network that transfers more data than any single port or device. • High reliability and redundancy. If a port fails, traffic continues on the remaining ports. • Hashing algorithm that allows to apply load balancing policies on the bundled ports. 11.14.13.2 Functions of LACP LACP performs the following functions in the system: • Maintains configuration information to control aggregation. • Exchanges configuration information with other peer devices. • Attaches or detaches ports from the link aggregation group based on the exchanged configuration information. • Enables data flow when both sides of the aggregation group are synchronized. 11.14.13.3 Modes of LACP LACP can be configured in the following modes: • On — Default. In this mode, the ports do not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports. • Active — In this mode, the ports send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports. • Passive — In this mode, the ports do not send LACP packets until the partner sends LACP packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports send LACP packets. 11.14.13.4 Parameters of LACP LACP uses the following parameters to control aggregation: • System Identifier—A unique identification assigned to each system. It is the concatenation of the system priority and a globally administered individual MAC address. • Port Identification—A unique identifier for each physical port in the system. It is the concatenation of the port priority and the port number. • Port Capability Identification—An integer, called a key, that identifies the capability of one port to aggregate with another port. There are two types of keys: – Administrative key—The network administrator configures this key. – Operational key—The LACP assigns this key to a port, based on its aggregation capability. • Aggregation Identifier—A unique integer that is assigned to each aggregator and is used for identification within the system. 11-75 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.13.5 Unicast Hashing Schemes LACP supports the following unicast hashing schemes: • Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port • Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port • Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port • Ucast Src IP TCP UDP • Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP • Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP Note Unicast hashing schemes apply to unicast traffic streams only when the destination MAC address is already learned by the card. Hence, MAC learning must be enabled to support load balancing as per the configured hashing scheme. If the destination MAC address is not learned, the hashing scheme is Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP. 11.14.13.6 LACP Limitations and Restrictions The LACP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • Hot standby link state is not supported on the channel group. • Marker protocol generator is not supported. • ALS cannot be configured on the channel group. • Loopback configuration cannot be applied on the channel group. 11.14.13.7 Related Procedure for LACP To provision Channel Group using LACP, see the “NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings” section on page 11-345. 11.14.14 Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is part of the IEEE 802.1ag standard. The Ethernet CFM is an end-to-end per service instance that supports the Ethernet layer Operations, Administration, and Management (OAM) protocol. It includes proactive connectivity monitoring, link trace on a per service basis, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks (MANs) and WANs. CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM is enabled on all the ports by default. For more information on CFM, refer to the IEEE 802.1ag standard. For information about interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. The following sections contain conceptual information about Ethernet CFM. 11-76 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.14.1 Maintenance Domain A maintenance domain is an administrative domain that manages and administers a network. You can assign a unique maintenance level (from 0 to 7) to define the hierarchical relationship between domains. The larger the domain, the higher the maintenance level for that domain. For example, a service provider domain would be larger than an operator domain and might have a maintenance level of 6, while the operator domain maintenance level would be 3 or 4. Maintenance domains cannot intersect or overlap because that would require more than one entity to manage it, which is not allowed. Domains can touch or nest if the outer domain has a higher maintenance level than the nested domain. Maintenance levels of nesting domains must be communicated among the administrating organizations. For example, one approach would be to have the service provider assign maintenance levels to operators. The CFM protocol supports up to eight maintenance domains on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 11.14.14.2 Maintenance Association A maintenance association identifies a service within the maintenance domain. You can have any number of maintenance associations within each maintenance domain. The CFM protocol supports up to 1500 maintenance associations on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. Note Each maintenance association is mapped to a maintenance domain. This mapping is done to configure a Maintenance End Point (MEP). The CFM protocol supports up to 1000 mappings on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 11.14.14.3 Maintenance End Points Maintenance End Points (MEPs) reside at the edge of the maintenance domain and are active elements of the Ethernet CFM. MEPs transmit Continuity Check messages at periodic intervals and receive similar messages from other MEPs within a domain. MEPs also transmit Loopback and Traceroute messages at the request of the administrator. MEPs confine CFM messages within the boundary of a maintenance domain through the maintenance level. There are two types of MEPs: • Up (Inwards, towards the bridge) • Down (Outwards, towards the wire). You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. The MEP continuity check database (CCDB) stores information that is received from other MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MEP CCDB entries. 11.14.14.4 Maintenance Intermediate Points Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) are internal to the maintenance domain and are passive elements of the Ethernet CFM. They store information received from MEPs and respond to Linktrace and Loopback CFM messages. MIPs forward CFM frames received from MEPs and other MIPs, drop all CFM frames at a lower level, and forward all CFM frames at a higher level. You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs together on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. 11-77 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The MIP CCDB maintains the information received for all MEPs in the maintenance domain. The card can store up to 4000 MIP CCDB entries. 11.14.14.5 CFM Messages The Ethernet CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards supports the following messages: • Continuity Check—These messages are exchanged periodically among MEPs. They allow MEPs to discover other MEPs within a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs. These messages are confined to a domain. • Loopback—These messages are unicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an administrator, to verify connectivity to a specific maintenance point. A reply to a loopback message indicates whether a destination is reachable. • Traceroute—These messages are multicast messages that a MEP transmits, at the request of an administrator, to track the path to a destination MEP. 11.14.14.6 CFM Limitations and Restrictions The CFM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • CFM is not supported on channel groups. • CFM is not enabled on protected ports running REP, FAPS, and 1+1. • Y.1731 enhancements including AIS, LCK, and performance monitoring messages along with CFM are not supported. • IEEE CFM MIB is not supported. • L1 and CFM are mutually exclusive on a SVLAN because LI and CFM use the same MAC address. • MAC security and CFM are mutually exclusive on the card due to hardware resource constraints. 11.14.14.7 Related Procedure for Ethernet CFM For information about the supported Ethernet CFM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings” section on page 11-356. 11.14.15 Ethernet OAM The Ethernet OAM protocol is part of the IEEE 802.3ah standard and is used for installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting Ethernet MANs and Ethernet WANs. This protocol relies on an optional sublayer in the data link layer of the OSI model. The Ethernet OAM protocol was developed for Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) applications. The terms Ethernet OAM and EFM are interchangeably used and both mean the same. Normal link operation does not require Ethernet OAM. You can implement Ethernet OAM on any full-duplex point-to-point or emulated point-to-point Ethernet link for a network or part of a network (specified interfaces). OAM frames, called OAM Protocol Data Units (OAM PDUs), use the slow protocol destination MAC address 0180.c200.0002. OAM PDUs are intercepted by the MAC sublayer and cannot propagate beyond a single hop within an Ethernet network. 11-78 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet OAM is disabled on all interfaces by default. When Ethernet OAM is enabled on an interface, link monitoring is automatically turned on. For more information on Ethernet OAM protocol, refer to IEEE 802.3ah standard. For information about interaction of Ethernet OAM with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. 11.14.15.1 Components of the Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM consists of two major components, the OAM Client and the OAM Sublayer. 11.14.15.1.1 OAM Client The OAM client establishes and manages the Ethernet OAM on a link. The OAM client also enables and configures the OAM sublayer. During the OAM discovery phase, the OAM client monitors the OAM PDUs received from the remote peer and enables OAM functionality. After the discovery phase, the OAM client manages the rules of response to OAM PDUs and the OAM remote loopback mode. 11.14.15.1.2 OAM Sublayer The OAM sublayer presents two standard IEEE 802.3 MAC service interfaces: • One interface facing toward the superior sub-layers, which include the MAC client (or link aggregation). • Other interface facing toward the subordinate MAC control sublayer. The OAM sublayer provides a dedicated interface for passing OAM control information and OAM PDUs to and from the client. 11.14.15.2 Benefits of the Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM provides the following benefits: • Competitive advantage for service providers • Standardized mechanism to monitor the health of a link and perform diagnostics 11.14.15.3 Features of the Ethernet OAM The Ethernet OAM protocol has the following OAM features: • Discovery—Identifies devices in the network and their OAM capabilities. The Discovery feature uses periodic OAM PDUs to advertise the OAM mode, configuration, and capabilities. An optional phase allows the local station to accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity. • Link Monitoring—Detects and indicates link faults under a variety of conditions. It uses the event notification OAM PDU to notify the remote OAM device when it detects problems on the link. • Remote Failure Indication—Allows an OAM entity to convey the failure conditions to its peer through specific flags in the OAM PDU. • Remote Loopback—Ensures link quality with a remote peer during installation or troubleshooting. 11-79 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.15.4 Ethernet OAM Limitations and Restrictions The Ethernet OAM on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • CFM, REP, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, IGMP on SVLAN and L2 1+1 protection are not supported with EFM. • IEEE EFM MIB is not supported. • EFM cannot be enabled or disabled at the card level. • Unidirectional functionality is not supported. • Errored Symbol Period, Rx CRC errors, Tx CRC errors are not supported. • OAM PDUs are limited to 1 frame per second. • Dying Gasp and critical events are not supported. Note Dying Gasp RFI is not generated on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. However, if the peer device sends a dying gasp RFI, the card detects it and raises an alarm. 11.14.15.5 Related Procedure for Ethernet OAM For information about the supported Ethernet OAM features on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings” section on page 11-368. 11.14.16 Resilient Ethernet Protocol The Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) is a protocol used to control network loops, handle link failures, and improve convergence time. REP performs the following tasks: • Controls a group of ports connected in a segment. • Ensures that the segment does not create any bridging loops. • Responds to link failures within the segment. • Supports VLAN load balancing. For information about interaction of REP with other protocols, see the “11.14.2 Protocol Compatibility list” section on page 11-62. 11.14.16.1 REP Segments A REP segment is a chain of ports connected to each other and configured with a segment ID. Each segment consists of regular segment ports and two edge ports. A GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card can have up to 2 ports that belong to the same segment, and each segment port can have only one external neighbor port. A segment protects only against a single link failure. Any more failures within the segment result in loss of connectivity. 11-80 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.16.2 Characteristics of REP Segments REP segments have the following characteristics: • If all the ports in the segment are operational, one port blocks traffic for each VLAN. If VLAN load balancing is configured, two ports in the segment control the blocked state of VLANs. • If any port in the segment is not operational, all the other operational ports forward traffic on all VLANs to ensure connectivity. • In case of a link failure, the alternate ports are immediately unblocked. When the failed link comes up, a logically blocked port per VLAN is selected with minimal disruption to the network. 11.14.16.3 REP Port States Ports in REP segments take one of three roles or states: Failed, Open, or Alternate. • A port configured as a regular segment port starts as a failed port. • When the neighbor adjacencies are determined, the port transitions to the alternate port state, blocking all the VLANs on the interface. Blocked port negotiations occur and when the segment settles, one blocked port remains in the alternate role and all the other ports become open ports. • When a failure occurs in a link, all the ports move to the failed state. When the alternate port receives the failure notification, it changes to the open state, forwarding all VLANs. 11.14.16.4 Link Adjacency Each segment port creates an adjacency with its immediate neighbor. Link failures are detected and acted upon locally. If a port detects a problem with its neighbor, the port declares itself non-operational and REP converges to a new topology. REP Link Status Layer (LSL) detects its neighbor port and establishes connectivity within the segment. All VLANs are blocked on an interface until the neighbor port is identified. After the neighbor port is identified, REP determines the neighbor port that must be the alternate port and the ports that must forward traffic. Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. When a segment port starts, the LSL layer sends packets that include the segment ID and the port ID. A segment port does not become operational if the following conditions are satisfied: • No neighbor port has the same segment ID or more than one neighbor port has the same segment ID. • The neighbor port does not acknowledge the local port as a peer. 11.14.16.5 Fast Reconvergence REP runs on a physical link and not on per VLAN. Only one hello message is required for all VLANs that reduces the load on the protocol. REP Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) is a transmission mechanism that floods packets in hardware on an admin VLAN. HFL avoids the delay that is caused by relaying messages in software. HFL is used for fast reconvergence in the order of 50 to 200 milliseconds. 11-81 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards 11.14.16.6 VLAN Load Balancing You must configure two edge ports in the segment for VLAN load balancing. One edge port in the REP segment acts as the primary edge port; the other edge port as the secondary edge port. The primary edge port always participates in VLAN load balancing in the segment. VLAN load balancing is achieved by blocking certain VLANs at a configured alternate port and all the other VLANs at the primary edge port. 11.14.16.7 REP Configuration Sequence You must perform the following tasks in sequence to configure REP: • Configure the REP administrative VLAN or use the default VLAN 1. The range of REP admin VLAN is 1 to 4093. VLAN 4094 is not allowed. • Add ports to the segment in interface configuration mode. • Enable REP on ports and assign a segment ID to it. REP is disabled on all ports by default. The range of segment ID is 1 to 1024. • Configure two edge ports in the segment; one port as the primary edge port and the other as the secondary edge port. • If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority. The Primary option is enabled only on edge ports. • Configure the primary edge port to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs) and VLAN load balancing to another port or to other segments. STCNs and VLAN load balancing configurations are enabled only for edge ports. Note A port can belong to only one segment. Only two ports can belong to the same segment. Both the ports must be either regular ports or edge ports. However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can be an edge port and another port can be a regular port. 11.14.16.8 REP Supported Interfaces REP supports the following interfaces: • REP is supported on client (UNI) and trunk (NNI) ports. • Enabling REP on client ports allows protection at the access or aggregation layer when the cards are connected to the L2 network. • Enabling REP on trunk ports allows protection at the edge layer when the cards are connected in a ring. 11.14.16.9 REP Limitations and Restrictions The REP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards has the following limitations and restrictions: • Fast re-convergence and VLAN load balancing are not supported on UNI ports in transparent mode. • Native VLAN is not supported. • CFM, EFM, link integrity, LACP, FAPS, and L2 1+1 protection are not supported on ports that are configured as part of REP segment and vice versa. 11-82 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards • NNI ports cannot be configured as the primary edge port or blocking port at the access or aggregation layer. • Only three REP segments can be configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. • Consider the following configuration: More than one REP closed segment is configured on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and the same HFL admin VLAN is enabled on the switches. If two different segments are configured on more than one common switch, the following consequences happen. – Layer 1 loop – Flooding of HFL packets across segments if one REP segment fails – Segment goes down due to LSL time out even if the segment does not have faults Hence, it is recommended not to configure two different segments on more than one common switch. • Consider the following configuration: – VLAN Load Balancing is configured on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards by specifying the VLB preempt delay. – Primary and secondary edge ports are configured on the same switch. – HFL or LSL is activated. This configuration leads to high convergence time during manual premption, VLB activation, and deactivation (400 to 700 milliseconds). 11.14.16.10 Related Procedure for Managing the REP Settings To manage the REP settings on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, see the “NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings” section on page 11-373. 11.14.17 Related Procedures for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards: • NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379 • NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-405 • NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card, page 11-409 • NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11-83 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 11.15 ADM-10G Card The ADM-10G card operates on ONS 15454 SONET, ONS 15454 SDH, ONS 15454 M2, ONS 15454 M6, and DWDM networks to carry optical signals and Gigabit Ethernet signals over DWDM wavelengths for transport. The card aggregates lower bit-rate client SONET or SDH signals (OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet) onto a C-band tunable DWDM trunk operating at a higher OC-192/STM-64 rate. In a DWDM network, the ADM-10G card transports traffic over DWDM by mapping Gigabit Ethernet and SONET or SDH circuits onto the same wavelength with multiple protection options. You can install and provision the ADM-10G card in a linear configuration in: • Slots 1 to 5 and 12 to 16 in standard and high-density ONS 15454 ANSI shelves (15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD), the ETSI ONS 15454 standard shelf assembly, or the ONS 15454 ETSI high-density shelf assembly • Slot 2 in ONS 15454 M2 chassis • Slots 2 to 6 in ONS 15454 M6 chassis Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where the ADM-10G card is installed. The card is compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.783 for SDH signals. It supports concatenated and non-concatenated AU-4 mapped STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 signals as specified in ITU-T G.707. The card also complies with Section 5.6 of Telcordia GR-253-CORE and supports synchronous transport signal (STS) mapped OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 signals as specified in the standard. The client SFP and trunk XFP are compliant with interface requirements in Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.957 and/or ITU-T G.959.1, and IEEE 802.3. 11.15.1 Key Features The ADM-10G card has the following high-level features: • Operates with the TCC2, TCC2P, TCC3, TNC, TNCE, TSC, or TSCE. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10EX_C, and OTU2_XP cards. • Has built-in OC-192/STM-64 add/drop multiplexing function including client, trunk, and STS cross-connect. • Supports both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. • Supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between a client port and a trunk port. Path protection/SNCP is supported only between two client ports or two trunk ports. • Supports 1+1 protection on client ports for double-card configuration only. • Supports SONET, SDH, and Gigabit Ethernet protocols on client SFPs. • Supports XFP DWDM trunk interface single wavelengths. • Returns zero bit errors when a TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card switches from active to standby or when manual or forced protection switches occur. • Has 16 SFP-based client interfaces (gray, colored, coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM), and DWDM optics available). 11-84 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card • Supports STM1, STM4, STM16, and Gigabit Ethernet client signals (8 Gigabit Ethernet maximum). • Has one XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for double-card configuration. • Has two XFP-based trunk interface supporting E-FEC/FEC and ITU-T G.709 for single-card configuration. • Has two SR XFP interlink interfaces supporting redundancy connection with protection board and pass-through traffic for double-card configuration. • Supports frame-mapped generic framing procedure (GFP-F) and LEX mapping for Ethernet over SONET or SDH. • Can be installed or pulled from operation, in any slot, without impacting other service cards in the shelf. • Supports client to client hairpinning, that is, creation of circuits between two client ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. See the “11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning” section on page 11-90 for more detailed information. 11.15.2 ADM-10G POS Encapsulation, Framing, and CRC The ADM-10G card supports Cisco EoS LEX (LEX) and generic framing procedure framing (GFP-F) encapsulation on 8 POS ports corresponding to 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. You can provision framing on the ADM-10G card as either the default GFP-F or LEX framing. With GFP-F framing, you can configure a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or none (no CRC) (the default). LEX framing supports 16-bit or 32-bit CRC configuration. The framing type cannot be changed when there is a circuit on the port. On the CTC, navigate to card view and click the Provisioning > Line> Ethernet Tab. To see the various parameters that can be configured on the ethernet ports, see the “CTC Display of ethernet Port Provisioning Status” section in the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide. Parameters such as, admin state, service state, framing type, CRC, MTU and soak time for a port can be configured. It is possible to create an end-to-end circuit between equipment supporting different kinds of encapsulation (for example, LEX on one side and GFP-F on other side). But, under such circumstances, traffic does not pass through, and an alarm is raised if there is a mismatch. 11.15.2.1 POS Overview Ethernet data packets need to be framed and encapsulated into a SONET/SDH frame for transport across the SONET/SDH network. This framing and encapsulation process is known as packet over SONET/SDH (POS). The Ethernet frame comes into the ADM-10G card on a standard Gigabit Ethernet port and is processed through the card’s framing mechanism and encapsulated into a POS frame. When the POS frame exits, the ADM-10G card is in a POS circuit, and this circuit is treated as any other SONET circuit (STS) or SDH circuit (VC) in the ONS node. It is cross-connected and rides the SONET/SDH signal out the port of an optical card and across the SONET/SDH network. The destination of the POS circuit is a card or a device that supports the POS interface. Data packets in the destination card frames are removed and processed into ethernet frames. The Ethernet frames are then sent to a standard Ethernet port of the card and transmitted onto an Ethernet network. 11-85 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 11.15.2.2 POS Framing Modes A POS framing mode is the type of framing mechanism employed by the ADM-10G card to frame and encapsulate data packets into a POS signal. These data packets were originally encapsulated in Ethernet frames that entered the standard Gigabit Ethernet interface of the ADM-10G card. 11.15.2.2.1 GFP-F Framing The GFP-F framing represent standard mapped Ethernet over GFP-F according to ITU-T G.7041. GFP-F defines a standard-based mapping of different types of services onto SONET/SDH. GFP-F maps one variable length data packet onto one GFP packet. GFP-F comprises of common functions and payload specific functions. Common functions are those shared by all payloads. Payload-specific functions are different depending on the payload type. GFP-F is detailed in the ITU recommendation G.7041. 11.15.2.2.2 LEX Framing LEX encapsulation is a HDLC frame based Cisco Proprietary protocol, where the field is set to values specified in Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 1841. HDLC is one of the most popular Layer 2 protocols. The HDLC frame uses the zero insertion/deletion process (commonly known as bit stuffing) to ensure that the bit pattern of the delimiter flag does not occur in the fields between flags. The HDLC frame is synchronous and therefore relies on the physical layer to provide a method of clocking and synchronizing the transmission and reception of frames. The HDLC framing mechanism is detailed in the IETF’s RFC 1662, “PPP in HDLC-like Framing.” 11.15.2.3 GFP Interoperability The ADM-10G card defaults to GFP-F encapsulation that is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. This mode allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). GFP encapsulation also allows the ADM-10G card to interoperate with other vendors Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that adhere to the ITU-T G.7041 standard. 11.15.2.4 LEX Interoperability The LEX encapsulation is compliant with RFC 1841. This mode allows the card to operate with ONS 15310-CL, ONS 15310-MA, ONS 15310-MA SDH, or ONS 15454 data cards (for example, G1000-4/G1K-4 cards, CE-1000-4, ONS 15454 CE100T-8 or ML1000-2 cards). 11.15.3 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-20 shows the ADM-10G card faceplate. 11-86 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Figure 11-20 ADM-10G Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 11.15.4 Port Configuration Rules ADM-10G card client and trunk port capacities are shown in Figure 11-21. FAIL ACT SF ADM-10G ILK1 TRK2/ILK2 TRK1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RX TX RX TX RX TX 16 15 14 13 RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 10xGE MAC 10G GFP-over SONET/SDH framer 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 2 G.709-FEC framer 1 G.709-FEC framer 2 XFP DWDM TRUNK ILK XFP ILK XFP VCAT RLDR switch SCL CPU-Core FPGA alarm cpld alarm cpld Main board Daughter card 4 x OC48/STM16 4 x OC3/OC12 or 4 x STM1/STM4 12 x OC3/OC12 or 12 x STM1/STM4 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 3 10G SONET/SDH framer-pointer processor 4 13 SFP 14 15 16 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SFP SFP SFP switch STS-1 cross-connect HAZARD LEVEL 1 250482 19 17 18 11-87 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Figure 11-21 ADM-10G Card Port Capacities Port 17 acts as trunk2 or ILK1 interface based on single-card or double-card configuration. 11.15.5 Client Interfaces The ADM-10G card uses LC optical port connectors and, as shown in Figure 11-21, supports up to 16 SFPs that can be utilized for OC-N/STM-N traffic. Eight of the SFPs can be used for Gigabit Ethernet. The interfaces can support any mix of OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, or Gigabit Ethernet of any reach, such as SX, LX, ZX, SR, IR, or LR. The interfaces support a capacity of: • 4 x OC-48/STM-16 • 16 x OC-12/STM-4 • 16 x OC-3/STM-1 • 8 x GE The supported client SFPs and XFPs are: • Gray SFPs – 1000Base-SX SFP 850 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-SX=) – 1000Base-LX SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-G2F-LX=) – OC48/STM16 IR1, OC12/STM4 SR1, OC3/STM1 SR1, GE-LX multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SE-Z1=) – OC3/STM1 IR1, OC12/STM4 IR1 multirate SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-622-I1=) – OC48/STM16 SR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-S1=) – OC48/STM16 IR1 SFP 1310 nm (ONS-SI-2G-I1=) – OC48/STM16, 1550 LR2, SM LC (ONS-SE-2G-L2=) GE G r a y SFP 1 13 14 15 16 ILK1/ TRK2(17) ILK2/ TRK2(18) TRK1 (19) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GE G r a y SFP GE G r a y SFP GE OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 OC48/OC12/OC3 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 STM16/STM4/STM1 G r a y SFP G r a y SFP G r a y XFP *Gray/ DWDM XFP D WDM XFP O TU2/OC192/STM64 *OTU2/OC192/STM64 G r a y SFP G r a y SFP G r a y SFP GE G r a y SFP GE G r a y SFP GE G r a y SFP GE G ra y SFP or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or G r a y SFP G r a y SFP G r a y SFP OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 OC12/OC3 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 STM4/STM1 G r a y SFP OC192/STM64 243481 *DWDM XFP and OTU2 is supported only when Port 18 is configured as a trunk interface. 11-88 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card • Colored DWDM SFPs – 1000Base-ZX SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-GE-ZX=) – OC3/STM1 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-155-L2=) – OC48/STM16 LR2 SFP 1550 nm (ONS-SI-2G-L2=) – OC48/STM16 SFP (ONS-SC-2G-xx.x) Note xx.x = 28.7 to 60.6. ONS-SC-2G-28.7, ONS-SC-2G-33.4, ONS-SC-2G-41.3, ONS-SC-2G-49.3, and ONS-SC-2G-57.3 are supported from Release 8.5 and later. • CWDM SFPs – OC48/STM16/GE CWDM SFP (ONS-SC-Z3-xxxx) • XFPs – OC-192/STM-64/10GE XFP 1550 nm (ONS-XC-10G-I2) 11.15.6 Interlink Interfaces Two 2R interlink interfaces, called ILK1 (Port 17) and ILK2 (Port 18), are provided for creation of ADM-10G peer groups in double-card configurations. In a single-card configuration, Port 17 (OC-192/STM-64) and Port 18 (OC-192/STM-64 or OTU2 payload) must be configured as trunk interfaces. In a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group), Ports 17 and 18 must be configured as ILK1 and ILK2 interfaces, respectively. Physically cabling these ports between two ADM-10G cards, located on the same shelf, allows you to configure them as an ADM-10G peer group.The ILK ports carry 10 Gb of traffic each. The interlink interfaces support STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) XFP and 10GE BASE SR (ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM=) XFPs. 11.15.7 DWDM Trunk Interface The ADM-10G card supports OC-192/STM-64 signal transport and ITU-T G.709 digital wrapping according to the ITU-T G.709 standard.The ADM-10G card supports three trunk XFPs: • Two DWDM trunks, and one trunk interface in a single-card configuration. • One DWDM trunk XFP in a double-card configuration. The supported DWDM trunk XFPs are: • 10G DWDM (ONS-XC-10G-xx.x=) (colored XFP) • STM64 SR1 (ONS-XC-10G-S1=) (gray XFP) 11.15.8 Configuration Management When using OC-48/STM-16 traffic, some contiguous port configurations, listed in Table 11-20, are unavailable due to hardware limitations. This limitation does not impact the Gigabit Ethernet payload. 11-89 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Note The ADM-10G card cannot be used in the same shelf with SONET or SDH cross-connect cards. Note The total traffic rate for each trunk cannot exceed OC-192/STM-64 on each ADM-10G card, or for each ADM-10G peer group. Note Gigabit Ethernet is supported on Ports 1 through 8. Ports 9 through Port 12 support only OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4. Additionally, the following guidelines apply to the ADM-10G card: • Trunk Port 17 supports OC-192/STM-64. • Trunk Ports 18 and 19 support OC-192/STM-64 and OTU2. • The interlink port supports OC-192/STM-64. • Up to six ADM-10G cards can be installed in one shelf. • Up to 24 ADM-10G cards can be installed per network element (NE) regardless of whether the card is installed in one shelf or in multiple shelves. • The card can be used in all 15454-SA-ANSI and 15454-SA-HD shelves as well as ETSI ONS 15454 standard and high-density shelves. • A lamp test function can be activated from CTC to ensure that all LEDs are functional. • The card can operate as a working protected or working non-protected card. • In a redundant configuration, an active card hardware or software failure triggers a switch to the standby card. This switch is detected within 10 ms and is completed within 50 ms. • ADM-10G cards support jumbo frames with MTU sizes of 64 to 9,216 bytes; the maximum is 9,216. • After receiving a link or path failure, the ADM-10G card can shut down only the downstream Gigabit Ethernet port. Note In ADM-10G cards, the Gigabit Ethernet port does not support flow control. Table 11-20 OC-48/STM-16 Configuration Limitations OC-48/STM-16 Port Number Ports Restricted from Optical Traffic OC-48/STM-16 on Port 13 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 1 through Port 3 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 14 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 4 through Port 6 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 15 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 7 through Port 9 OC-48/STM-16 on Port 16 No OC-N/STM-N on Port 10 through Port 12 11-90 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 11.15.9 Security The ADM-10G card that an SFP or XFP is plugged into implements the Cisco Standard Security Code Check Algorithm that keys on the vendor ID and serial number. If a pluggable port module (PPM) is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco PPM, a minor NON-CISCO-PPM alarm is raised. If a PPM with an unqualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card—that is, the PPM passes the security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the ADM-10G card— a minor UNQUAL-PPM alarm is raised. 11.15.10 Protection The ADM-10G card supports 1+1 and SONET path protection and SDH SNCP protection architectures in compliance with Telcordia GR-253-CORE, Telcordia GR-1400-CORE, and ITU-T G.841 specifications. 11.15.10.1 Circuit Protection Schemes The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP circuits at the STS/VC4 (high order) level and can be configured to switch based on signal degrade calculations. The card supports path protection/SNCP on client and trunk ports for both single-card and double-card configuration. Note The ADM-10G card supports path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk port 17. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between client ports and trunk ports 18 or 19. The card does not support path protection/SNCP between port 17 and trunk ports 18 and 19. The card allows open-ended path protection/SNCP configurations incorporating other vendor equipment. In an open-ended path protection/SNCP, you can specify one source point and two possible endpoints (or two possible source points and one endpoint) and the legs can include other vendor equipment. The source and endpoints are part of the network discovered by CTC. 11.15.10.2 Port Protection Schemes The ADM-10G card supports unidirectional and bidirectional 1+1 APS protection schemes on client ports for double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group) only. 1+1 APS protection scheme is not supported in single-card configuration. For 1+1 optical client port protection, you can configure the system to use any pair of like facility interfaces that are on different cards of the ADM-10G peer group. 11.15.11 Circuit Provisioning The ADM-10G card supports STS circuit provisioning both in single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. The card allows you to create STS circuits between: • Client and trunk ports • Two trunk ports • Two client ports (client-to-client hairpinning) 11-91 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Note Circuits between two trunk ports are called pass-through circuits. For an ADM-10G card in single-card configuration, if you are creating STS circuits between two client ports, the following limitation must be considered: • Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported. For an ADM-10G card that is part of an ADM-10G peer group, if you are creating STS circuits between two client ports or between client and trunk ports, the following limitations must be considered: • Gigabit Ethernet to Gigabit Ethernet connections are not supported. • Optical channel (OC) to OC, OC to Gigabit Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet to OC connections between two peer group cards are supported. Peer group connections use interlink port bandwidth, hence, depending on the availability/fragmentation of the interlink port bandwidth, it may not be possible to create an STS circuit from the Gigabit Ethernet/OC client port to the peer card trunk port. This is because, contiguous STSs (that is, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and so on) must be available on the interlink port for circuit creation. Note There are no limitations to create an STS circuit between two trunk ports. 11.15.12 ADM-10G CCAT and VCAT Characteristics The ADM-10G card supports high-order (HO) contiguous concatenation (CCAT) and HO virtual concatenation (VCAT) circuits on 8 GigE ports (Port 1 to Port 8) in both single-card and double-card (ADM-10G peer group) configuration. To enable end-to-end connectivity in a VCAT circuit that traverses through a third-party network, you can use Open-Ended VCAT circuit creation. The ADM-10G card supports flexible non-LCAS VCAT groups (VCGs). With flexible VCGs, the ADM-10G can perform the following operations: • Add or remove members from groups • Put members into or out of service, which also adds/removes them from the group • Add or remove cross-connect circuits from VCGs Any operation on the VCG member is service effecting (for instance, adding or removing members from the VCG). Adding or removing cross-connect circuits is not service-affecting, if the associated members are not in the group The ADM-10G card allows independent routing and protection preferences for each member of a VCAT circuit. You can also control the amount of VCAT circuit capacity that is fully protected, unprotected, or uses Protection Channel Access (PCA) (when PCA is available). Alarms are supported on a per-member as well as per virtual concatenation group (VCG) basis. The ADM-10G card supports both automatic and manual routing for VCAT circuit, that is, all members are manually or automatically routed. Bidirectional VCAT circuits are symmetric, which means that the same number of members travel in each direction. With automatic routing, you can specify the constraints for individual members; with manual routing, you can select different spans for different members. Two types of automatic and manual routing are available for VCAT members: common fiber routing and split routing. 11-92 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card The ADM-10G card supports VCAT common fiber routing and VCAT split fiber (diverse) routing. With VCAT split fiber routing, each member can be routed independently through the SONET or SDH or DWDM network instead of having to follow the same path as required by CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing. This allows a more efficient use of network bandwidth, but the different path lengths and different delays encountered may cause slightly different arrival times for the individual members of the VCG. The VCAT differential delay is this relative arrival time measurement between members of a VCG. The maximum tolerable VCAT split fiber routing differential delay for the ADM-10G card is approximately 55 milliseconds. A loss of alignment alarm is generated if the maximum differential delay supported is exceeded. The differential delay compensation function is automatically enabled when you choose split fiber routing during the CTC circuit configuration process. CCAT and VCAT common fiber routing do not enable or need differential delay support. Caution Protection switches with switching time of less than 60 milliseconds are not guaranteed with the differential delay compensation function enabled. The compensation time is added to the switching time. Note For TL1, EXPBUFFERS parameter must be set to ON in the ENT-VCG command to enable support for split fiber routing. Available Circuit Sizes Table 11-21 and Table 11-22 show the circuit sizes available for the ADM-10G card. Table 11-21 Supported SONET Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 CCAT VCAT High Order STS-1 STS-1-1nV (n= 1 to 21) STS-3c STS-3c-mv (m= 1 to 7) STS-6c STS-9c STS-12c STS-24c Table 11-22 Supported SDH Circuit Sizes of ADM-10G card on ONS 15454 SDH CCAT VCAT High Order VC-4 VC-4-mv (m= 1 to 7) VC-4-2c VC-4-3c VC-4-4c VC-4-8c 11-93 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 11.15.12.1 Related Procedure for VCAT Circuit The following is the list of procedures related to creating VCAT circuits: • NTP-G245 Create an Automatically Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-94 • NTP-G246 Create a Manually Routed VCAT Circuit, page 16-98 11.15.13 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring Intermediate path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows a node to monitor the constituent channel of an incoming transmission signal. You can enable IPPM for STS/VC-4s payload on OCn and Trunk ports of ADM-10G card. The IPPM is complaint with GR253/G.826. Software Release 9.2 and higher enables the ADM-10G card to monitor the near-end and far-end PM data on individual STS/VC-4 payloads by enabling IPPM. After provisioning IPPM on the card, service providers can monitor large amounts of STS/VC-4 traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making troubleshooting and maintenance activities more efficient. IPPM occurs only on STS/VC-4 paths that have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters on the selected IPPM paths. For a CCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM only on the first STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. For a VCAT circuit, you can enable IPPM independently on each member STS/VC-4 of the concatenation group. 11.15.13.1 Related Procedure for IPPM To enable IPPM on the ADM-10G card, see the “NTP-G247 Enable or disable Path Performance Monitoring on Intermediate Nodes” section on page 16-100. 11.15.14 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate timing errors on SONET networks. When a network is out of synchronization, jitter and wander occur on the transported signal. Excessive wander can cause terminating equipment to slip. Slips cause different effects in service. Voice service has intermittent audible clicks. Compressed voice technology has short transmission errors or dropped calls. Fax machines lose scanned lines or experience dropped calls. Digital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames. Encryption service loses the encryption key, causing data to be transmitted again. Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VC4 payloads. The STS payload pointer is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1 byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss. There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification count parameters. PPJC is a count of path-detected (PPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) positive pointer justifications. NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-PDET-P) or path-generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) negative pointer justifications depending on the specific PM name. PJCDIFF is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. PJCS-PDET-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN. 11-94 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes. A difference between the counts means that the node transmitting the original pointer justification has timing variations with the node detecting and transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in relation to the rate of the STS-1. You must enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for ADM-10Gcard. In CTC, the count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on the card view Provisioning tab. 11.15.15 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions This section describes the STS and VC-4 path performance monitoring parameters that ADM-10G card support. Table 11-23 lists the STS near-end path performance monitoring parameters. Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (that is, using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P second register. ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS Path (AIS-P) defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or a Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) defect can also cause an ES-P. SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also cause an SES-P. UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps, and continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as SES-Ps. FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a Section Trace Identifier Mismatch Path (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three-Bit (Enhanced) Remote Failure Indication Path Connectivity (ERFI-P-CONN) for that path. The failure event ends when these failures are cleared. PPJC-PDET-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal. PPJC-PGEN-P Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock. 11-95 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card Table 11-24 gives the VC-4 near-end path performance monitoring parameters definition that ADM-10G card support. NPJC-PDET-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-PDET-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in an incoming SONET signal. NPJC-PGEN-P Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-PGEN-P) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock. PJCDIFF-P Pointer Justification Count Difference, STS Path (PJCDIFF-P) is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. That is, PJCDiff-P is equal to (PPJC-PGEN-P - NPJC-PGEN-P) - (PPJC-PDET-P - NPJC-PDET-P). PJCS-PDET-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN. Table 11-23 STS Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition HP-EB High-Order Path Errored Block (HP-EB) indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block. HP-BBE High-Order Path Background Block Error (HP-BBE) is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES. HP-ES High-Order Path Errored Second (HP-ES) is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. HP-SES High-Order Path Severely Errored Seconds (HP-SES) is a one-second period containing 30 percent or more errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. HP-UAS High-Order Path Unavailable Seconds (HP-UAS) is a count of the seconds when the VC path was unavailable. A high-order path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as HP-SESs, and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as HP-SESs. HP-BBER High-Order Path Background Block Error Ratio (HP-BBER) is the ratio of BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs. HP-ESR High-Order Path Errored Second Ratio (HP-ESR) is the ratio of errored seconds to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. 11-96 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards ADM-10G Card 11.15.16 ADM-10G Functions The functions of the ADM-10G card are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12 11.15.17 Related Procedures for ADM-10G Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the ADM-10G card: • NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237 • NTP-G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card, page 16-49 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance HP-SESR High-Order Path Severely Errored Second Ratio (HP-SESR) is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. HP-PPJC-PDET High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected (HP-PPJC-Pdet) is a count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal. HP-NPJC-PDET High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Detected (HP-NPJC-Pdet) is a count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path on an incoming SDH signal. HP-PPJC-PGEN High-Order, Positive Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated (HP-PPJC-Pgen) is a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path. HP-NPJC-PGEN High-Order, Negative Pointer Justification Count, Path Generated (HP-NPJC-Pgen) is a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular path. HP-PJCDIFF High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Difference (HP-PJCDiff) is the absolute value of the difference between the total number of detected pointer justification counts and the total number of generated pointer justification counts. That is, HP-PJCDiff is equal to (HP-PPJC-PGen - HP-NPJC-PGen) - (HP-PPJC-PDet - HP-NPJC-PDet). HP-PJCS-PDET High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PDet) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PDet or HP-NPJC-PDet. HP-PJCS-PGEN High-Order Path Pointer Justification Count Seconds (HP-PJCS-PGen) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more HP-PPJC-PGen or HP-NPJC-PGen. Table 11-24 VC-4 Near-end Path Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition 11-97 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 11.16 OTU2_XP Card The OTU2_XP card is a single-slot card with four ports with XFP-based multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10GE, 10G FC, IB_5G) Xponder for the ONS 15454 ANSI and ETSI platforms. The OTU2_XP card supports multiple configurations. Table 11-25 describes the different configurations supported by the OTU2_XP card and the ports that must be used for these configurations. All the four ports are ITU-T G.709 compliant and support 40 channels (wavelengths) at 100-GHz channel spacing in the C-band (that is, the 1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm wavelength range). The OTU2_XP card can be installed in Slots 1 through 6 or 12 through 17. The OTU2_XP card supports SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs. Caution Fan-tray assembly 15454E-CC-FTA (ETSI shelf)/15454-CC-FTA (ANSI shelf) must be installed in a shelf where the OTU2_XP card is installed. 11.16.1 Key Features The OTU2_XP card has the following high-level features: • 10G transponder, regenerator, and splitter protection capability on the ONS 15454 DWDM platform. • Compatible with the ONS 15454 ANSI high-density shelf assembly, the ETSI ONS 15454 shelf assembly, and the ETSI ONS 15454 high-density shelf assembly. Compatible with TCC2/TCC2P/ TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE cards. • Interoperable with TXP_MR_10E and TXP_MR_10E_C cards. Table 11-25 OTU2_XP Card Configurations and Ports Configuration Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 x 10G transponder Client port 1 Client port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 2 x 10G standard regenerator (with enhanced FEC (E-FEC) only on one port) Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2 10 GE LAN Phy to WAN Phy Client port Client port in transponder or trunk port in regenerator configuration Trunk port Trunk port in transponder or regenerator configuration 1 x 10G E-FEC regenerator (with E-FEC on two ports) Not used Not used Trunk port Trunk port 1 x 10G splitter protected transponder Client port Not used Trunk port (working) Trunk port (protect) 11-98 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card • Four port, multirate (OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, 10G Fibre Channel, IB_5G) client interface. The client signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • ITU-T G.709 framing with standard Reed-Soloman (RS) (255,237) FEC. Performance monitoring and ITU-T G.709 Optical Data Unit (ODU) synchronous mapping. Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) with ITU-T G.709 ODU with greater than 8 dB coding gain. • The trunk rate remains the same irrespective of the FEC configuration. The error coding performance can be provisioned as follows: – FEC—Standard ITU-T G.709. – E-FEC—Standard ITU-T G.975.1 (subclause I.7) • IEEE 802.3 frame format supported for 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The minimum frame size is 64 bytes. The maximum frame size is user-provisionable. • Supports fixed/no fixed stuff mapping (insertion of stuffing bytes) for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy signals (only in transponder configuration). • Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to 10G Ethernet WAN Phy conversion on Ports 1 (client port) and 3 (trunk port). • Supports 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion using CTC and TL1. When enabled on the OTU2_XP card, the first Channel (Ports 1 and 3) supports LAN to WAN conversion. The second channel carries normal 10GE, 10G FC, and OC192/STM64 traffic. • The LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion functions in accordance to WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) mechanism as defined by IEEE802.3ae (IEEE Std 802.3ae-2002, Amendment to CSMA/CD). • Default configuration is transponder, with trunk ports configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FEC. • In transponder or regenerator configuration, if one of the ports is configured the corresponding port is automatically created. • In regenerator configuration, only Ports 3 and 4 can be configured as E-FEC. Ports 1 and 2 can be configured only with standard FEC. • When port pair 1-3 or 2-4 is configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is standard regenerator), the default configuration on Ports 3 and 4 is automatically set to standard FEC. • When Ports 3 and 4 are configured as regenerator (that is, card mode is E-FEC regenerator), the default configuration on both these ports is automatically set to E-FEC. • In splitter protected transponder configuration, the trunk ports (Ports 3 and 4) are configured as ITU-T G.709 standard FECor E-FEC. • Supports protection through Y-cable protection scheme. Note When enabled, the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature does not support Y-cable protection on the LAN to WAN interface (ports 1 and 3). • Client ports support SONET SR1, IR2, and LR2 XFPs, 10GE BASE SR, SW, LR, LW, ER, EW, and ZR XFPs, and 10G FC MX-SN-I and SM-LL-L XFPs. • Following are the OTU2 link rates that are supported on the OTU2_XP trunk port: – Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “SONET” (including 10G Ethernet WAN PHY) (9.95328 Gbps). 11-99 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card – G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.2 (11.0491 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed Stuff” enabled. – G.709 overclocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G. Sup43 Clause 7.1 (11.0957 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Ethernet LAN Phy” (10.3125 Gbps) with “No Fixed Stuff” disabled. – G.709 proprietary overclocking mode to transport 10G FC (11.3168 Gbps) when the client is provisioned as “10G Fiber Channel” (10.518 Gbps). – Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. • The MTU setting is used to display the ifInerrors and OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 11.16.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-22 shows the OTU2_XP card faceplate and block diagram. 11-100 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card Figure 11-22 OTU2_XP Card Faceplate and Block Diagram Note The Swan FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is enabled on the OTU2_XP card. The Barile FPGA is automatically loaded when the LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature is disabled on the OTU2_XP card. 241984 SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES Barile FPGA SWAN FPGA XFP 1 XFP 3 SERDES G.709-FEC framer SERDES MPC8360 core Power supply Clocking XFP 2 SCL FPGA XFP 4 11-101 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 11.16.3 OTU2_XP Card Interface The OTU2_XP card is a multi-functional card that operates in different configurations, such as transponder, standard regenerator, E-FEC regenerator, and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion mode. The OTU2_XP card acts as a protected transponder, when the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy is in splitter protected transponder configuration mode. Depending on the configuration of the OTU2_XP card, the ports act as client or trunk ports (see Table 11-25). This following section describes the client and trunk rates supported on the OTU2_XP card for different card configurations: 11.16.3.1 Client Interface In transponder and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy card configurations, Ports 1 and 2 act as client ports and in splitter protected transponder configuration, Port 1 acts as a client port. For these card configurations, the client rates supported are: • OC-192/STM-64 • 10G Ethernet WAN Phy • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy • 10G Fibre Channel • IB_5G 11.16.3.2 Trunk Interface In transponder, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, and splitter protected transponder card configurations, Ports 3 and 4 act as trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rates supported are: • OC-192/STM-64 • 10G Ethernet WAN Phy • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy • 10G Fibre Channel • OTU2 G.709 • Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. In standard regenerator card configuration, all four ports act as trunk ports and in E-FEC regenerator configuration, Ports 3 and 4 act as the trunk ports. For these card configurations, the trunk rate supported is OTU2 G.709 Note The above mentioned OTU2 signal must be an OC-192/STM-64, 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy, or 10G Fibre Channel signal packaged into an OTU2 G.709 frame. Additionally, the standard regenerator and E-FEC regenerator configuration supports an OTU2 signal that is OTU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals. 11-102 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 11.16.4 Configuration Management The OTU2_XP card supports the following configuration management parameters: • Card Configuration—Provisionable card configuration: Transponder, Standard Regen, Enhanced FEC, or Mixed, or 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. • Port Mode—Provisionable port mode when the card configuration is set as Mixed. The port mode can be chosen as either Transponder or Standard Regen for each port pair (1-3 and 2-4). For card configurations other than Mixed, CTC automatically sets the port mode depending on the selected card configuration. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the port pair (1-3) as 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy. Port pair (2-4) in 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode is selected as Transponder or Standard Regen. • Termination Mode—Provisionable termination mode when the card configuration is set as either Transponder or Mixed. The termination mode can be chosen as Transparent, Section, or Line. For Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, CTC automatically sets the termination mode as Transparent. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the Termination Mode of port pair (1-3) as Line. You cannot provision the Termination Mode parameter. • AIS/Squelch—Provisionable AIS/Squelch mode configuration when the card configuration is set as either Transponder, Mixed, or Standard Regen. The AIS/Squelch mode configuration can be chosen as AIS or Squelch. For Enhanced FEC card configuration, CTC automatically sets the AIS/Squelch mode configuration as AIS. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, the CTC automatically selects the AIS/Squelch of port pair (1-3) as Squelch. You cannot provision the AIS/Squelch parameter. Note When AIS/Squelch is enabled in Standard Regen configuration with port pairs (1-3) and (2-4), Squelch is supported on ports 1 and 2 and AIS on ports 3 and 4. Note When you choose the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion, the Termination mode is automatically set to LINE. The AIS/Squelch is set to SQUELCH and ODU Transparency is set to Cisco Extended Use for Ports 1 and 3. • Regen Line Name—User-assigned text string for regeneration line name. • ODU Transparency—Provisionable ODU overhead byte configuration, either Transparent Standard Use or Cisco Extended Use. See the “11.16.7 ODU Transparency” section on page 11-104 for more detailed information. For 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, CTC automatically selects the ODU Transparency as Cisco Extended Use. You cannot provision the ODU Transparency parameter. • Port name—User-assigned text string. • Admin State/Service State—Administrative and service states to manage and view port status. • ALS Mode—Provisionable ALS function. • Reach—Provisionable optical reach distance of the port. • Wavelength—Provisionable wavelength of the port. • AINS Soak—Provisionable automatic in-service soak period. 11-103 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules The following rules apply to OTU2_XP card configurations: • When you preprovision the card, port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 come up in the default Transponder configuration. • The port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 can be configured in different modes only when the card configuration is Mixed. If the card configuration is Mixed, you must choose different modes on port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 (that is, one port pair in Transponder mode and the other port pair in Standard Regen mode). • If the card is in Transponder configuration, you can change the configuration to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC. • If the card is in Standard Regen configuration and you have configured only one port pair, then configuring payload rates for the other port pair automatically changes the card configuration to Mixed, with the new port pair in Transponder mode. • If the card is in Standard Regen configuration, you cannot directly change the configuration to Enhanced FEC. You have to change to Transponder configuration and then configure the card as Enhanced FEC. • If the card is in Enhanced FEC configuration, Ports 1 and 2 are disabled. Hence, you cannot directly change the configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. You must remove the Enhanced FEC group by moving the card to Transponder configuration, provision PPM on Ports 1 and 2, and then change the card configuration to Standard Regen or Mixed. • If the card is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC configuration, you cannot change the payload rate of the port pairs. You have to change the configuration to Transponder, change the payload rate, and then move the card configuration back to Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC. • If any of the affected ports are in IS (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) state, you cannot change the card configuration. • If IB_5G payload has to be provisioned, the NE Default should match the values listed in the Table 11-26. For more information on editing the NE Default values, see the “NTP-G135 Edit Network Element Defaults” task on page 24-23. • If the card is changed to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy, the first PPM port is deleted and replaced by a 10G Ethernet port; the third PPM port is deleted and automatically replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH) port. The third PPM port is automatically deleted and the third PPM port is replaced with OC192/STM64 (SONET/SDH). Table 11-27 provides a summary of transitions allowed for the OTU2_XP card configurations. Table 11-26 OTU2_XP Card Configuration for IB_5G Payload Provisioning Parameter NE Default Name Value FEC OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.FEC Standard ITU-T G.709 OTN OTU2-XP.otn.otnLines.G709OTN Enable Termination Mode OTU2-XP.config.port.TerminationMode Transparent ODU Transparency OTU2-XP.config.port.OduTransparency Cisco Extended Use AIS/Squelch OTU2-XP.config.port.AisSquelchMode Squelch 11-104 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards OTU2_XP Card 11.16.6 Security The OTU2_XP card, when an XFP is plugged into it, implements the Cisco Standard Security Code Check Algorithm that keys on vendor ID and serial number. If a PPM is plugged into a port on the card but fails the security code check because it is not a Cisco PPM, a NON-CISCO-PPM Not Reported (NR) condition occurs. If a PPM with a non-qualified product ID is plugged into a port on this card, that is, the PPM passes the security code as a Cisco PPM but it has not been qualified for use on the OTU2_XP card, a UNQUAL-PPM NR condition occurs. 11.16.7 ODU Transparency A key feature of the OTU2_XP card is the ability to configure the ODU overhead bytes (EXP bytes and RES bytes 1 and 2) using the ODU Transparency parameter. The two options available for this parameter are: • Transparent Standard Use—ODU overhead bytes are transparently passed through the card. This option allows the OTU2_XP card to act transparently between two trunk ports (when the card is configured in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC). • Cisco Extended Use—ODU overhead bytes are terminated and regenerated on both ports of the regenerator group. Table 11-27 Card Configuration Transition Summary Card Configuration Transition To Transponder Standard Regen Enhanced FEC Mixed 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Transponder — Yes Yes Yes Yes Standard Regen Yes — No Yes Yes Enhanced FEC Yes No — No No Mixed Yes Yes No — Yes 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Yes Yes No The 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy to Mixed is supported if the Port pair 1-3 is chosen as Transponder. The 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy to Mixed is not supported if the Port pair 1-3 is chosen as Standard Regen. — 11-105 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card The ODU Transparency parameter is configurable only for Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configuration. For Transponder card configuration, this parameter defaults to Cisco Extended Use and cannot be changed. Note The Forward Error Correction (FEC) Mismatch (FEC-MISM) alarm will not be raised on OTU2_XP card when you choose Transparent Standard Use. 11.16.8 OTU2_XP Functions The functions of the OTU2_XP card are: • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • G.35.1 Y-Cable and Splitter Protection, page G-27 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-11 on page G-12 11.16.9 Related Procedures for OTU2_XP Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the OTU2_XP card: • NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-426 • NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162 • NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.17 TXP_MR_10EX_C Card The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is a multirate transponder for the ONS 15454 platform. The card is fully backward compatible with TXP_MR_10E_C cards (only when the error decorrelator is disabled in the CTC on the TXP_MR_10EX_C card). It processes one 10-Gbps signal (client side) into one 10-Gbps, 100-GHz DWDM signal (trunk side). The TXP_MR_10EX_C card is tunable over the 82 channels of C-band (82 channels spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid). You can install TXP_MR_10EX_C card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The card can be provisioned in linear, BLSR/MS-SPRing, path protection/SNCP configurations or as a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The TXP_MR_10EX_C card features an MLSE-based Universal Transponder 1550-nm tunable laser and a separately orderable ONS-XC-10G-S1 1310-nm or ONS-XC-10G-L2 1550-nm laser XFP module for the client port. Note The PRE FEC BER performance of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card may be significantly low when compared to the TXP_MR_10E card. However, this does not affect the Post FEC BER performance, but could possibly affect any specific monitoring application that relies on the PRE FEC BER value (for example, protection switching). In this case, the replacement of TXP_MR_10E card with the TXP_MR_10EX_C may not work properly. 11-106 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Note When the ONS-XC-10G-L2 XFP is installed, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card must be installed in a high-speed slot (slot 6, 7, 12, or 13) On its faceplate, the TXP_MR_10EX_C card contains two transmit and receive connector pairs, one for the trunk port and one for the client port. Each connector pair is labeled. 11.17.1 Key Features The key features of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are: • A multi-rate client interface (available through the ONS-XC-10G-S1 XFP, ordered separately): – OC-192 (SR1) – 10GE (10GBASE-LR) – 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) – (ONS-XC-10G-S1 version 3 only) IB_5G • An MLSE-based UT module tunable through 82 channels of C-band. The channels are spaced at 50 GHz on the ITU grid. • OC-192 to ITU-T G.709 OTU2 provisionable synchronous and asynchronous mapping. • Proprietary rate at the trunk when the client is provisioned as IB_5G. • The MTU setting is used to display the OverSizePkts counters on the receiving trunk and client port interfaces. Traffic of frame sizes up to 65535 bytes pass without any packet drops, from the client port to the trunk port and vice versa irrespective of the MTU setting. 11.17.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-23 shows the TXP_MR_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram. 11-107 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Figure 11-23 TXP_MR_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 15-dB fiber attenuator (10 to 20 dB) when working with the TXP_MR_10EX_C card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with this card, because they can cause irreparable damage to the card. 11.17.3 TXP_MR_10EX_C Functions The functions of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card are: • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15 • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.10 Client-to-Trunk Mapping, page G-17 • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 uP bus Serial bus uP Flash RAM Optical transceiver 247063 Framer/FEC/DWDM processor Client interface DWDM trunk (long range) Optical transceiver Backplane FAIL ACT/STBY SF 10E MR TXP L TX RX RX TX DWDM trunk STM-64/OC-192 82 tunable channels (C-band) on the 50-GHz ITU Client interface STM-64/OC-192 or 10GE (10GBASE-LR) or 10G-FC (1200-SM-LL-L) 11-108 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10. 11.17.4 Related Procedures for TXP_MR_10EX_C Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the TXP_MR_10EX_C card: • NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-191 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.18 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is a DWDM muxponder for the ONS 15454 platform that supports transparent termination mode on the client side. The faceplate designation of the card is “4x2.5G 10EX MXP.” The card multiplexes four 2.5-Gbps client signals (4xOC48/STM-16 SFP) into a single 10-Gbps DWDM optical signal on the trunk side. The card provides wavelength transmission service for the four incoming 2.5-Gbps client interfaces. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card works with OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. You can install the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. You can provision a card in a linear configuration, a BLSR/MS-SPRing, a path protection/SNCP, or a regenerator. The card can be used in the middle of BLSR/MS-SPRing or 1+1 spans when the card is configured for transparent termination mode. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. The card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Note When you create a 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit, you need to select the G.709 and Synchronous options. A 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit is supported by G.709 and synchronous mode, which are necessary to provision the 4xOC-48 OCHCC circuit. 11.18.1 Key Features The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has the following high-level features: 11-109 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card • Four 2.5-Gbps client interfaces (OC-48/STM-16) and one 10-Gbps trunk. The four OC-48 signals are mapped into an ITU-T G.709 OTU2 signal using standard ITU-T G.709 multiplexing. • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. • Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card has modular interfaces. Two types of optic modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its overhead bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available, the card automatically synchronize to one of the input client-interface clocks. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client interface output if LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. 11.18.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-24 shows the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C faceplate and block diagram. 11-110 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card Figure 11-24 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.1 Class 1 Laser Product Cards” section on page G-1. 11.18.3 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Functions The functions of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card are: • G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15 • G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • G.9 FEC and E-FEC Modes, page G-16 • G.12 Multiplexing Function, page G-18 • G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.13 SONET/SDH Overhead Byte Processing, page G-19 • G.14 Client Interface Monitoring, page G-19 FAIL ACT/STBY SF 4x2.5 10 E MXP L RX TX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RAM Processor 247064 Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Optical transceiver Backplane FEC/ Wrapper E-FEC Processor (G.709 FEC) Serial bus uP bus Onboard Flash memory SR-1 (short reach/intra-office) or IR-1 (intermediate range) SFP client optics modules DWDM (trunk) 10GE (10GBASE-LR) 11-111 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card • G.2 Automatic Laser Shutdown, page G-6 • G.15 Jitter, page G-19 • G.16 Lamp Test, page G-19 • G.17 Onboard Traffic Generation, page G-19 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-6 on page G-10 11.18.3.1 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card implements the MLSE-based UT module. The MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card uses a C-band version of the UT2. Table 11-28 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 11-112 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11.18.4 Related Procedures for MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card: • NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-261 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 11.19 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card aggregates a mix of client SAN service-client inputs (GE, FICON, and Fibre Channel) into one 10-Gbps STM-64/OC-192 DWDM signal on the trunk side. It provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card and is compliant with Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.957. The card supports aggregation of the following signal types: • 1-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 2-Gigabit Fibre Channel 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 11-28 MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 11-113 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card • 4-Gigabit Fibre Channel • 1-Gigabit Ethernet • 1-Gigabit ISC-Compatible (ISC-1) • 2-Gigabit ISC-Peer (ISC-3) Caution The card can be damaged by dropping it. Handle it carefully. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder passes all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card works with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The card supports ODU1 to OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. See the “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. Note You cannot disable ITU-T G.709 on the trunk side. If ITU-T G.709 is enabled, then FEC cannot be disabled. Note Because the client payload cannot oversubscribe the trunk, a mix of client signals can be accepted, up to a maximum limit of 10 Gbps. You can install the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card in slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Note The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is not compatible with the MXP_2.5G_10G card, which does not support transparent termination mode. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a tunable 1550-nm C-band laser on the trunk port. The laser is tunable across 82 wavelengths on the ITU grid with 50-GHz spacing between wavelengths. Each card features four 1310-nm lasers on the client ports and contains five transmit and receive connector pairs (labeled) on the card faceplate. The card uses dual LC connectors on the trunk side and SFP modules on the client side for optical cable termination. The SFP pluggable modules are SR or IR and support an LC fiber connector. Table 11-29 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The current version of the GFP-T G.7041 supports transparent mapping of 8B/10B block-coded protocols, including Gigabit Ethernet, Fibre Channel, ISC, and FICON. In addition to the GFP mapping, 1-Gbps traffic on Port 1 or 2 of the high-speed SERDES is mapped to an STS-24c channel. If two 1-Gbps client signals are present at Port 1 and Port 2 of the high-speed SERDES, the Port 1 signal is mapped into the first STS-24c channel and the Port 2 signal into the second STS-24c channel. The two channels are then mapped into an OC-48 trunk channel. Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation 2G FC 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FC 1.06 Gbps Yes 11-114 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card includes two FPGAs, and a group of four ports is mapped to each FPGA. Group 1 consists of Ports 1 through 4, and Group 2 consists of Ports 5 through 8. Table 11-30 shows some of the mix and match possibilities on the various client data rates for Ports 1 through 4, and Ports 5 through 8. An X indicates that the data rate is supported in that port. GFP-T PM is available through RMON and trunk PM is managed according to Telcordia GR-253-CORE and ITU G.783/826. Client PM is achieved through RMON for FC and GE. A buffer-to-buffer credit management scheme provides FC flow control. With this feature enabled, a port indicates the number of frames that can be sent to it (its buffer credit), before the sender is required to stop transmitting and wait for the receipt of a “ready” indication. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card supports FC credit-based flow control with a buffer-to-buffer credit extension of up to 1600 km (994.1 miles) for 1G FC, up to 800 km (497.1 miles) for 2G FC, or up to 400 km (248.5 miles) for 4G FC. The feature can be enabled or disabled. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card features a 1550-nm laser for the trunk/line port and a 1310-nm or 850-nm laser (depending on the SFP) for the client ports. The card contains eight 12.5-degree downward-tilt SFP modules for the client interfaces. For optical termination, each SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. The trunk port is a dual-LC connector with a 45-degree downward angle. 11.19.1 Key Features The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has the following high-level features: • Onboard E-FEC processor: The processor supports both standard RS (specified in ITU-T G.709) and E-FEC, which allows an improved gain on trunk interfaces with a resultant extension of the transmission range on these interfaces. The E-FEC functionality increases the correction capability of the transponder to improve performance, allowing operation at a lower OSNR compared to the standard RS (237,255) correction algorithm. 2G FICON/2G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 2G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 2.125 Gbps Yes 1G FICON/1G ISC-Compatible (ISC-1)/ 1G ISC-Peer (ISC-3) 1.06 Gbps Yes Gigabit Ethernet 1.25 Gbps Yes Table 11-29 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation (continued) Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP-T G.7041 Encapsulation Table 11-30 Supported Client Data Rates for Ports 1 through 4 and Ports 5 through 8 Port (Group 1) Port (Group 2) Gigabit Ethernet 1G FC 2G FC 4G FC 1 5 X X X X 2 6 X X — — 3 7 X X X — 4 8 X X — — 11-115 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card • Pluggable client-interface optic modules: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card has modular interfaces. Two types of optics modules can be plugged into the card. These modules include an OC-48/STM-16 SR-1 interface with a 7-km (4.3-mile) nominal range (for short range and intra-office applications) and an IR-1 interface with a range of up to 40 km (24.9 miles). SR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in I-16 (ITU-T G.957). IR-1 is defined in Telcordia GR-253-CORE and in S-16-1 (ITU-T G.957). • Y-cable protection: The card supports Y-cable protection between the same card type only, on ports with the same port number and signal rate. See the “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27 for more detailed information. • High-level provisioning support: The card is initially provisioned using Cisco TransportPlanner software. Subsequently, the card can be monitored and provisioned using CTC software. • ALS: This safety mechanism is used in the event of a fiber cut. For details regarding ALS provisioning for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, see the “NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings” section on page 11-448. • Link monitoring and management: The card uses standard OC-48 OH (overhead) bytes to monitor and manage incoming interfaces. The card passes the incoming SDH/SONET data stream and its OH (overhead) bytes transparently. • Control of layered SONET/SDH transport overhead: The card is provisionable to terminate regenerator section overhead, which eliminates forwarding of unneeded layer overhead. It can help reduce the number of alarms and help isolate faults in the network. • Automatic timing source synchronization: The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card normally synchronizes from the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE card. If for some reason, such as maintenance or upgrade activity, the TCC2/TCC2P/TCC3/TNC/TNCE/TSC/TSCE is not available, the card automatically synchronizes to one of the input client-interface clocks. Note MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card cannot be used for line timing. • Configurable squelching policy: The card can be configured to squelch the client-interface output if LOS occurs at the DWDM receiver or if a remote fault occurs. In the event of a remote fault, the card manages MS-AIS insertion. • The card is tunable across the full C-band, thus eliminating the need to use different versions of each card to provide tunability across specific wavelengths in a band. • You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch. 11.19.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-25 shows the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C faceplate and block diagram. 11-116 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Figure 11-25 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Faceplate and Block Diagram For information about safety labels for the card, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the card in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the card, because they can cause irreparable damage to the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. 11.19.3 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Functions The functions of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card are: • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11 10DME-C FAIL ACT/STBY SF 247065 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX DWDM 4 RX TX SPF 1/1 4G FC SerDes 1 x QDR 2M x 36bit Burst4 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA Framer G.709/FEC OTN MXP UT2 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 2/1 SPF 3/1 CPU Core FPGA Power supply SPF 4/1 SPF 6/1 4G FC SerDes 1/2/4G-FC B2B Credit Mgt FPGA 5x I/O 5x I/O SPF 7/1 SPF 8/1 SPF 9/1 Client ports Group 1 Group 2 11-117 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11.19.3.1 Wavelength Identification The card uses trunk lasers that are wavelocked, which allows the trunk transmitter to operate on the ITU grid effectively. The MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card uses a C-band version of the MLSE-based UT module. Table 11-31 describes the required trunk transmit laser wavelengths for the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. The laser is tunable over 82 wavelengths in the C-band at 50-GHz spacing on the ITU grid. Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 1 196.00 1529.55 42 193.95 1545.72 2 195.95 1529.94 43 193.90 1546.119 3 195.90 1530.334 44 193.85 1546.518 4 195.85 1530.725 45 193.80 1546.917 5 195.80 1531.116 46 193.75 1547.316 6 195.75 1531.507 47 193.70 1547.715 7 195.70 1531.898 48 193.65 1548.115 8 195.65 1532.290 49 193.60 1548.515 9 195.60 1532.681 50 193.55 1548.915 10 195.55 1533.073 51 193.50 1549.32 11 195.50 1533.47 52 193.45 1549.71 12 195.45 1533.86 53 193.40 1550.116 13 195.40 1534.250 54 193.35 1550.517 14 195.35 1534.643 55 193.30 1550.918 15 195.30 1535.036 56 193.25 1551.319 16 195.25 1535.429 57 193.20 1551.721 17 195.20 1535.822 58 193.15 1552.122 18 195.15 1536.216 59 193.10 1552.524 19 195.10 1536.609 60 193.05 1552.926 20 195.05 1537.003 61 193.00 1553.33 21 195.00 1537.40 62 192.95 1553.73 22 194.95 1537.79 63 192.90 1554.134 23 194.90 1538.186 64 192.85 1554.537 11-118 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card 11.19.4 Related Procedures for MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card: • NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-300 • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance 24 194.85 1538.581 65 192.80 1554.940 25 194.80 1538.976 66 192.75 1555.343 26 194.75 1539.371 67 192.70 1555.747 27 194.70 1539.766 68 192.65 1556.151 28 194.65 1540.162 69 192.60 1556.555 29 194.60 1540.557 70 192.55 1556.959 30 194.55 1540.953 71 192.50 1557.36 31 194.50 1541.35 72 192.45 1557.77 32 194.45 1541.75 73 192.40 1558.173 33 194.40 1542.142 74 192.35 1558.578 34 194.35 1542.539 75 192.30 1558.983 35 194.30 1542.936 76 192.25 1559.389 36 194.25 1543.333 77 192.20 1559.794 37 194.20 1543.730 78 192.15 1560.200 38 194.15 1544.128 79 192.10 1560.606 39 194.10 1544.526 80 192.05 1561.013 40 194.05 1544.924 81 192.00 1561.42 41 194.00 1545.32 82 191.95 1561.83 Table 11-31 MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Trunk Wavelengths (continued) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Channel Number Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) 11-119 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11.20 AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards The AR_MXP (Any-Rate Muxponder) and AR_XP (Any-Rate Xponder) cards are supported on ONS 15454, ONS 15454 M2, and ONS 15454 M6 platforms. The AR_MXP card supports a trunk bandwidth of up to 10 Gbps, and the AR_XP card supports a trunk bandwidth of up to 20 Gbps. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards aggregate a mix of client SAN services (FC or FICON 1G/2G/4G/8G, ESCON and ISC3-STP 1G/2G), Ethernet (GE, FE), OCn (OC3/STM-1, OC12/STM-4, and OC48/STM-16), OTU (OTU1, OTU2e/1e), and Video (SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI) into one 10 Gbps signal on the trunk side. The cards support aggregation of the following signal types: • SONET/SDH: – STM-1/OC-3 – STM-4/OC-12 – STM-16/OC-48 11-120 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards • OTN: – OTU-1 – OTU-2 (OTU1E/OTU2E) • Ethernet: – Fast Ethernet (FE) – Gigabit Ethernet (GE) • SAN: – Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) – 1 Gigabit Fiber Channel or fiber connectivity (FICON) – 2 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON – 4 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON – 8 Gigabit Fiber Channel or FICON – 1G ISC3-STP – 2G ISC3-STP • Video: – SD-SDI (270 Mbps) – HD-SDI (1.485 Gbps) – Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI) (2.970 Gbps) The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards pass all SONET/SDH overhead bytes transparently. Caution The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be damaged if dropped. Handle it safely. Table 11-32 shows the input data rate for each client interface, and the encapsulation method. The digital wrapper function (ITU-T G.709 compliant) formats the DWDM wavelength so that it can be used to set up GCCs for data communications, enable FEC, or facilitate PM. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards work with the OTN devices defined in ITU-T G.709. The client can be OTU1 with standard G.975 FEC or disabled FEC. The cards provide standard 4 x OTU1 to OTU2 multiplexing. The OTU2 card is equipped with standard G.709 FEC, E-FEC I.4, E-FEC I.7 and disabled FEC. The cards support ODU1 to OTU1 or OTU2 multiplexing, an industry standard method for asynchronously mapping a SONET/SDH payload into a digitally wrapped envelope. For more details on multiplexing, see “G.12 Multiplexing Function” section on page G-18. Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation OC3/ STM1 155.52 Mbps — OC12/STM4 622.08 Mbps — OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbps — FE 100 Mbps GFP-F GE 1.125 Gbps GFP-F 1GFC 1.06 Gbps GFP-T 11-121 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11.20.1 Key Features The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following key features: • Multiple Operating Modes—The AR_MXP or AR_XP cards can be configured into multiple operating modes. The cards are equipped with pluggables for client and trunk options, and offer a large variety of configurations. For more information about multiple operating modes, see 11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes, page 11-126. • Operating Mode to Client Payload Mapping—Each operating mode supports a specific set of client payloads. Table 11-33 and Table 11-34 lists the supported payloads for each operating mode. Table 11-33 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—SONET/SDH, Ethernet, OTU1, and FC 2GFC 2.125 Gbps GFP-T 4GFC 4.25 Gbps GFP-T 8GFC 8.5 Gbps GFP-T OTU1 2.66 Gbps — OTU2 10.7 Gbps — ESCON 200 Mbps GFP-T 1G ISC3-STP 1.06 Gbps GFP-T 2G ISC3-STP 2.125 Gbps GFP-T HD-SDI 1.485 Gbps GFP-F SD-SDI 270 Mbps GFP-F 3G-SDI 2.970 Gbps GFP-F Table 11-32 AR_MXP and AR_XP Client Interface Data Rates and Encapsulation Client Interface Input Data Rate GFP Encapsulation Card Mode Rate SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC OC3/ STM1 OC12/ STM4 OC48/ STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e FICON1G/ FC1G FICON2G/ FC2G FICON4G/ FC4G TXP_MR LOW Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A MXP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes MXP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes MXPP_MR LOW Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No HIGH Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No 11-122 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Table 11-34 AR_MXP and AR_XP Card Supported Client-Payload Mapping—ISC and Video • Auto Sensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support auto sensing of client payloads. The line card analyzes the received client signal and configures the payload on the client port automatically without user intervention. Auto sensing feature is supported on the Gigabit Ethernet, OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads. Following operating card modes support the autosensing feature: – TXP (low rate) – TXPP (low rate) – MXP_MR (low and high Rate) – MXPP_MR (low and high rate) CTC supports the configuration of all the provisioning parameters supported by the autosensed payload. However, creation and deletion of the MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No Yes No No Yes No No No No N MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No No No No No No N REGEN HIGH No No No No No No Yes No No No N LOW No No No No No Yes No No No No N ISC Video Card Mode Rate ISC-1 ISC3_S TP_1G ISC3_S TP_2G SD-SDI HD-SDI 3G-SDI TXP_MR LOW No Yes Yes No No No HIGH No No No No No No TXPP_MR LOW N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A HIGH N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A MXP_DME HIGH No No No No No No MXPP_DME HIGH No No No No No No MXP_MR LOW No No No No No No HIGH No No No Yes Yes No MXPP_MR LOW No No No No No No HIGH No No No Yes Yes No MXP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No MXPP-4x2.5-10G HIGH No No No No No No MXP-VD-10G HIGH No No No No No Yes REGEN HIGH No No No No No No LOW No No No No No No Card Mode Rate SONET/SDH Ethernet OTU FC OC3/ STM1 OC12/ STM4 OC48/ STM16 FE GE OTU1 OTU2e FICON1G/ FC1G FICON2G/ FC2G FICON4G/ FC4G FI FC 11-123 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards circuits are the only configurations supported on the “AUTO” payload. • Video Multiplexing—The AR_XP cards support the capability to multiplex SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals over the OTU2 trunk interface allowing to maximize the wavelength bandwidth, maintain full transparency for uncompressed signals, and reduce latency. The video multiplexing of 3G-SDI signal is not supported on the AR_MXP card. • Regenerator Mode—This mode regenerates the OTU2e or OTU1 signals with ODU transparent or CISCO Extended Use options. For OTU2e, FEC can be Disabled, Standard G.975, EFEC I.4 or EFEC I.7, and for OTU1, FEC can be Standard G.975 or Disabled. • High Speed GCCs—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the provisioning of GCC channel on OTN (OTU1/OTU2) enabled client and trunk ports. A maximum of five GCC channels on the Cisco ONS 15454 shelf and ten GCC channels on Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf can be created. The high speed GCC enables you to create the GCC when both the NE and FE line cards are in Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf. The legacy GCC on Cisco ONS 15454 shelf can be selected on one side and the Cisco ONS 15454, Cisco ONS 15454 M2 or Cisco ONS 15454 M6 shelf on the other side. • Y-cable protection—Y-cable protection between the same card type is supported only on ports with the same port number and signal rate. For more detailed information, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27. • Licensing—The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards offer you an unprecedented flexibility. The cards support a wide range of different applications and configurations. To help you take advantage of such flexibility to lower capital expenditures (CapEx) on your network, Cisco provides a licensing model for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards. For more information on licensing, see the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Licensing Configuration Guide. 11.20.2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 11-26 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP faceplates. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have eight SFP and two XFP ports. The client and trunk ports are either SFP (2.5 G) or XFP (10 G) based ports. The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be tuned to any wavelength over the C-band by inserting the required DWDM SFP or XFP on client or trunk ports. For optical termination, each XFP/SFP uses two LC connectors, which are labeled TX and RX on the faceplate. 11-124 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-26 AR_MXP and AR_XP Faceplates Figure 11-27 shows the AXP_MXP and AR_XP block diagram. COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 AR-MXP FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX 9 10 TX RX 1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8 TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No.50, DATED JUNE 24, 2007 AR-XP FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX RX 9 10 TX RX 1 2 3 4 9 10 5 6 7 8 TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX 246868 11-125 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-27 AR_MXP and AR_XP Block Diagram For information on safety labels for the cards, see the “G.1.2 Class 1M Laser Product Cards” section on page G-4. Caution A 15 to 20 dB fiber attenuator must be used when working with the cards in a loopback on the trunk port. Do not use direct fiber loopbacks with the cards. Using direct fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the DWDM/CWDM XFP/SFPs plugged in AXP_MXP or AR_XP card. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards can be installed in Slot 1 to Slot 6 and Slot 12 to Slot 17 in the Cisco ONS 15454 chassis, the Slot 2 to Slot 7 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M6 chassis, and Slot 2 and Slot 3 in the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 chassis. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards do not interoperate with all the existing TXP or MXP cards. The AR_MXP card allows you to configure only one high rate XFP port. This can be a muxponder mode where N [N= 1 to 8] client ports goes out via 1 trunk XFP port or in a transponder mode where client and trunk are XFP ports. There is no limitation in the AR_XP card, where you can use both high rate trunk ports simultaneously. The AR_XP card allows you to configure two high rate operational modes, where as you can configure only one high rate operational mode on the AR_MXP card. 246867 Backplane Switch L2 PROTO Only Arrow PROTO Only OTN Framer/ASIC PCIe Switch Soliera Flash FPGA FE PHY FE PHY TNC Main RMII MII MII RGMII SCC Optional ASIC Control Channel TNC Protect Local Bus eTSEC1 DDR2 Controller DDR2 1Gbit DDR2 1Gbit Log Flash Flash 16bit PCIe SPI 16bit SGMII 32bit Pallerone FPGA GTX0 GTX1 16bit UCC3 TNC DMA controller e500 Core MPC8568E UCC1 SCL UCC7 UCC5 x1 x4 x1 x1 x1 11-126 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards 11.20.3 Multiple Operating Modes A single AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured into multiple operating modes. Criteria for selecting a particular operational mode are defined by the network level design. CTP helps you to choose the appropriate operational mode. Each operating mode is divided into two categories based on the trunk rate: – Low rate (trunk rate < 5G) – High rate (trunk rate > 5G) When you configure the AR_MXP or AR_XP card in to multiple operational modes, make sure that the following tasks are completed: • The OCHCC circuit should be created for Any-rate mode. • Same operational mode is configured at both ends and ensure the port numbers are same on both ends. • The OCHCC circuit should be created between the same client port numbers at the near and far end. • Ensure ODU and TS are matching on both ends. • For auto sensing payloads created on auto ports, you should check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the provisioning pane. • Check the Auto Sensing checkbox in the provisioning pane on the auto provisioned ports for the auto sensing payload. • WSON circuits cannot be created for AR_MXP and AR_XP cards. • PPMs must be provisioned on all ports before configuring the operational mode. The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards support the following operating modes: • TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder), page 11-126 • TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder), page 11-128 • MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder), page 11-129 • MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder), page 11-130 • MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-131 • MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder), page 11-133 • MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder), page 11-134 • MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder), page 11-135 • REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator), page 11-135 • MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder), page 11-137 TXP_MR (Unprotected Transponder) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate TXP_MR card mode. Note OTN cannot be enabled for 4GFC trunk ports. 11-127 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards • Low Rate—A maximum of four TXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-28). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Two SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, and/or 4-8. 2. Ports 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, or 7 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 can be configured as client ports. Note The trunk port is not created when the low-rate TXP_MR card operating mode is configured. It is created after the client payload is created. Figure 11-28 Low-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration • High Rate—Only one TXP_MR configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-29). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate TXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. XFP ports 9 and 10 must be grouped. 2. Port 10 must be configured as a trunk port. 3. Port 9 must be configured as a client port. 11-128 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-29 High-Rate TXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration TXPP_MR (Protected Transponder) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card mode. A maximum of two TXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-30). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate TXPP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Three SFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-5-6 or 2-7-8, or both. 2. Ports 5 and 6, and 7 and 8 must be configured as trunk ports, where 6 and 8 are the protect trunk ports for 5 and 6 respectively. 3. Ports 1 and 2 must be configured as client ports. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5-6 and 7-8. 11-129 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-30 Low-Rate TXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration MXP_DME (Unprotected Data Muxponder) The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1 or 8:1 MXP_DME card mode. The AR_MXP card can be configured as a high rate 8:1 MXP_DME card mode. • 4:1 MXP_DME mode—A maximum of two MXP_DME configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:1 MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Four SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or 5-6-7-8-10, or both. 2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, and 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports. • 8:1 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-31). The AR_MXP or AR_XP can be configured card as a high-rate 8:1 MXP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Eight SFP ports and one XFP port must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9. 2. Port 9 must be configured as a trunk port. 3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports. 11-130 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-31 High-Rate MXP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration MXPP_DME (Protected Data Muxponder) The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 or 8:2 MXPP_DME card mode. • 4:2 MXP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 4:2 MXPP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9-10 or 5-6-7-8-9-10. 2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, or 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be configured as client ports. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk port for port 9. • 8:2 MXPP_DME mode—Only one MXPP_DME configuration can be provisioned on a single AR_XP card (Figure 11-32). The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate 8:2 MXPP_DME card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Eight SFP ports and two XFP ports must be grouped. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10. 2. Ports 9 and 10 must be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1 to 8 must be configured as client ports. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk port for port 9. 11-131 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-32 High-Rate MXPP_DME Card Operating Mode Configuration MXP_MR (Unprotected Multirate Muxponder) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXP_MR card mode. • Low Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the availability of client ports (Figure 11-33). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 7. 2. Only ports 5, 6, 7, or 8 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if they are not configured as trunk ports. Any client port can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services. Minimum of two client ports should be part of the operational mode group. 11-132 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-33 Low-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration • High Rate—A maximum of two MXP_MR configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card and only one such configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card (Figure 11-34). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. N:1 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8. 2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports. Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services. Figure 11-34 High-Rate MXP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration 11-133 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards MXPP_MR (Protected Multirate Muxponder) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or a high-rate MXPP_MR card mode. • Low Rate—A maximum of two MXPP_MR configurations can be provisioned depending on the availability of client ports (Figure 11-35). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services. The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 6. 2. Only ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8, or both can be configured as trunk port. 3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports, if ports are not configured as a trunk ports and are not part of another muxponder. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 5 and 6 or 7 and 8. Figure 11-35 Low-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration • High Rate—A maximum of one MXPP_MR configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-36). Any client payload can be added or deleted, if the trunk bandwidth supports the new payload without impacting the traffic on the existing services. The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP_MR card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. N:2 muxponder must be created, where N varies from client ports 2 to 8. 2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1 to 8 can be configured as client ports. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk port for port 9. 11-134 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-36 High-Rate MXPP_MR Card Operating Mode Configuration MXP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Unprotected Muxponder) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one MXP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP card and a maximum of two on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-37). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be provisioned as MXP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-4-9 or 5-6-7-8-10, or both. 2. Ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports. Figure 11-37 High-Rate MXP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration 11-135 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards MXPP-4x2.5-10G (OC48/OTU1 Protected Muxponder) The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G card mode. Only one MXPP-4x2.5-10G configuration can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-38). The AR_XP card can be configured as MXPP-4x2.5-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. Four SFP ports and two XFP ports must be configured. The allowed port pair is 1-2-3-4-9-10 or 5-6-7-8-9-10, or both. 2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1-2-3-4 or 5-6-7-8 can be configured as client ports. Splitter protection is automatically created between ports 9 and 10. Port 10 will be the protected trunk port for port 9. Figure 11-38 High-Rate MXPP-4x2.5-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration REGEN (OTU1/OTU2 Regenerator) The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate or high-rate REGEN card mode. 11-136 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards • Low Rate—A maximum of four REGEN configurations can be provisioned on a single AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-39). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a low-rate REGEN card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 or 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, 4-8. Figure 11-39 Low-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration • High Rate—Only one REGEN configuration can be provisioned on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card (Figure 11-40). The AR_MXP or AR_XP card can be configured as a high rate REGEN card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. The allowed port pairs are 9-10. Figure 11-40 High-Rate REGEN Card Operating Mode Configuration The 10 GE over OTU2e/OTU1e signal with disabled FEC, standard FEC, I.4 or I.7 EFEC mode can be regenerated. The ODU transparency can either be CISCO Extended or Use or Transparent Standard Use. Note Payload PMs are not supported in this operating mode. 11-137 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards MXP-VD-10G (Video Muxponder) The AR_XP card can be configured as a high-rate MXP-VD-10G card mode. A maximum of two MXP-VD-10G configurations can be provisioned on an AR_XP card (Figure 11-41). The AR_XP card can be configured as MXP-VD-10G card by adhering to the following provisioning rules: 1. The allowed port pairs are 1-2-3-9 or 5-6-7-10. 2. Only ports 9 and 10 can be configured as trunk ports. 3. Ports 1-2-3 and 5-6-7 can be configured as client ports. Figure 11-41 High-Rate MXP-VD-10G Card Operating Mode Configuration 11.20.4 Scenarios of Different Operational mode Configurations on an AR_MXP or AR_XP Card The following section provides a few sample scenarios of different operational modes that can be configured on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card: Scenario 1 In this example (Figure 11-44), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_MXP card: • Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=5) • Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,4;Tr=7) • High-rate 3:1 MXP_MR (Cl=2,6,8;Tr=9) 11-138 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-42 Scenario 1 Scenario 2 In this example (Figure 11-43), high-rate MXP_DME (8:1) operational mode is configured on the AR_MXP card. Figure 11-43 Scenario 2 300201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OC48 FC4 FC1 GE OTU1 OTU2 OC48 OTU1 GE 300202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OC48 FC1 FC2 FE GE OTU2 FC1 GE FC2 11-139 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Scenario 3 In this example (Figure 11-44), the following four operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card: • Low-rate TXP_MR (Cl=1;Tr=2) • 8G FC TXP (Cl=9;Tr=10) • Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=4,7;TR=8) • Low-rate MR_MXP (Cl=3,6;TR=5) Figure 11-44 Scenario 3 Scenario 4 In this example (Figure 11-45), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card: • High-rate MXP-4x2.5-10G (Cl=1,2,3,4;Tr=9) • High-rate 4:1 MXP_DME (Cl=5,6,7,8;Tr=10) 300203 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FC2 OTU1 OC12 FC4 OTU1 FC8 OTU2 FE FC4 FC4 11-140 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Figure 11-45 Scenario 4 Scenario 5 In this example (Figure 11-46), the following three operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card: • Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=1,2,3;Tr=5) • Low-rate MXP_MR (Cl=3,6,8;Tr=7) • REGEN(Cl=9;Tr=10) Figure 11-46 Scenario 5 300204 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTU1 OC48 OC48 OTU1 FC4 OTU2 OTU2 FC1 GE FC2 300205 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STM4 FE STM1 STM4 OTU1 OTU2 OTU2 STM4 OTU1 STM4 11-141 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards Scenario 6 In this example (Figure 11-47), the following two operational modes are configured on the AR_XP card: • Low-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=1,3,4;Tr=5,6) • High-rate MXPP_MR (Cl=2,7,8;Tr=9,10) Figure 11-47 Scenario 6 11.20.5 AR_MXP and AR_XP Functions and Features The AR_MXP and AR_XP cards have the following functions and features: • Client Interface—G.5 Client Interface, page G-14 • DWDM Interface—G.6 DWDM Interface, page G-15 • DWDM Trunk Interface—G.7 DWDM Trunk Interface, page G-15 • Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature—G.8 Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) Feature, page G-16 • Timing Synchronization—G.11 Timing Synchronization, page G-17 • Y-Cable Protection—G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection, page G-27 • Jitter Considerations—G.37 Jitter Considerations, page G-32 • Card level indicators—Table G-1 on page G-7 • Port level indicators—Table G-9 on page G-11 11.20.6 Related Procedures for AR_MXP and AR_XP Cards The following is the list of procedures and tasks related to the configuration of the AR_MXP and AR_XP cards: 300206 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OC3 OTU1 OC12 FE OTU1 OTU2 OTU2 OTU1 FC4G OTU1 11-142 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards MLSE UT • “NTP-G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” section on page 11-454. • “NTP-G322 Modify the AR_MXP or AR_XP Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds” section on page 11-454. • NTP-G75 Monitor Transponder and Muxponder Performance. 11.21 MLSE UT The maximum likelihood sequence estimation (MLSE) based universal transponder (UT) modules are added to the TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards to support the error decorrelator functionality to enhance system performance. 11.21.1 Error Decorrelator The MLSE feature uses the error decorrelator functionality to reduce the chromatic dispersion (CD) and polarization mode dispersion (PMD), thereby extending the transmission range on the trunk interface. You can enable or disable the error decorrelator functionality using CTC or TL1. The dispersion compensation unit (DCU) is also used to reduce CD and PMD. The MLSE-based UT module helps to reduce CD and PMD without the use of a DCU. 11.22 SFP and XFP Modules SFPs and 10-Gbps SFPs (XFPs) are integrated fiber optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. For more information on SFPs/XFPs and for a list of SFPs/XFPs supported by the transponder and muxponder cards, see the Installing the GBIC, SFP, SFP+, and XFP Optical Modules in Cisco ONS Platforms. In CTC, SFPs/XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). To provision SFPs/XFPs and change the line rate for multirate PPMs, see the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” section on page 11-152. 11.23 Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards The procedures described below explain how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must be performed before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and create circuits. 11.23.1 Before You Begin Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary. Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a scheduled maintenance window. 11-143 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs). 1. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144—Complete this procedure to provision a multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs. 2. NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group, page 11-162—As needed, complete this procedure for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected with Y-cable protection. 3. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card, page 11-166—As needed, complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card. 4. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards, page 11-168—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 5. NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-171—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 6. NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-191—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. 7. NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 6-72—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards. 8. NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-237—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the transmission settings for ADM-10G cards. 9. NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-261—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards. 10. NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-282—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. 11. NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-300—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. 12. NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds, page 11-322—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for 40G-MXP-C, 40E-MXP-C, and 40ME-MXP-C cards. 13. NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings, page 11-345—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 14. NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings, page 11-356—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 11-144 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 15. NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings, page 11-368—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 16. NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings, page 11-373—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 17. NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds, page 11-379—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. 18. NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring, page 11-423—As needed, complete this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring. 19. NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds, page 11-426—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for OTU2_XP cards. 20. NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings, page 11-448—As needed, complete this procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card. 21. NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update, page 11-450—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. 22. NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group, page 11-451—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is part of a protection group. 23. NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator, page 11-452—As needed, complete this procedure to enable error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card. NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary. Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values can be changed after you install the PPM. Purpose Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate PPM. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-145 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable I/O devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142. Step 1 Complete the DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 Click the Alarms tab: a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the “DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering” task as necessary. b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide. Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the “DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode” task on page 11-146. If not, continue with Step 4 Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, complete the “DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode” task on page 11-147. If not, continue with Step 5. Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the “DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode” task on page 11-149. If not, continue with Step 6. Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the “DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode” task on page 11-151. If not, continue with Step 7. Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the “DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port” task on page 11-150. If not, continue with Step 9. Step 8 If you are provisioning a PPM on an AR_MXP or AR_XP card, complete the “NTP-G321 Provision Multiple Operating Modes on AR_MXP or AR_XP Cards” task on page 11-454. If not, continue with Step 9. Step 9 Complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already preprovisioned the multirate PPM (DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73), skip this step and continue with Step 10. Step 10 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete “DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services” task on page 11-153. Otherwise, continue with Step 11. Step 11 Complete the “DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate” task on page 11-155 to assign a line rate to a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.) Step 12 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 11-161. Stop. You have completed this procedure. 11-146 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs. Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps: a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI). b. Click Apply, then Yes. Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps: a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI). b. Click Apply, then Yes. Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed: • FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1 only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1). • Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only) • ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1. Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. Step 8 Click Apply. Purpose This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-147 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode, all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned for the selected port group is deleted (see the “DLP-G280 Delete a PPM” task on page 11-161). Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the port mode. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 11-35. Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152. Purpose This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards. The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-148 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present. Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported. Table 11-35 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes Parameter Description Options Port 1-4 Mode Sets the mode of operation for Ports 1-1 through 4-1. Chose one of the following: • FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only). • FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only). Port 5-8 Mode Sets the mode of operation for Ports 5-1 through 8-1. Chose one of the following: • FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only). • FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only). 11-149 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode. Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports. Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps. a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI). b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service. c. Click Apply. Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 11-36. : Purpose This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G Ethernet MXP. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes Mode Cards Description L2 over DWDM GE_XP 10GE_XP GE_XPE 10GE_XPE Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as a Layer 2 switch. 10GE TXP 10GE_XP 10GE_XPE Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port 1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1. 11-150 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381. Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to provision PPM settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears. Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following: • PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list. • PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option. Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name. Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears. 10GE MXP GE_XP GE_XPE Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1. 20GE MXP GE_XP GE_XPE Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used. Table 11-36 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes Mode Cards Description Purpose This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-151 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following: • Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list. • Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down list. – Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE – Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12 – Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48 Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is listed in the Rate column. Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8. Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the OTU2_XP card. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the card mode. Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab. Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled, disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps. a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI). b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service. c. Click Apply. Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab. Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed: • Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration. Purpose This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-152 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards • Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator (with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators. • Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator (with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are not used. • Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder and the other port pair as a standard regenerator. • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator. Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed. Note Table 11-174 on page 11-439 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2 and 4. For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, see the “11.16.5 OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” section on page 11-103. Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, or unassigned (ETSI) service state. Purpose This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-153 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears. Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following: • PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list. • PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option. Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name. Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7. Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner. Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service. The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC: • Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets of cards installed: – 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards – 32WSS and 32DMX cards – 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards – 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards – 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards Figure 11-48 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco TransportPlanner. Purpose This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM ETR_CLO and ISC services. Tools/Equipment Cisco TransportPlanner site plan Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-154 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Figure 11-48 Single-Span Topology • Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed: – 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards – 32WSS and 32DMX cards – 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards – 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards – 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating) sites cannot be installed. Figure 11-49 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in Cisco TransportPlanner. Figure 11-49 Point-to-Point Topology • Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed: – 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards – 32WSS and 32DMX cards – 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards – 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards – 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 11-50 shows two hub nodes with no line amplifier nodes installed. Figure 11-51 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed. 134361 Site 1 Site 4 W E 134360 Site 1 Site 4 Site 2 E W E W Site 3 E W 11-155 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Figure 11-50 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers Figure 11-51 Hubs with Line Amplifiers Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate Site 1 Site 2 W E E W 134358 Purpose This task provisions the line rate for TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services, page 11-153, if you are provisioning an ETR_CLO service. Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 134359 Site 1 Site 2 Site 2 W E E W W E E W Site 4 11-156 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete the “DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM” task on page 11-152 if the trunk port is out of service. If the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3 (for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 4. a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs. b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable. c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable. d. Click Apply. Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go to Step 4. Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy. Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears. Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following: • Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM. For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1. • Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 11-37 on page 11-157 for definitions of the supported rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, OTU2_XP, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card. Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue if the SFP is not installed. If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service (for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings. Step 8 Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed. 11-157 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-37 PPM Port Types Card Port Type TXP_MR_2.5G TXPP_MR_2.5G • OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps • OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps • OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps • ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps • ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) • DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor • SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video signal type 1 • HDTV—High Definition Television • PASS-THRU—Not specified • FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps • FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps • FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) • FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) • ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator • ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1) • ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3) • DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface • ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal) MXP_2.5G_10G MXP_2.5G_10E MXP_2.5G_10E_C MXP_2.5G_10E_L MXP_2.5G_10EX_C • OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1 TXP_MR_10G2 • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E_C TXP_MR_10E_L TXP_MR_10EX_C • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy—10 Gbps • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet • 10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel • (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G 11-158 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards 40E-TXP-C 40ME-TXP-C • SONET (OC-768)/SDH (STM-256) • 40G Ethernet LAN Phy • OTU3 MXP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G If the card mode is FC_GE: • FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1) • FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only) • FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 and 2-1) • FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port 1-1 only) • ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only) If the card mode is Mixed: • FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only) • FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port1-1 only) • ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only) • ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1) If the card mode is ESCON: • ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1) Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued) Card Port Type 11-159 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards MXP_MR_10DME_C MXP_MR_10DME_L MXP_MR_10DMEX_C If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC: • FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1) • FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.) • FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.) • ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1) • ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1) • ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1) • ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.) If the port mode is FC4G: • FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.) • FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.) 40G-MXP-C 40E-MXP-C 40ME-MXP-C • SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) • FC8G • FC10G • TEN_GE • OTU2 GE_XP 10GE_XP GE_XPE 10GE_XPE • GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1 • 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports1 Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued) Card Port Type 11-160 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). OTU2_XP • SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet • 10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel • IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator configuration. AR_MXP AR_XP • OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps • OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps • OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps • Gigabit Ethernet—1.125 Gbps • Fast Ethernet—100 Mbps • ESCON-Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) • FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps • FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps • FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps • FC8G—Fibre Channel 8.5 Gbps • FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) • FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) • FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 (IBM signal) • FICON8G—Fiber connectivity 8.5 Gbps (IBM signal) • SD-SDI—270 Mbps • HD-SDI—1.485 Gbps • Third-generation SDI (3G-SDI)—2.970 Gbps • OTU2E —11.09 Gbps • OTU1—2.66 Gbps 1. Automatically provisioned when the PPM is created if the trunk port is out of service. 2. Provisioned on the Data Rate Selection tab. Table 11-37 PPM Port Types (continued) Card Port Type 11-161 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G280 Delete a PPM Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane. Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 11-192. Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a PPM if the card configuration is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to delete PPM settings. Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3. If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, page 11-144, to change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD. Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports: a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes to dark blue. b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears. c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the Pluggable Ports area. Purpose This task deletes PPM provisioning for SFPs or XFPs installed on TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures • DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 or • DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 14-73 • DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-162 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC) or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits, or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port (except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, see the Administrative and Service States document. Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted: • In the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted. • If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC. The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the equipment is removed, the graphic disappears. Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 14-74. Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group Purpose This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports of two TXP, MXP, AR_XP, AR_MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see “G.35.1.1 Y-Cable Protection” section on page G-27. Tools/Equipment • Installed TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. • Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards • NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment • DLP-G46 Log into CTC • NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-163 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in the TXP card mode. Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381. Note There is a traffic hit of up to a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the client ports. Note The OTU2-XP and 40E-MXP-C card cannot implement Y-cable protection for the client ports in 10 GE LAN PHY mode. Hence, a pair of OTU2_XP cards is used at each end in pass-through mode (Transponder mode with G.709 disabled) to implement Y-cable protection. The 40E-MXP-CE card can implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY GFP mode. However, the 40E-MXP-CE card cannot implement Y-cable protection without the OTU2-XP card for the client ports in LAN PHY WIS mode. Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group. Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. For more information, see to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide.) Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109. Table 11-38 lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards. 11-164 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-38 Protection Types Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements Y-cable MXP_2.5_10G MXP_2.5_10E MXP_2.5_10E_C MXP_2.5_10E_L TXP_MR_10EX_C TXP_MR_10G TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E_C TXP_MR_10E_L TXP_MR_2.5G 40E-TXP-C 40ME-TXP-C MXP_MR_2.5G MXP_MR_10DME_C MXP_MR_10DME_L MXP_MR_10DMEX_C 40G-MXP-C 40E-MXP-C 40ME-MXP-C GE_XP1 10GE_XP2 GE_XPE 10GE_XPE OTU2_XP AR_MXP AR_XP Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port 2, and so on. Note The working and protect card must be in the same shelf for a multishelf node. 11-165 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you want to create the Y-cable protection group: a. Display the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card in card view. b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab. c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 14-74. Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create. Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following: • Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters. • Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list. • Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list. Splitter TXPP_MR_2.5G MXPP_MR_2.5G AR_MXP AR_XP A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, AR_MXP, or AR_XP card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name. OTU2_XP A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You can create a splitter protection group on ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP card using the “NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card” procedure on page 11-166. 1+1 GE_XP 10GE_XP GE_XPE 10GE_XPE In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the card against client port and card failure. 1. When provisioned in 10GE MXP or 20GE MXP card mode. 2. When provisioned in 10GE TXP card mode. Table 11-38 Protection Types Protection Type Cards Description and Installation Requirements 11-166 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53. Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list. Step 8 Complete the remaining fields: • Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field. • Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared. Note The bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases: • On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload. • On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In this case bidirectional switching is: – Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled. – Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled. The bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups. Step 9 Click OK. Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix. Stop. You have completed this procedure. NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card Purpose This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection, see the “G.35.1.2 Splitter Protection” section on page G-30. Tools/Equipment Installed OTU2_XP card Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix 11-167 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card. Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port. Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a splitter protection group. Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see the Table 14-1 on page 14-4) for your site. Verify which OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated with “Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more information.) Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109. Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group: a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view. b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs. c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the “DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot” task on page 14-73 or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the “DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP” task on page 14-74. Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create. Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following: Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards • NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment DLP-G46 Log into CTC NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-168 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards • Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters. • Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list. • Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in the drop-down list. After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53. Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list. Step 8 Complete the remaining fields: • Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field. • Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared. Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups. Step 9 Click OK. Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix. Stop. You have completed this procedure. NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “G.35.2 1+1 Protection” section on page G-30. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures In the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide: • NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards • NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment NTP-G139 Verify Cisco Transport Planner Reports and Files, page 14-3 11-169 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to protect the card against client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 14-7 on page 14-109. Step 3 Complete the NTP-G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually, page 14-114 by selecting the Trunk to Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection. Step 4 Complete the “NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards” task on page 11-169 to create a protection group. Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381. Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX SFP, and ONS-SE-ZE-EL SFP is used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel cable (not Y-cable) Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in unexpected switching behavior. Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the “DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-381. Stop. You have completed this procedure. NTP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Purpose This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords, page 16-61 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-170 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs. Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create. Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following: • Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters. • Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list. • Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list. After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the “DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot” task on page 14-53. Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list. Step 5 Complete the remaining fields: • Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field. • Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared. The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix. Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). 11-171 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings. Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-172 • DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-173 • DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-176 • DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings, page 11-178 • DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads, page 11-181 • DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-182 • DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-184 • DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-188 • DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-177 Stop. You have completed this procedure. Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69 DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary) DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary) Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-172 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-39. Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed. Purpose This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-173 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings Table 11-39 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings Parameter Description Options Termination Mode Sets the mode of operation (option only supported for SONET/SDH payloads). • Transparent • Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (ETSI) • Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (ETSI) Regeneration Peer Slot Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration. The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card. Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in a regeneration peer group. • None • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 6 • 12 • 13 • 14 • 15 • 16 • 17 Regeneration Group Name Sets the regeneration peer group name. User defined Purpose This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-174 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-40. Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the “DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds” task on page 11-182. Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only) Port Name The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) • IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) • OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) • OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) • OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) SF BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 SD BER (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 11-175 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). ALS Mode Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. • Disabled (default) • Auto Restart • Manual Restart • Manual Restart for Test Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI • Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default) • SR • SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance • IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance • IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance • LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance • LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance • LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**) AINS Soak (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Type (OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical transport type. • SONET • SDH Table 11-40 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-176 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings Note This task only applies to SONET services. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-41. Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Port number. • 1 • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte • 16 byte Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size 11-177 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-42. Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this display updated automatically. String of trace string size Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default) Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-41 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-178 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs. Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 11-43. Table 11-42 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background. Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-179 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note Some parameters and options in Table 11-43 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does not appear in CTC. Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI Port (Display only) Port number • 1 • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) • 1 • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only) EB Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. 11-180 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. FC (Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — SEFS (Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. BBE Background block errors — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Table 11-43 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads (continued) Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI 11-181 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears. Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port. Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-44 for a list of available Ethernet variables. Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds. Purpose This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-44 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON Thresholds Variable Description ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets. 8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side. 8b10bIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets. 8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets. 8b10bDataOrderedSets Number of received packets containing data ordered sets. 11-182 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period. Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period. Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold. For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm. Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events). Step 11 Click OK. Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned. Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 11-45 and note whether it is 2R or 3R. Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-183 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh. Step 6 Referring to Table 11-46, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 7 Click Apply. Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Table 11-45 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface Client Interface Input Bit Rate 3R vs. 2R ITU-T G.709 OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 3R On or Off DV-6000 2.38 Gbps 2R — 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON) 2.125 Gbps 3R1 1. No monitoring On or Off High-Definition Television (HDTV) 1.48 Gbps 2R — Gigabit Ethernet (GE) 1.25 Gbps 3R On or Off 1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON 1.06 Gbps 3R On or Off OC-12/STM-4 622 Mbps 3R On or Off OC-3/STM-1 155 Mbps 3R On or Off Enterprise System Connection (ESCON) 200 Mbps 2R — SDI/D1 video 270 Mbps 2R — ISC-1 Compact 1.06 Gbps 3R Off ISC-3 1.06 or 2.125 Gbps 2R — ETR_CLO 16 Mbps 2R — Table 11-46 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds Signal TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High 3R –23 dBm –9 dBm 2R –24 dBm –9 dBm 11-184 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter. Step 10 Click Apply. Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default. Step 3 Referring to Table 11-47, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142. Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-185 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds Port Type (by CTC) Pluggable Port Module (SFP) TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High TCA TX Power Low TCA TX Power High OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –23 –8 –21 –2 STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –24 –10 –21 –2 OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2 STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2 OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –18 –3 –16 3 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6 STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3 ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –17 0 –16 3 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 ESCON 15454-SFP-200 15454E-SFP-200 ONS-SE-200-MM –21 –14 –35 –8 DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –18 0 –11 6 15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –18 –3 –16 3 SDI_D1_ VIDEO 15454-SFP12-4-IR –28 –7 –21 –2 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –28 –8 –21 –2 HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 PASS-THRU 2R MODE (not specified) — — — — FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –17 0 –16 3 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –15 0 –16 3 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 11-186 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 6 Referring to Table 11-48, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter. FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –17 0 –16 3 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –15 0 –16 3 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200 15454E-SFP-200 ONS-SE-200-MM –17 0 –16 3 ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –20 –3 –16 3 Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds Port Type (by CTC) Pluggable Port Module (SFP) Alarm RX Power Low Alarm RX Power High Alarm TX Power Low Alarm TX Power High OC-3 15454-SFP3-1-IR –26 –5 –17 –6 STM-1 15454E-SFP-L.1.1 –27 –7 –17 –6 OC-12 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6 STM-4 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6 OC-48 ONS-SE-2G-S1 –21 0 –12 –1 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2 STM-16 ONS-SE-2G-S1 15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –1 Table 11-47 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds (continued) Port Type (by CTC) Pluggable Port Module (SFP) TCA RX Power Low TCA RX Power High TCA TX Power Low TCA TX Power High 11-187 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards ONE_GE 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –12 –2 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 ESCON 15454-SFP-200 15454E-SFP-200 ONS-SE-200-MM –24 –11 –31 –12 DV6000 15454-SFP-OC48-IR –21 3 –7 2 15454E-SFP-L.16.1 –21 0 –12 –5 SDI_D1_ VIDEO 15454-SFP12-4-IR –31 –4 –17 –6 15454E-SFP-L.4.1 –31 –5 –17 –6 HDTV 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 PASS-THRU 2R MODE (not specified) — — — — FC1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –12 –2 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 FC2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –18 3 –12 –2 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 FICON1G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –20 3 –12 –2 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 FICON2G 15454-SFP-GEFC-SX 15454E-SFP-GEFC-S ONS-SE-G2F-SX –18 3 –12 –2 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds (continued) Port Type (by CTC) Pluggable Port Module (SFP) Alarm RX Power Low Alarm RX Power High Alarm TX Power Low Alarm TX Power High 11-188 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 7 Click Apply. Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-49 through 11-52. Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Table 11-49 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab. ETR_CLO 15454-SFP-200 15454E-SFP-200 ONS-SE-200-MM –20 3 –12 –2 ISC compat 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 ISC peer 15454-SFP-GE+-LX 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX ONS-SE-G2F-LX –23 0 –12 –1 Purpose This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-48 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds (continued) Port Type (by CTC) Pluggable Port Module (SFP) Alarm RX Power Low Alarm RX Power High Alarm TX Power Low Alarm TX Power High 11-189 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-50 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab. Table 11-51 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab. Table 11-49 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G) G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. • Enable • Disable FEC Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC). • Enable • Disable SF BER (Display only) The signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-5 SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 Table 11-50 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port1 1. Latency for a 1G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 4 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 40 microseconds. Latency for a 2G-FC payload without ITU-T G.709 is 2 microseconds, and with ITU-T G.709 is 20 microseconds. Consider these values when planning a FC network that is sensitive to latency. (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G) ES Errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. BBE Background block errors Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. FC Failure counter Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh. 11-190 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-52 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab. Table 11-51 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G) Bit Errors Corrected Sets the value for bit errors corrected. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Uncorrectable Words Sets the value for uncorrectable words. Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Port number. • 2 (Trunk) • 3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G) Level Sets the level. • Section • Path Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual Disable FDI on TIM If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size 11-191 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs. Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings. Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the “DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate” task on page 11-192, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card, complete the “DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate” task on page 11-193. If not, continue with Step 4. Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes. Checked/unchecked (default) Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69 DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary) DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary) Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-52 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-192 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-193 • DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-195 • DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-200 • DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-202 • DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads, page 11-205 • DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-209 • DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-210 • DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-212 • DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-201 Stop. You have completed this procedure. DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card where you want to change the card data rate settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. Step 3 Click Create. Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates: • SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Step 5 Click Ok. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure. Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-193 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs. Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears. Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following: • PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list. • PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option. Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name. Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears. Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates: • SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) • 10G Ethernet LAN Phy • 10G FIBER Channel • (TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G Step 9 Click Ok. Step 10 Return to your originating procedure. DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings Purpose This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Purpose This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-194 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-53. Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options Termination Mode Sets the mode of operation. (This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads). • Transparent • Section (TXP_MR_10E only) • Line • Transparent • Regeneration Section (TXP_MR_10E only) • Multiplex Section AIS/Squelch Configuration (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration. • Squelch • AIS • Squelch • AIS Regeneration Peer Slot Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration. The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card. Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP cards that are in a regeneration peer group. • None • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 6 • 12 • 13 • 14 • 15 • 16 • 17 • None • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 6 • 12 • 13 • 14 • 15 • 16 • 17 11-195 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when 10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-54. Regeneration Group Name (Display only) The regeneration peer group name. — — Tunable Wavelengths (Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the TXP_MR_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed. The TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths supported by the card that is installed. — — Purpose This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-53 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options ONS 15454 SDH Options 11-196 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note In Table 11-54, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC. Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G) • 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card) • 1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 2 (Trunk) • (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G • 1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G) • 1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card) • 1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card) • 2 (Trunk) • (TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States. • IS • IS,AINS • OOS,DSBLD • OOS,MT • Unlocked • Unlocked,automaticInService • Locked,disabled • Locked,maintenance 11-197 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States. • IS-NR • OOS-AU,AINS • OOS-MA,DSBLD • OOS-MA,MT • Unlocked-enabled • Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService • Locked-enabled,disabled • Locked-enabled,maintenance SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) The optical transport type. • SONET • SDH • SONET • SDH Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-198 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. AINS Soak (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments ProvidesSync (TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-199 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). SyncMsgIn (TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked Max Size (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the maximum Ethernet packet size. • 1548 bytes • Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes) • 1548 bytes • Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes) Incoming MAC Address (TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the incoming MAC address. Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format. Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format. Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**) • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**) Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. Table 11-54 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-200 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or 10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-55. Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 (OC192) • 2—Trunk • 1-1 (STM64) • 2—Trunk Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual • Off/None • Manual Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte • 16 byte • 1 byte • 16 byte Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size String of trace string size Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) 11-201 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port. Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 11-56. Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size String of trace string size Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default) Purpose This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-55 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 Options Options — ONS 15454 SDH 11-202 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy Table 11-56 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 2 (Trunk) Band Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. If the physical TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this field is display-only. • C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field. • L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field. Even/Odd Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to TXP_MR_10G or TXP_MR_10E cards.) • Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field. • Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field. Wavelength The wavelength provisioned for the trunk. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background. Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads, including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-203 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-57. Note Parameters shown in Table 11-57 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC. Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI Port (Display only) Port number • 1-1 (OC192) • 2 (Trunk) • 1-1 (STM64) • 2 (Trunk) EB Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. 11-204 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. SEFS (Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — OFS (Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Out of frame seconds — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. BBE Background block errors — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI 11-205 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears. FC (Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — UAS (Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet LAN payload. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-57 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options - ANSI Options - ETSI 11-206 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port. Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 11-58 for a list of available Ethernet variables. Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy Variables Variable Description ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets. ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error free. ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. ifInErrorBytePkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of receive error bytes. ifInFramingErrorPkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of receive framing error counters. ifInJunkInterPkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of receive interpacket junk counters. ifOutOctets (TXP_MR_10G only) Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. txTotalPkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Total number of transmit packets. ifOutMulticastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of multicast frames transmitted error free. ifOutBroadcastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only) Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS). dot3StatsFrameTooLong (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size permitted. etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. 11-207 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets. etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). etherStatsOctets Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued) 11-208 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds. Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period. Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period. Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold. For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm. Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events). Step 11 Click OK. Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds. Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). etherStatsCRCAlignErrors (TXP_MR_10G only) Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). rxPauseFrames (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames. rxControlFrames Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the MAC control sublayer. rxUnknownOpcodeFrames (TXP_MR_10G only) Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode that is not supported by the device. Table 11-58 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy Variables (continued) 11-209 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh. Step 4 Referring to Table 11-59, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Purpose This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-59 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds Card TCA RX Power High TCA RX Power Low TCA TX Power High TCA TX Power Low TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –18 dBm 7 dBm –1 dBm TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E_C TXP_MR_10E_L TXP_MR_10EX_ C –9 dBm –18 dBm 9 dBm 0 dBm 11-210 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 7 Referring to Table 11-60, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 8 Click Apply. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default. Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh. Table 11-60 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds Card Alarm RX Power High Alarm RX Power Low Alarm TX Power High Alarm TX Power Low TXP_MR_10G –8 dBm –20 dBm 4 dBm 2 dBm TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E_C TXP_MR_10E_L TXP_MR_10EX_ C –8 dBm –20 dBm 7 dBm 3 dBm Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-211 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Referring to Table 11-61, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, see the “11.22 SFP and XFP Modules” section on page 11-142. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 7 Referring to Table 11-62, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Table 11-61 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds Pluggable Port Rate Pluggable Port Module (XFP) TCA RX Power High TCA RX Power Low TCA TX Power High TCA TX Power Low SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 TXP_MR_10G (XFP not present) –1 –11 –1 –6 10G Ethernet LAN Phy TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 TXP_MR_10G (XFP not present) 0.5 –14.4 –1 –6 10G Fibre Channel TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 0.5 –14.4 –1 –6 IB_5G1 1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G. TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3 1.0 –14.0 5.0 12.0 11-212 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 8 Click Apply. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the OTN settings. Table 11-62 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds Pluggable Port Rate Pluggable Port Module (XFP) Alarm RX Power High Alarm RX Power Low Alarm TX Power High Alarm TX Power Low SONET (or SDH) TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 TXP_MR_10G (XFP not present) 3 –16 1 –8 10G Ethernet LAN Phy TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 TXP_MR_10G (XFP not present) 3 –16 1 –8 10G Fibre Channel TXP_MR_10E uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 3 –16 1 –8 IB_5G1 1. Only the TXP_MR_10EX_C card supports IB_5G. TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3 3.0 –16 1.0 –8 Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-213 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-63 through 11-66. Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Table 11-63 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab. Table 11-64 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab. Table 11-63 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card OTN Lines Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. 2 G.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709 OTN should be enabled. • Enable • Disable FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the FEC should be enabled. • Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC is on. • Disable—FEC is off. • Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only) Standard FEC is on. • Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on. SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-5 Asynch/Synch Mapping (TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk). • Asynch mapping • Synch mapping 11-214 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. 2 ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring. SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. 11-215 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-65 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab. Table 11-66 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab. BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Table 11-64 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options Table 11-65 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card FEC Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. 2 Bit Errors Corrected Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Uncorrectable Words Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings Parameter Description Options Port Sets the port number. • 1 • 2 Level Sets the level. • Section • Path Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual 11-216 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Disable FDI on TTIM If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled) • Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled) Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size; trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length. Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes. Checked/unchecked (default) Table 11-66 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-217 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards NTP-G292 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds Note The 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards does not support PPMs. Note The maximum ambient operating temperature for 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards is 500 Celsius. Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings. Step 3 If you are provisioning a 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card, complete the “DLP-G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate” task on page 11-218. If not, continue with Step 4. Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings, page 11-218 • DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings, page 11-219 • DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings, page 11-221 • DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-225 • DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy, page 11-228 • DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-230 • DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-231 • DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings, page 11-232 Purpose This procedure changes the line settings, PM parameters, and threshold settings for 40G multirate transponder cards (40E-TXP-C, 40ME-TXP-C). Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures • NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69 • DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 • DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary) • DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary) Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-218 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Stop. You have completed this procedure. DLP-G656 Provision the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Data Rate Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the card data rate settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. Step 3 Click Create. Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates: • SONET (ANSI) OC-768 or SDH (ETSI) STM-256 • 40G Ethernet LAN Phy (only when overclock mode is ON) • OTU3 Step 5 Click Ok. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure. DLP-G657 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Card Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-67. Purpose This task changes the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C card data rate. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Purpose This task changes the card settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-219 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G658 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the line settings. Table 11-67 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Card Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454(ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH(ETSI) Options Regeneration Peer Slot Sets the slot containing another 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration. The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card is reflected on the peer 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card. Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP cards that are in a regeneration peer group. • None • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 12 • 13 • 14 • 15 • 16 • None • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 12 • 13 • 14 • 15 • 16 Regeneration Group Name (Display only) The regeneration peer group name. — — Trunk Wavelengths (Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. The 40E-TXP-C, or 40ME-TXP-C that is installed shows the C-band wavelengths that it supports. — — Purpose This task changes the line settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-220 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 11-68. Table 11-68 Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. 1 and 2 Port Name Assigns a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field. User-defined. The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric or special characters, or both. The port name is blank by default. For information about assigning a port name, see the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) • OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) • OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) • IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) • OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) • OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) ALS Mode (Client port only) Sets the ALS function mode. • Disabled (default)—ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outage or loss of signal (LOS) occurs. • Auto Restart: (OC-768/STM-256/OTU-3 only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart—ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outage or LOS occurs. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test—Manually restarts the laser for testing. Reach (Display only) Displays the optical reach distance of the port. • Autoprovision—(trunk port only) The system automatically provisions the reach. • VSR—(client port only) The system provisions very short reach (VSR) for the port. Wavelength Provisions the wavelength for the port. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background. 11-221 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G659 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder SONET, SDH, or Ethernet Line Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-69. Squelch (Display only) Applicable only to client port 1. When the termination mode is set to transparent, squelch is enabled. For section/line termination mode, AIS is enabled. For trunk port, squelch is disabled. • Squelch • AIS • Disable Note Both Squelch and AIS options are supported when the selected Termination Mode is Transparent. If the Termination Mode selected is Section or Line, then only AIS is supported. This is applicable for OC-192/STM-64 and OC-768/STM-256. For OTN payloads, both Squelch and AIS options are supported. Overclock Enables or disables overclock mode on trunk port. • OFF (default) • ON Rx Wavelength Provisions the wavelength of the trunk port. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background. Purpose This task changes the SONET, SDH, or Ethernet line settings for 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-68 Line Settings (continued)of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options 11-222 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note In Table 11-69, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 40G multirate transponder cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC. Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1 (OC-768) • 1 (40G Ethernet LAN Phy) • 1 (OTU3) • 1 (STM-256) • 1 (40G Ethernet LAN Phy) • 1 (OTU3) SF BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 SD BER (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 ProvidesSync (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked SyncMsgIn (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked Admin SSM In Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) and the synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU. • PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1) • STU—Sync traceability unknown • ST2—Stratum 2 • ST3—Stratum 3 • SMC—SONET minimum clock • ST4—Stratum 4 • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization • RES—Reserved; quality level set by user • G811—Primary reference clock • STU—Sync traceability unknown • G812T—Transit node clock traceable • G812L—Local node clock traceable • SETS—Synchronous equipment • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization 11-223 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Send DoNotUse (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a do not use (DUS) message on the S1 byte. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked Type (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) Indicates the optical transport type. • SONET • SDH • SONET • SDH Termination Mode (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the mode of operation. Note This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads. • Transparent • Section • Line • Transparent • Regeneration Section (RS) • Multiplex Section (MS) Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE) • 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). • 1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE ) • 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Table 11-69 SONET, SDH Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-224 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Admin State Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS • IS,AINS • OOS,DSBLD • OOS,MT • Unlocked • Unlocked,automaticInServic e • Locked,disabled • Locked,maintenance Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR • OOS-AU,AINS • OOS-MA,DSBLD • OOS-MA,MT • Unlocked-enabled • Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService • Locked-enabled,disabled • Locked-enabled,maintenanc e ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports. Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. Table 11-70 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-225 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G660 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the line section trace settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-71. Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OC-768) • 2 (OC-768) • 1 (STM-256) • 2 (STM-256) Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual • Off/None • Manual Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte • 16 byte • 1 byte • 16 byte 11-226 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Default to restore default values. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G692 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTU Settings Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).The supported range for 1 bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside this range, client transmits 00. String of trace string size String of trace string size Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). String of trace string size String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size String of trace string size Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5 seconds, if checked. Checked or unchecked (default) Checked or unchecked (default) Purpose This task changes the OTU settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-71 Section Trace Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-227 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C or 40ME-TXP-C card where you want to change the OTU settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > OTU tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-72. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Table 11-72 OTU Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number that is applicable only for OC-192/STM-64 payloads. • 1-1 • 2-1 • 3-1 • 4-1 • 1-1 • 2-1 • 3-1 • 4-1 SyncMsgIn (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked Admin SSM Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) and the synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU. • PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1) • STU—Sync traceability unknown • ST2—Stratum 2 • ST3—Stratum 3 • SMC—SONET minimum clock • ST4—Stratum 4 • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization • RES—Reserved; quality level set by user • G811—Primary reference clock • STU—Sync traceability unknown • G812T—Transit node clock traceable • G812L—Local node clock traceable • SETS—Synchronous equipment • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization ProvidesSync (Display only) (OC-768/STM-256 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked 11-228 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G661 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 40G Ethernet WAN Phy Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-73. Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings of 40E-TXP-C and 40ME-TXP-C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads, including the physical 40G Ethernet WAN Phy payload. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Port number • 1 (OC-768) • 2 (OC-768) • 1 (STM-256) • 2 (STM-256) CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. 11-229 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. FC (Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. — UAS (Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Table 11-73 Line Threshold Settings for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-230 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G663 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh. Step 4 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter, then click Apply. Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Step 6 Click Apply. Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 8 Referring to Table 11-74, verify the trunk port (Port 2) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter, then click Apply. Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh. Purpose This task provisions the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-74 Trunk Port TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Card TCA RX Power High (dbm) TCA RX Power Low (dbm) TCA TX Power High (dbm) TCA TX Power Low (dbm) 40E-TXP-C 40ME-TXP-C –9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0 11-231 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 10 Click Apply. Step 11 Click Default to restore default values. Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G664 Provision the 40G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default. Step 3 Under Types area, verify that the TCA radio button is selected. If not, click it, then click Refresh. Step 4 Referring to Table 11-76, verify the client port (Port 1) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Press Enter, then click Apply. Step 5 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Table 11-75 Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Card Alarm RX Power High Alarm RX Power Low Alarm TX Power High Alarm TX Power Low 40E-TXP-C 40ME-TXP-C –9.0 –22.0 9.0 0.0 Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-232 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 6 Click Apply. Step 7 Under Types area, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 8 Referring to Table 11-77, provision the client port (Port 1) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Step 9 Under Intervals area, select 15 Min or 1 Day, then click Refresh. Step 10 Click Apply. Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G665 Change the 40G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40E-TXP-C card where you want to change the OTN settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier. Table 11-76 Client Interface TCA Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Pluggable Port Rate TCA RX Power High TCA RX Power Low TCA TX Power High TCA TX Power Low 40G Ethernet LAN Phy 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0 OC-768/STM-256 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0 OTU3 3.0 –6.0 6.0 –3.0 Table 11-77 Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Pluggable Port Rate Alarm RX Power High Alarm RX Power Low Alarm TX Power High Alarm TX Power Low 40G Ethernet LAN Phy 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0 OC-768/STM-256 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0 OTU3 5.0 –8.0 4.0 –1.0 Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C transponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-233 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-78 through 11-81. Note You must modify Near End and Far End, 15 Min and 1 Day, and SM and PM independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Table 11-78 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab. Table 11-79 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab. Table 11-78 OTN Line Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. • 1 (only when data rate is set to OTU3) • 2 ITU-T G.709 OTN (Display only) Displays the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. • Enable • Disable FEC Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode can be Standard or Enhanced. Standard is the same as enabling FEC. Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. • Standard Standard FEC is on. • Enhanced Enhanced FEC is on. SF BER (Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-5 SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 11-234 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. 2 ES Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring. SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. 11-235 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab. Table 11-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab. BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Table 11-79 ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options Table 11-80 FEC Threshold Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. 2 Bit Errors Corrected Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. Uncorrectable Words Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals. Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Click Reset to Default to restore default values. 11-236 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click Default to restore default settings. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Table 11-81 Trail Trace Identifier Settings of the 40E-TXP-C, and 40ME-TXP-C Cards Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port Sets the port number. • 1 (OTU3) • 2 (Trunk) • 1 (OTU3) • 2 (Trunk) Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual • Off/None • Manual Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S If a TIM on Section overhead alarm is raised because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte • 16 byte • 1 byte • 16 byte Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). String of trace string size String of trace string size Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex Mode to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). String of trace string size String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size String of trace string size Auto-refresh Refreshes the display automatically every 5 seconds, if checked. Checked or unchecked (default) Checked or unchecked (default) 11-237 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings. Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the “DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group” task on page 11-238. Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the “DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings” task on page 11-239. Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings, page 11-240 • DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings, page 11-245 • DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads, page 11-247 • DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload, page 11-251 Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-254 • DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-255 • DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings, page 11-256 Stop. You have completed this procedure. Purpose This procedure creates an ADM-10G peer group and changes line settings, PM parameters, and threshold settings for ADM-10G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69 DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150 (if necessary) DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary) Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-238 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18). Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17. Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion ADM-10G card is located. Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name. Step 5 Click Apply. Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card. Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Purpose This task creates peer group protection for two ADM-10G cards within the same node, located on the same shelf. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69, for two ADM-10G cards (located on the same shelf) for which a peer group is desired. DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-239 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 11-82. The parameters that appear depend on the card mode. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Purpose This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-82 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) The Port number (n-n) and rate. — MTU The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port. Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216 Numeric: 1548 Mode Sets the Ethernet mode. 1000 Mbps Framing Sets the framing type. • GFP-F • HDLC CRC Encap Sets the CRC encap values for the framing type. CRC encap value for GFP-F: • None (default) • 32-Bit CRC encap value for HDLC: • 16-Bit • 32-Bit (default) AINS Soak Automatic in-service soak time. The duration of time that must pass with an uninterrupted signal before the traffic/termination transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments 11-240 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-83 as needed. Note In Table 11-83, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC. Purpose This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-241 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE) • 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). • 1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/G E) • 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS • IS,AINS • OOS,DSBLD • OOS,MT • Unlocked • Unlocked,automaticInServ ice • Locked,disabled • Locked,maintenance 11-242 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR • OOS-AU,AINS • OOS-MA,DSBLD • OOS-MA,MT • Unlocked-enabled • Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService • Locked-enabled,disabled • Locked-enabled,maintenan ce ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. • Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-243 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs. Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-84 as needed. AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports. Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected. Wavelength Tunable wavelength. Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g Hz-8 are supported wavelengths. Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50g Hz-8 are supported wavelengths. Table 11-83 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-244 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Displays the client and trunk port number. • 1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE) • 17-1 (OC192) • 18-1 (OC192/Interlink) • 19-1 (OC192) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). • 1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/G E) • 17-1(STM64) • 18-1 (STM64/Interlink) • 19-1 (STM64) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). ProvidesSync When checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 Send DoNotUse When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte. Checked or unchecked Checked or unchecked SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 11-245 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18 [only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-85. Type (Display only) Type of node. • SONET • SDH • SDH Admin SSM In Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU. • PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1) • ST2—Stratum 2 • TNC—Transit node clock • ST3E—Stratum 3E • ST3—Stratum 3 • SMC—SONET minimum clock • ST4—Stratum 4 • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization • RES—Reserved; quality level set by user • G811—Primary reference clock • STU—Sync traceability unknown • G812T—Transit node clock traceable • G812L—Local node clock traceable • SETS—Synchronous equipment • DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization Purpose This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-84 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-246 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port Sets the port number. • 1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/G E) • 17-1 (OC 192) • 18-1 (OC192) • 19-1 (OC192) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). • 1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM1 6/GE) • 17-1 (STM64) • 18-1 (STM64) • 19-1 (STM64) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual • Off/None • Manual Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. • 1 byte • 16 byte • 64 byte • 1 byte • 16 byte • 64 byte Current Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New Transmit String sets a new transmit string. Current String Type allows you to choose between ASCII or Hexadecimal format. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size String of trace string size 11-247 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-86. Received (Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size String of trace string size Auto-refr esh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default) Checked/unchecked (default) Purpose This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying SONET payloads. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-85 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-248 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options Port (Display only) Port number • 1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE) • 17-1 (OC 192) • 18-1 (OC192) • 19-1 (OC192) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). • 1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE) • 17-1 (STM 64) • 18-1 (STM64) • 19-1 (STM64) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). EB Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. CV Coding violations Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — 11-249 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards ES Errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. BBE Background block errors — Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. FC (Line Section only) Failure count Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-250 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). PSC Protection Switching Count Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — PSD Protection Switching Duration Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. — UAS (Line Section only) Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—Line or Section (near end only) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Table 11-86 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options 11-251 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit Ethernet. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears. Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port. Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 11-87 for a list of available Ethernet variables. Purpose This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card carrying the 1G Ethernet payload. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port, page 11-150 Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds Variable Description ifInOctets Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. ifInErrors Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. ifOutOctets Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast frames received error-free. ifInBroadcastPkts Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. ifInErrorBytePkts Number of receive error bytes. dot3StatsFCSErrors Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame check sequence (FCS). dot3StatsFrameTooLong Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted maximum size. 11-252 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode not supported by this device. dot3InPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation. dot3OutPauseFrames A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation. etherStatsUndersizePkts Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets). etherStatsFragments Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error). Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. etherStatsPkts64Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets). etherStatsPkts65to127Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in length, inclusive. etherStatsPkts128to255Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets. etherStatsPkts256to511Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in length, inclusive. etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets. etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets. etherStatsBroadcastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address. Note Multicast packets are not included. Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued) 11-253 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds. Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period. Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period. Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold. For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm. Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold. A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events). Step 11 Click OK. Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). etherStatsMulticastPkts Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to a multicast address. Note This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. etherStatsOversizePkts Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets. etherStatsJabbers Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (alignment error). rxTotalPkts Total number of received packets. txTotalPkts Total number of transmit packets. Table 11-87 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds (continued) 11-254 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh. Step 4 Referring to Table 11-88, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter. Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 7 Referring to Table 11-89, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter. Purpose This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-88 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds Port TCA RX Power High TCA RX Power Low TCA TX Power High TCA TX Power Low 17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm 19-1 (Trunk) –7.0 dBm –27.0 dBm 6.0 dBm –4.0 dBm 11-255 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 8 Click Apply. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh. Step 4 Referring to Table 11-47 on page 11-185 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter. Table 11-89 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds Port Alarm RX Power High Alarm RX Power Low Alarm TX Power High Alarm TX Power Low 17-1 (Trunk/Interlink) Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). 1.0 dBm –13.0 dBm 1.0 dBm –8.0 dBm 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm 19-1 (Trunk) –5.0 dBm –30.0 dBm 5.0 dBm –3.0 dBm Purpose This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the ADM-10G card. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed Required Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-256 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh. Step 7 Referring to Table 11-47 and Table 11-48 on page 11-186, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter. Step 8 Click Apply. Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the OTN settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 11-90 through 11-93. Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh. Table 11-90 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab. Purpose This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-257 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-91 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab. Table 11-90 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). ITU-TG.709 OTN Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. • Enable • Disable FEC Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC. • Disable—FEC is off. • Standard—Standard FEC is on. • Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on. SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 SF BER (Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-5 Synch Mapping Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk). Synch mapping 11-258 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). ES Errored seconds. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk. Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring. SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. 11-259 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-92 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab. Table 11-93 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab. BBE Background block errors Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. FC Failure counter Numeric. Threshold display options include: • Direction—Near End or Far End • Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day • Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk) Choose an option in each category and click Refresh. Table 11-91 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options Table 11-92 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number and optional name. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). Bit Errors Corrected Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals. Uncorrectable Words Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period. Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals. 11-260 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Table 11-93 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings Parameter Description Options Port Sets the port number. • 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink) • 19-1 (Trunk) Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group). Level Sets the level. • Section • Path Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual Disable FDI on TTIM If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section/Path overhead alarm arises because of a J0/J1 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled) • Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled) Transmit Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size; trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length. Expected Current Expected String displays the current expected string; New sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Received (Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size Auto-refresh (every 5 sec) If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds. Checked/unchecked (default) 11-261 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds Step 1 Complete the “DLP-G46 Log into CTC” task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2. Step 2 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings. Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed: • DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings, page 11-262 • DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings, page 11-264 • DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings, page 11-266 • DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings, page 11-268 • DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings, page 11-271 • DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-273 • DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds, page 11-275 • DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings, page 11-277 • DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings, page 11-269 Step 4 As needed, complete the “NTP-G103 Back Up the Database” procedure on page 24-2. Stop. You have completed this procedure. Purpose This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, AR_MXP, AR_XP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards, page 14-69. DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 14-72 DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM, page 11-152 (if necessary) DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate, page 11-155 (if necessary) Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-262 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the card settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-94. Note Parameters shown in Table 11-94 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC. Purpose This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type, termination mode, and wavelength. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher 11-263 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). Table 11-94 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings Parameter Description Options Termination Mode Sets the mode of operation. Options that do not apply to a card do not display. The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on SONET/SDH multiplexing. The transparent mode terminates and rebuilds the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2 byte is not touched. The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully transparent in transparent mode based on the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte or other bytes. It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an OTU2. For ANSI platforms: • Transparent • Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) • Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only) For ETSI platforms: • Transparent • Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G, only) • Regeneration Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) AIS/Squelch (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration. • Ais • Squelch Tunable Wavelengths (Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed. — 11-264 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs. Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-95. Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh. Purpose This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services. Client ports will not appear of the pluggable port module is not provisioned for it. • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only) Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) • IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) • OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) 11-265 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) • OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) • OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate. • 1E-3 • 1E-4 • 1E-5 SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate. • 1E-5 • 1E-6 • 1E-7 • 1E-8 • 1E-9 ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options. • Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. • Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved. • Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing. AINS Soak Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings. • Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically • 0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments Type Sets the optical transport type. • SONET • SDH SyncMsgIn Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.) Checked or unchecked Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-266 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings. ProvidesSync Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.) Checked or unchecked Reach Displays the optical reach distance of the client port. Options: ANSI/ETSI • Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default) • SR • SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance • IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance • IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance • LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance • LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance • LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance Wavelength Displays the wavelength of the client port. • First Tunable Wavelength • Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm 100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing Purpose This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-95 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Settings (continued) Parameter Description Options 11-267 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-96. Step 4 Click Apply. Table 11-96 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings Parameter Description Options Port Sets the port number. • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only) Received Trace Mode Sets the trace mode. • Off/None • Manual Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked. • Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled) • Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled) Transmit Section Trace String Size Sets the trace string size. Select either radio button. • 1 byte • 16 byte Transmit Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Expected Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex). String of trace string size Received (Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated. String of trace string size Auto-refresh If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes. Checked/unchecked (default) 11-268 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card. Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk settings. Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs. Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 11-97. Purpose This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards. Tools/Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP-G46 Log into CTC Required/As Needed As needed Onsite/Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 11-97 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings Parameter Description Options Port (Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services. 5 (Trunk) Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name. User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default. See the “DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port” task on page 16-16. Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI) • IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) • OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI) 11-269 Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Configuration Guide, Release 9.4 78-20254-02 Chapter 11 Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards Procedures for Transponder and Muxponder Cards Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP). DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings Service State (Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see the Administrative and Service States document. • IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) • OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled, automaticInService (ETSI) • OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) • OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI) ALS Mode Sets the ALS function mod